Home

4.6-E1

1. module_id 5 LOGO 02 LogoDataModule logo data HD small module_id 6 LOGO 03 LogoDataModule logo data SD large module_id 7 LOGO 04 LogoDataModule logo data SD 169 large module_id 8 LOGO 05 LogoDataModule PERN common data configured as 1 Carrousel logo data module for each logo type logo data HD large IN AERE AOPE PEES A ATE PEON ETO O Figure 5 6 Sample common data Carrousel structure 5 2 6 DII DownloadInfoIndication 5 2 6 1 Receiver software update To improve the reliability of downloads it is necessary to send compatibility descriptors that define the models eligible for downloads containing the same maker id model id version id group id and download_id values as those in the SDTT Other information is not stipulated 5 2 6 2 Data common to all receivers To improve the reliability of downloads and transmission of module information it is necessary to send compatibility descriptors that define the models eligible for downloads containing the same maker id model _id version_id group_id and download_id values as those in the SDTT The modele_info byte descriptor may omit the type descriptor but must contain the name descriptor The version must conform to 5 1 4 2 Table 5 2 shows the naming conventions for name descriptors while Table 5 3 shows correspondence between name descriptors and logo data where applicable Table 5 2 Name d
2. integer This property indicates the channel number The channel number can be defined by the following formula upnp channelNr One touch channel selection number x10000 3 digit number x10 One touch channel selection number The value assigned for a service member channel in the receiver should be used for this number If no one touch channel selection number is assigned to the service the value 0 should be used for this number 3 digit number As a general rule the service_id of the Service List Descriptor should be used for this number The Service List Descriptor is contained in the second loop TS loop of the NIT For example if the service_id is 101 0x0065 the 3 digit number should be 1 0 1 D If no information can be obtained from the NIT the previously set 3 digit number should be used 2 68 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 upnp scheduledStartTime string This property indicates the start time of an event As a general rule the converted form of the start_time that represents the start time of the event should be assigned to this property The start_time must be converted from the format MJD BCD to the following format specified in the DLNA guidelines The latter format is the same format for the de date The start_time is contained in the event loop of the EIT If the TOT does not exist the following format should be applied CCYY MM DDTHH MM SS If the summer
3. Basis of calculation 300 x the number of bytes specified in Table 4 1 Size patterns logo types for transmitted logos and 1 000 x the 8 byte look up table original_network_id transport_stream_id service_id logo_id Hardware size and performance specifications are detailed in ARIB STD B21 Section 12 3 2 Necessary Capacity and Performance of Receiver Hardware Flash memory implementation requirements are detailed in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 5 1 1 3 Flash Memory Implementation 6 2 Operation 6 2 1 Reservation function This function accepts notifications in accordance with the operational status and arranges software download reservations 1 The reservation function analyses each notification as it is received to determine whether it constitutes a download of data common to all receivers or a receiver software download consistent with the receiver information Depending on the outcome the reservation function then reserves the download 2 Ifthe notification information contains forced download and user consent is set to on then the download is reserved without the user s knowledge 3 Ifthe notification information contains optional download the available options are displayed together with the means of selection The user selects the download s to be reserved When the display menu 1 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 becomes available for the selected content the user is notified via a sma
4. data_component_id 0x0007 additional data component_info additional_ arib_bxml_info transmission_format 00 format for data carousel transmission and event message transmission entry_point_flag e Always 1 only in components with component_tag 0x40 When a datacasting program is selected components with component_tag 0x40 transmit the module containing the first document to be activated 0 for other components e At station selection the receiver obtains and presents the startup document for the data carousel transmitted by the component with component _tag 0x40 auto_start_flag Used Viewed by the receiver only at station selection When auto_start_flag 0 the viewer must press the data button to activate the datacasting engine for a datacasting program When auto_start_flag 1 the receiver activates the datacasting engine immediately For independent data programs auto_start_flag is always 1 document_resolution Indicates the BML content resolution and aspect ratio Uses the following three parameters only 0011 960x540 0100 720x480 16 9 0101 720x480 4 3 For details of the datacasting program resolution and aspect ratio control refer to 5 1 12 5 use_xml Value is 0 XML using application dependent tags not sent default_version_flag bml_major_version bml_minor_version can be omitted when this flag is 1 using default value for version number This will be interpreted
5. 6 7 8 Transmission specification Subtitles and superimposed text shall be transported through the independent PES method stream format identification 0x06 Scheduling Subtitles and superimposed text shall be transmitted via separate ESs Because they are transmitted based on the same PMT as the main service caption data shall not be pre distributed in the same program or before a program starts Number of ESs The number of ESs for subtitles and superimposed text that can be simultaneously transmitted to the same layer shall be one ES each i e two ESs in total ESs in multi view mode ESs in multi view mode shall be a maximum of one ES for subtitles and a maximum of one ES for superimposed text per component group The subtitling ES and superimposed text ES appearing in the component group whose component_group_id 0 the default component group that plays when a service is selected shall be made as the default subtitling ES and superimposed text ES respectively Do not fix the use of the subtitling and superimposed text ESs that appear in a component group whose component_group_id is not 0 but do not appear in the component group whose component_group_id is 0 ESs for temporary channels ESs for temporary channels shall be a maximum of one ES for subtitles and a maximum of one ES for superimposed text per provisional channel Multi language transmission It shall be made possible to transmit a maximum of two languages per ES at th
6. 2 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Free programs whose Free programs that are transmitted safely on the broadcast signals Highly contents need to be priority is placed on the protection of their contents These programs do not protected manage any information concerning viewers DLNA An acronym for Digital Living Network Alliance This organization defines and promotes the implementation guidelines for home network devices Bluetooth This short range wireless communication technology is defined by Bluetooth SIG This technology is widely used around the world and designed to enable wireless communication between mobile phones laptop computers and other potable devices MPEG PS Program Stream defined in ISO IEC 13818 1 MPEG 2 Systems 4 Requirements for User Interfaces 4 1 Prerequisite system A receiver unit must receive digital signals from broadcasting satellites that emit 11 7 to 12 0 GHz signals and are located at the orbit location 110 degrees of east latitude Broadcasting services must be provided for the entire Japan region For more information on the standard and operation of the signals received by a receiver that follows this document s specifications see ARIB STD B32 Video Coding Audio Coding and Multiplexing Specifications for Digital Broadcasting and Section 7 in Part 1 of this document This receiver should also be capable of distinguishing signals that can be converted to a program by fol
7. General purpose route certificate area a Registered outgoing call area The following is the size of the broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common area for BS RW BML3 0 only RW BML3 0 only RW Level 3 only RW Level 2 and 3 only broadcasting to be newly added in terrestrial and satellite common use receivers e Space for 20 broadcasters 2KB 64 bytes 32 blocks per broadcaster If the ID used by the previous broadcaster is assigned to the local broadcaster ID broadcaster_id a new broadcaster should completely erase the relevant part of the broadcaster specific NVRAM area or broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common area before use For the above refer to Appendix 5 10 3 3 Actions different from the actions of conventional type receivers Unless otherwise specified for presentation both in BML1 0 and BML3 0 terrestrial and satellite common use receivers shall behave as specified in TR B14 There are some differences in action between terrestrial and satellite common use receivers and conventional type BS receivers Table 10 3 shows the functions that operate differently Table 10 3 Differences in action between terrestrial and satellite common use receivers and conventional type BS receivers Conventional type Terrestrial and satellite receivers common use receivers References in TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 Remarks 1 2 2 Appendix 10 Function Display resoluti
8. 2 Characters in row 1 cells 13 18 and row 2 cell 94 shall be non spacing refer to 7 4 5 characters 7 4 4 Display block The display block is defined as follows Word direction display block size character spacing 2 font size character spacing 2 Line direction display block size line spacing 2 font size line spacing 2 Tf character spacing line spacing is an odd number value a value for the character spacing 2 line spacing 2 before the font in relation to the word direction line direction shall be rounded down and a value for the character spacing 2 line spacing 2 after the font in relation to the word direction line direction shall be rounded up The relationships among display block font size character spacing and line spacing are illustrated in Figure 7 3 Figure 7 8 for horizontal writing and in Figure 7 9 Figure 7 14 for vertical writing If character spacing line spacing is not a multiple of 4 a value for character spacing 4 line spacing 4 shall be rounded down 3 84 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Word direction display block size Line spacing 2 Line direction display block size Font size Line spacing 2 Action position reference point Character spacing 2 Font size Character spacing 2 Figure 7 3 Relationships among display block font size standard character spacing and line spacing in horizontal writing Word direction display block size Line spacing 2 Font
9. ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 5 8 Preferred EPG display format Display indicating presence Data enriched Based on associated_contents_flag in the EIT of associated datacasting program display data content descriptor the program table or service station selection display indicates the presence of additional data associated with the television program EPG display when region EPG display not required Region information should be displayed in an designation applies to the obvious location such as the title program CA data program local Indicates that program or local content is fee paying content display When already purchased this should be indicated in the display 5 2 Independent PES transmission specification usage Chapter 7 describes the broadcasting format for subtitles and superimposed text Independent PES broadcasting is not used for other components 5 3 Data carousel and event message transmission specification 5 3 1 Data carousel transmission operation e Up to 256 modules can be transmitted per data carousel e The module structure of a data carousel may change during the course of an event i e the number of modules may fluctuate In this case the DII version is updated e The interval between transmission of modules in the data carousel may vary depending on the type of module 5 3 1 1 Introduction of data events and local content e The concept of a data event with no direc
10. and 0x10 0x2F for audio When an event containing the stream is selected the audio and video is played by EPG or equivalent Television audio and video is sometimes used in independent data programs Datacasting audio and video audio and video streams which are viewed played exclusively from datacasting content with component_tag values in the range 0x50 Ox7F These are not played using EPG or equivalent and switching using audio video buttons or equivalent is not featured e Data enriched and independent television programs can view AV streams either by specifying the component_tag value directly hereafter direct tag specification or by specifying 1 for component_tag and viewing the stream selected by EPG hereafter default specification e The default specification method is normally used to view television audio and video components from datacasting content as per the models presented in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Description 2 Audio Playback Control However direct tag specification is also permitted in the following cases to prevent potential conflicts between the datacasting content specification and a television audio video switching operation using the remote control keys or other receiver function l Where the event contains only one television video component it can be viewed via direct tag specification Where the event contains only one television audio component which is not dual mono it c
11. e Asa general rule this descriptor should be inserted to an SIT e JST time should be inserted at an interval of less than 10 seconds e If one service is inserted to a partial TS only one partial TS time descriptor should be inserted to the SIT If multiple services are inserted to a partial TS only the partial TS time descriptor that is inserted to the 1 loop of the SIT should hold JST_time and the descriptor inserted to the 2 loop should not hold JST_time The descriptor inserted to the 2 loop only manages the time information of the relevant services e The other_descriptor_status needs to be set to 0 when only the Partial TS time descriptor has been changed and other descriptors within the SIT have not been changed e Errors in the time inserted by JST_time should be within 2 seconds ae es ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 23 shows the output operation rule for each field of this descriptor Table 6 23 Output operation rules for the Partial TS Time Descriptor Output operation rule for each field descriptor_tag The value 0xC3 should be assigned to this field descriptor length The length of the descriptor should be assigned to this field event_version_number This field becomes valid if the descriptor is inserted to the 2nd loop of an SIT The value for this field should be incremented by 1 every time the event information in the relevant service is changed The initial value
12. stream that transports the relevant message 9 2 12 1 Operating an event message transmission specification in television programs or data enriched television programs for which a linked pre stored data program exists e Because data content does not exist in a television program data content descriptors shall not be stored in its EIT To be strictly treated as an ordinary television program e For components to transport event messages in the relevant television program they shall be operated in the same way as in data programs Components with stream_type 0x0D e When playing a stored linked pre stored data program the data broadcasting engine shall receive event messages according to the settings of a BML document In such a case e_ref shall not be omitted in the BML document and components shall be specified explicitly 9 2 13 Guidelines on the receiver s actions related to linked pre stored data programs at channel selection Table 9 5 Receiver s actions related to linked pre stored data programs at channel selection Selection method Selection operation Receiver s action Channel selection on the remote control Selecting a data enriched television program When a linked pre stored data program is stored If 1 is set to auto_start_flag in the data encoding method descriptor of a linked pre stored data program launches the data broadcasting engine and starts presenting a startup document
13. the offset time should be assigned to this field The value for this field should be obtained from the local_time_offset of the local time offset descriptor in the TOT If daylight saving time summer time does not need to be applied the value 0x000000 should be assigned to this field For more information on daylight saving time see Section 4 of Part 1 of this document offset_flag One of the following values should be assigned to this field to indicate whether the offset time should be added to or subtracted from the JST_time 0 Offset time should be added to JST_time 1 Offset time should be subtracted from JST time Other_descriptor_status One of the following values should be assigned to this field to indicate the statuses of other descriptors that are inserted to the SIT 0 Other descriptors have not been changed 1 Other descriptors have been changed JST_time_flag This field indicates whether the next field represents JST_time The value 1 should be assigned to this field if the next field represents JST time JST_time The time when the partial TS is output should be assigned to this field The value for this field should be obtained from the JST_time field of the TOT When JST_time needs to be updated errors should be within 2 seconds 2 53 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 2 4 4 Descriptors that can be inserted to the 2nd loop service loop of
14. whether or not the version of content has been updated shall be checked and if an update is found preferably the event shall be stored again 9 2 14 4 Television program viewing reservation For viewing reservation of a television program or data enriched television program for which a linked pre stored data program is specified by the hyperlink type combined_prior_data preferably programmed storage of the relevant linked pre stored data program shall be automatically performed If multiple linked pre stored data programs are linked to a television program or data enriched television program one of them shall be selected automatically in accordance with 9 2 14 3 9 2 15 Storage operation processing related to linked pre stored data programs 9 2 15 1 Information to be stored when storage is performed The following shows information to be stored into media when a linked pre stored data program is stored 3 123 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 9 6 Information to be stored when a linked pre stored data program is stored Remarks BIT e broadcaster_id Required for access to the NVRAM broadcaster specific area PMT e auto start flag e independent_flag e Digital copy control descriptor DI Module information descriptors Type Expire CompressionType Control EIT e Content name Attributes of the hyperlink destination are e content id stored to make it easy to judge the existence e Attributes of a telev
15. 1 Square pixel 2 4 3 display 3 16 9 display frame_rate_code 4 30 1 001 Hz 7 60 1 001 Hz progressive_sequence 0 Interlaced scanning 1 Progressive scanning low_delay 1 Does not include B pictures colour_primaries 1 Rec ITU R BT 709 BT 1361 Transfer_characteristics 1 Rec ITU R BT 709 BT 1361 1 Rec ITU R BT 709 BT 1361 Note 1 In MPEG 2 Encoding ITU T H 262 1 088 lines are actually encoded In fact data of 1 088 video lines is encoded by adding blank data of 8 video lines dummy data under the active lines using the encoder Out of the 1 088 video lines the decoder outputs 1 080 from the top i e 1 080 active lines excluding dummy data as video signals Note 2 The decode and display timing shall be controlled by a timestamp value in the PES header and the vbv_delay value shall be OxXFFFF Note 3 When progressive_frame 0 a timing difference exists between 2 fields in a frame due to interlaced scanning the display of a field s frozen image is preferable and when progressive _frame 1 the timings of 2 fields are the same the display of a frame s frozen image is preferable Note 4 When low_delay 1 the decode and display timestamp values shall be the same DTS PTS Only PTS timestamps shall be added to still picture I frames Note 5 When sequence_display_extension is not transported values for color_primaries transfer_characteristics and matrix_coefficients shall be processed as equivalent t
16. 1 2 3 Appendix 4 Gee a 1 2 1 Appendix 3 3 2 3 2 1 6 3 5 9 6 2 Use after function check through the receiver application identification function 1 4 1 5 13 3 3 3 1 3 2 1 2 3 O O 5 12 5 B24 Section 2 Appendix 3 5 12 6 3 5 13 3 5 14 10 4 5 12 6 9 6 5 14 Communication content is used in 3 0 only O O ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Function BML1 0 BML3 0 References in TR B14 Section 3 Part Use Use 2 Remarks Secure communication through TLS 5 14 14 2 3 1 8 A route certificate shall be put in the module OxFFFF in the entry ES A route certificate descriptor shall be put in DII When secure communication is carried out from broadcasting content through transmitTextDataOverIP BML1 0 can be used only for use of web sites starting with https or for transition to sites starting with https Reading from the terrestrial digital NVRAM broadcaster common area Reading from and writing to the terrestrial digital NVRAM affiliate specific area Reading from and writing to the BS digital NVRAM broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common use area Reading from and writing to the bookmark area O O Registration to the registered outgoing call NVRAM_ O O Preset time call transmission function that supports 5 16 5 the registered outgoing call NVRAM 5 9 6 2 Use after function check through the receiver application identification function Calling up the resi
17. 960x540 720x480 4 3 resolution Subtitle plane 960x540 720x480 4 3 Video plane resolution 1920x1080 720x480 4 3 Still picture plane resolution 1920x1080 720x480 4 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Text diagram plane at datacasting resolution 960x540 16 9 is expanded by x 2 in the vertical and horizontal directions for layering with video and still picture e The following table shows the datacasting resolution that can be combined with compressed video in low level video format 352x240 16 9 4 3 Datacasting resolution 960x540 720x480 720x480 16 9 16 9 4 3 Low level 352x240 O video format 16 9 fs 352x240 4 3 3 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e The datacasting resolution that can be combined with 720p video is 960x540 16 9 e In line with amendments to ARIB STD B21 investigations will be conducted where necessary with the establishment of a new MPEG resolution 5 6 Both video and still picture are YCbCr 4 2 2 at full resolution and valid switching units are 2 pixels Thus for the purpose of still picture video switching in the switched still picture video plane at 1 2x1 2 resolution of video and still picture planes 7 There are two visual patterns for displaying combinations of video and still picture planes In the first pattern the video is positioned on top of
18. As a general rule the text_char contained in the second loop of the Short Event Descriptor that is contained in the event loop of EIT should be assigned to this field 2 69 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 This property represents the detailed description of an event As a general rule information about the item name should be obtained from the item_description_char field of the Extended Event Descriptor contained in the event loop of the EIT Information about the event description should be obtained from the item_char filed of the same descriptor Multiple instances of this property can be set for a channel item and each property instance must correspond to each Extended Event Descriptor The order of string these property instances must be in accordance with the descriptor_number and the ascending order is preferred If multiple item descriptions are assigned to one item name these item descriptions need to be combined together to form a single arib longDescription The item name should be written on the first 24 bytes of this property and the item description should be written on the remaining bytes after the 24 byte If the length of the item name is less than 24 bytes the space characters should be inserted to the remaining bytes until the 24 byte This property represents the resolution of the output contents The resolution must consist of both the number of horizontal pixels and the number of v
19. BO PAP ea e e e a e REE E a an 2 38 659 PMD eiernes a a a a a a R A 2 40 6 2 3 DIT Discontinuity Information Table essere ieee tttttssrerreetttttstssssstesetesettttrstesssnet 2 45 6 2 4 SIT Selection Information Table s ssssssesseessessseeesssseeseeeesesesseeesneessnessnessnessnseeseneens 2 47 7 Other Note Srozsinir ei ae i e a a e e a e a eae 2 61 7 1 Sample processing for determining whether a partial TS can be recorded to a D VH6S 2 61 7 2 Copy Generation Management System Analog CGMS A sssssesssssssssssssssrssrssssessessessessrssesseses 2 62 JA ANSE ARGUE CLIN A oo eta eee Sod Neen eos Row cdo EEEE a aa eE LAE ES 2 62 7 39 COMS A tansmissonmetod ee ees Sk AO Sate ics cal h ds aos ae 2 62 2 iii ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 2 3 Allocation of an identification signal Pene K AALER DEUNA AA LS PAEO 01s aS FS ede Seta die bie bids Ba S S bo L AELS Ar UIME Ne Ne dee ease 2 64 7 3 Assurance of the uniqueness of a broadcasting program and its Contents ccccccessseesteeeteeees 2 65 8 ANNEX C E evesoeanent esbecnenesibede 2 66 8 1 Operation specifications for an IP interface eecceccccessceeseeeeseeeeseeceeseeeseecsseeeeeseeeeeeeneeensaeenes 2 66 8 1 1 Packet format P AEE LEELA T TEE EES TASTET ASEE OSEE TTET 2 66 8 1 D Operation of partial TS output AAAA a ANAE EATA REAA ENEA AE EAA AEAEE AAAA AENA AEAEE EAN EANNAN 2 66 8 1 3 Operation rules for tuner description AARAA ANANKA KAAR
20. Data carousel Data carousel transmission specification as stipulated in ARIB STD B24 Section 3 Image PES Data structure used for transmission of video data encoded as per ISO IEC 13818 1 Low layer service A layer broadcast that can be received at low C N times Chunk Name given to information block in PNG and MNG file formats Audio PES Data structure used for transmission of audio data encoded as per ISO IEC 13818 1 News flash subtitling Fast subtitling service for television broadcasts commonly used for news flashes Subtitles Subtitling service for television broadcasts which is linked to the video content Superimposed text Subtitling service where the text is not synchronized with the main video audio and or data content commonly used for ongoing updates and raw news Temporary channel Multi view Services provided on temporary SDTV channels on surplus bandwidth created by reducing bit rates without compromising existing editing services commonly used for news flashes Splitting HDTV bandwidth into several up to three SDTV that can be used to watch different but related content simultaneously e g during a golf broadcast the main channel might be the conventional broadcast with the 17 hole as Sub 1 and the 18 hole as Sub 2 3 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 Basic Receiver Unit Functionality for Reception of Data Broadcasts This chapter de
21. NPT2 ectiteas bee NT IET AOA ETER MN x NPT reference message NPTr NPT1 STCr STC1 NPT reference message NPTr NPT2 At least 2 sec FE STCr STC3 Transmitted zat one second intervals during this period Updateiintervals are 5 NPT1 seconds or more Seale 1 1 Scale 1 1 STC1 STC2 TC3 STC Event star B c D E lt gt Si lt gt So gt Figure 5 7 Transmission of NPT reference messages 5 3 4 5 Event message processing by the receiver 1 General purpose event messages e Where the BML document contains an interrupt event with EventMEssageFired type attribute DSMCC section that sends general purpose messages is subject to filtering in accordance with the following conditions component tag specified in es_ref attribute event msg_group_id 0x000 data_event_id for currently displayed local content If es_ref is omitted it is interpreted as a component of the currently displayed local content When DSMCC section is first obtained or when a version upgrade for DSMCC section is detected a multimedia encoding system interrupt event is generated based on the event_msg_ id for the general purpose event message descriptors in the relevant DSMCC section and the message _id message_ version specified in the BML document Time modes The following time modes are used to specify the ignition time 0x00 immediate ignition and 0x02 NPT time The receiver generates a multimedia content interrupt ev
22. O setDelayedTransmissionDaaO S beo be So O setCacheResourceOverIP CO Note 7 Interactive function function to obtain the delayed call transmission status that is ormon Pewee BASTE mode proestures anii gomets getDelayedTransmissionStatus b b T O 3 140 Oooo T W a en een a T a ae ae pa e al a T 0 Ojo O 2 Se Ee Eas rs ae i i pS ed as a Tae Note 2 Note 2 PEREA eel Note 2 Note 2 ae eee ee ee o oe O ft ee o i Oooo sd i OJo OJO ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 SSS es getDelayedTransmissionResult Interactive function function to obtain the line connection status getPrefix Number Interactive function mass call reception service el OTe O OD Interactive function encrypted communication by using CAS startCASEncryption SSS O transmitWithCASEncryption oS O O fendCASEncryption ooo Interactive function encrypted communication by secret key encryption instead of CAS setEncryptionkey oo e beginEncryptionO S O c oO c oO O 3 Note 2 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 O O O Action control function reloadActiveDocument getTuningLinkageSource OD oep Of QED _ getLinkSourceServiceSt o gt SSS O getLinkSourceEventSt S O e RDDO S OSO getBrowserVersion o oS eA getProgramID Q SS O getActiveDocumetO S lockSeren0 OT unlockScreen O
23. Shared for 960x540 and 720x480 No proportional fonts Character Kanji characters types 1 and 2 hiragana characters katakana characters types alphameric characters symbols etc 16 Font size Maru Gothic 16 20 24 30 36 pixels Futo Maru Gothic 30 Kaku Gothic 20 24 4 gradations 16 For details on character types refer to 6 4 1 2 17 Character embellishment such boundary highlighting is to be achieved via software processing The means of implementation such as loading of dedicated fonts is receiver dependent 3 20 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 3 Remote control 4 3 1 Datacasting keys Table 4 7 lists the remote control keys used in datacasting together with content creation guidelines To avoid confusion no button should have several different meanings assigned to it Where a button has more than one meaning the operation of the button should be described to the end user within the relevant content Table 4 7 Remote control keys used in datacasting Up Down and Left Right keys numeric keys Back Undoes the operation Backspace in user input text or Delete All Stop calls in both directions When a connection is in progress the operation command is at the receiver ideally a message that the connection will be broken should be displayed in the content when the Back key is pressed after the connection it is in the content BML document may be used for Back Note that pr
24. The following sections describe the operation rules for the properties of the turner container and channel item in a digital satellite receiver 8 1 3 1 General operation rule for tuner description The properties of a turner container and channel item must not be used with no values or only blank characters inserted if the properties belong to the following name space which is defined in 9 2 3 Tuner description specifications in ARIB STD B21 xmlns arib urn schemas arib or jp elements 1 0 The properties that do not belong to the above name space must follow the rules specified by the DLNA guidelines 2 66 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 1 3 2 Operation rules for the tuner container and channel item Table 8 1 shows the operation rules for the properties of a tuner container A BS digital recetver must implement the properties with the implementation level Required as described in Table 8 1 as well as the requirements specified in DLAN guidelines Table 8 1 Operation rules for the properties of a tuner container Implementation property T property name level type property description This property contains the name of the de title ding broadcasting system A digital satellite receiver should assign Digital Satellite Broadcasting to this field using full width characters This property indicates whether the tuner container is in accordance with 9 2 IP interface specifications of ARIB STD B21 and
25. The module should ideally be deleted from the storage media at this point 3 54 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 3 6 3 Filtering resources for datacasting reception Table 5 14 shows the maximum filtering resources that the receiver can use for datacasting reception other than SI PSI reception Note that these figures may be exceeded in certain receivers depending on the implementation philosophy Transmission operation prerequisites 1 DII monitoring for both the carousel currently on display and the entry carousel return to entry flag refer to 5 3 1 4 2 Module and resource referencing only for modules transmitted by the same component as that of the document currently on display except for module acquisition for document switching refer to 8 7 3 A general purpose event message could potentially be transmitted in a component different to of the carousel currently on display However there is only one type of filtering sub table for monitoring of general purpose event messages Thus the required filtering resources are maximum PID filtering x 1 and section filtering x 1 The same applies to NPT reference messages refer to 5 3 4 Table 5 14 Maximum filtering resources used to receive datacasting services Purpose PID filtering Section filtering Remarks 1 DII monitoring of carousel currently 1 1 on display 2 Return to flag entry carousel DIT 1 1 monitoring 3 Module acquisition lock in memor
26. The module currently on display is discarded and the startup document contained in the module with moduleId 0 in entry carousel is obtained and displayed refer to Figure 5 6 Ifreturn_to_entry_flag 0 in entry component DII current document remains on display refer to Figure 5 6 Inboth cases if the entry component document is being viewed then the receiver operation is as described in Receiver response to data event switching on the component being viewed above lt EC data event switching Return 1 gt lt Return 0 Entry component EC i k m Component currently displayed Other components Component switching Component switching via via content control return to entry flag Figure 5 6 Entry component data_event_id updating and the return to entry flag 5 3 2 DownloadInfoIndication DII message usage DIIs for the current viewing carousel and the entry carousel must be received in order to display multimedia content Figure 5 5 shows the structure of the DII in relation to local content data event Due to the limited processing power of the receiver the constant minimum transmission interval for all component DIIs except during carousel switching is 100 millisecond DSMCC section transmits DII as per the specifications No more than one DII message i e one DSMCC_ section sending DII is permitted Thus dsmccAdaptationHeader is not used Module information stored in the DII me
27. display is specified If a news flash subtitling sound overlaps other sounds the former shall play first The news flash subtitling sound shall play continuously If the playback of an AIFF C sound is specified more than once in principle the one specified later shall be executed first If an MPEG 2 AAC file and AIFF C sound are instructed at the same time the MPEG 2 AAC file shall play first Table 6 10 Encoding methods that make simultaneous playback of sounds possible AAC LC AAC LC AIFF C jets aa stream file file Main Stored Stored a Newe Tash AAC LC 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 stream Main x AAC stream O O O first ROG LG Specified x 9 file Stored later first AAC frist AAC frist News flash first x x AIFF C m se x file Stored Sari Bares later News flash first AIFF C x x file Preinstalled Specified later sound first News flash first AIFF C x file News flash Specified later first 1 While an MPEG 2 AAC sound PES and AIFF C sound are being synthesized together and outputted if the MPEG 2 AAC sound PES disappears the playback of the AIFF C sound will not be guaranteed 2 While an AIFF C sound is playing not being synthesized it is not possible to synthesize it with an MPEG 2 AAC sound PES 3 Ifthe sampling frequency of the MPEG 2AAC LC AAC LC stream Main which is transported through an audio PES is 32kH
28. 0 ackPeriod As per the specifications 0 tCDownloadWindow As per the specifications 0 tCDownloadScenario Used Describes the module in the carousel The timeout setting based that has the longest transmission cycle on this value is receiver dependent compatibilityDescriptor As per the specifications when contents CompatibilityDescriptorL inserted but not used ength 2 DescriptorCount 0 numberOfModules Maximum 256 modules sent per data carousel numberOfModules 0 may be used to indicate an empty carousel For details of empty carousel refer to 5 3 1 6 moduleld moduleVersion As per the specifications moduleSize Maximum module size is MB For details refer to 5 3 3 Module information area Contains descriptors listed below Private data area The DII sent in the entry component of the event tag value 0x40 may contain arib_bxml_ private _data_descriptor as per the specifications DIIs sent in other components do not contain this descriptor Where 1 the entry carousel data event switches and 2 the descriptor exists and 3 return_to_entry_flag is 1 the receiver will discard the document currently being viewed and display the startup document for the entry carousel Refer to 5 3 1 4 Descriptor_tag OxF0 descriptor_length 1 Descriptors stored in the module information area Type descriptor Required for direct mapping of one resource to one module N
29. 10000 lt upnp channelNr gt lt dc date gt 2008 09 18T18 00 00 lt de date gt lt res protocolInfo http get application X arib cp CONTENTFORMAT amp quot video vnd dIna mpeg tts amp quot ARIB OR JP_PN MPEG_TTS_CP gt URL1 lt res gt lt res protocolInfo http get video vnd dIna mpeg tts DLNA ORG_ PN MPEG _TS JP_T DLNA ORG FLAGS 01100000000000000000000000000000 gt URL 1 lt res gt lt arib objectIype gt ARIB_BS lt arib objectType gt lt item gt 8 1 4 2 The URL to the content that is protected by DTCP IP The URL to the content protected by DTCP IP should be assigned to the res value of the tuner description in a digital satellite receiver This URL does not need to use the URI format recommended by DTCP VISE 8 1 4 3 The Content Type header field of an HTTP header When HTTP request or HTTP response is performed for a content that is protected by DTCP IP the Content Type header inserted to the HTTP header must include the address and port of the host that performs AKE This rule is defined in DTCP V1SE The MIME types that should be used for this Content Type header are the same as the MIME types that are used in 8 1 4 1 Therefore in the case of output with partial TS it is written as follows Content Type application x dtcp1 DTCP1HOST host DTCP1PORT port CONTENTFORMAT video vnd dlna mpeg tts In addition in the case of output with MPEG PS it is written as follows Content Type application x dtcp1
30. 170 128 100 85 170 255 128 101 85 255 0 128 102 85 255 85 128 103 85 255 170 128 104 85 255 255 128 105 170 0 85 128 106 170 0 255 128 107 170 85 0 128 108 170 85 85 128 109 170 85 170 128 110 170 85 255 128 111 170 170 85 128 112 170 170 255 128 113 170 255 0 128 114 170 255 85 128 115 170 255 170 128 116 170 255 255 128 117 255 0 85 128 118 255 0 170 128 119 255 85 0 128 120 255 85 85 128 121 255 85 170 128 122 255 85 255 128 123 255 170 0 128 124 255 170 85 128 125 255 170 170 128 126 255 170 255 128 127 255 255 85 128 Appendix 2 Module Compression Format For module compression based on RFC 1950 ZLIB Compressed Data Format Specification version 3 3 the same compression format as PNG is used Refer to Table Appendix 2 Table Appendix 2 Detailed operation of zlib compression format Field Use Compression Method 4bit 8 deflate only Compression Info 4bit 7 or less window 32KB or less Flags FCHECK Sbit Value specified in RFC 1950 Preset Dictionary 1bit 0 no preset dictionary only Compression Level 2bit Free Shall be ignored when decoding 3 149 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Appendix 3 Notes on Access to NVRAM NVRAM life In general NVRAM is assumed to be implemented by using semiconductor memory devices called flash memory There is a limit to the number of times for writing to this device and that becomes the life of
31. 2 28 5 8 4 Specifications for an IP interface sssssssesssesseeeeeeesseesseeessnsesseeesseeesseeeneesniessnnssnessneeesy 2 28 529 CA module mtertaces ir 13 sdrcteasede tet deals Se sees ede ten sees deat a trate Ste Beate i aoe ne 2 28 2 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 my K Oem O16 sn1g e 0 01 100 eeteeerngreeSertpnertreeertpe arr te se ae or tere te a Pamper ter 2 28 5 10 1 Analog video output sss eeeeieessseeesieeesseesssseeesesssseeesseessucesseeesiessnseeesseessiens 2 28 5 10 2 Digital audio outpute ssssssssessssesssseesseessseseeeesseesnessneessnsessnsesseeessseesneesseessneessnessnsesseneesy 2 30 5 10 3 Hi speed digital interface output sssesssessesseesseeesseeeesneessnsesseeeeseeesseesseessnnessnessnseesenesny 2 30 5 10 4 Digital video outpute s sssesssesssesessseeseseeseeesseesseesneessnessnsessnsessescesseessesneessneessneessnseesenessy 2 31 5 10 5 Digital video and audio output eette sess eseseeseeeeesneessneessnsessnsesseeesseessseesnessneesneeeseneens 2 31 S11 Download funtion snn oinen E A EEN NE E ANE EE NE 2 31 3 12 Reception service at Shipments ian na Baie A Ae LAS Ss AA S S 2 31 DVB e Syste nr tE Stn E teh oes Re oes Riche eee es ed eee cad tt ee he es 2 31 i3 ecard et ace aoe eee ected ase nat eterna 2 31 5 13 2 Telephone line connection testere esesteeeseessseessnessneessnsesseeesseesseeeneesnessnessneeey 2 32 S14 Accumulation Tunc HON vss cise eects sass cies see harass E E A nad ae O eee 2 33
32. 32KB e At the time of n PES packet transmission completion time Td time the total amount of information in the PES packets whose transmission starts after transmission of the n packet shall not exceed the reception buffer size 64KB e The receiver s action when the data size exceeds the reception buffer size depends on the implementation of the receiver 7 2 4 Using data groups Following caption management data updates data_group_id shall be transmitted with its data group being switched from Group A to B and Group B to A Note that if caption management data is not transmitted for 3 minutes or more either ID Group A or B may be transmitted regardless of the previous ID data_group_version shall not be used For caption management data with the ID of Group A the receiver processes caption text text bitmap data and DRCS for Group A only while for caption management data with the ID of Group B the receiver processes caption text for Group B only When caption management data of the same ID as the current already received caption management data holds is received it shall be treated as resent data so that initialization will not be performed by using that data When caption management data of the same ID as the current already received management data holds is received multiple times caption text received each time shall be treated as new text Table 7 3 Data group parameters Field data_group_id As per the specifications dat
33. 8 1 Using component taGs eeeecceescccessceeseeeeseeeesceceeseeeeeeeeeecsaeeseceeseseeeeseeenaeessaeeeeaeeesaeeees 3 79 7 2 8 2 Using PMT E E O T E E 3 80 7 2 8 3 Stream format identification 0 a aa aa iae aa E aT i Esa RER 3 80 7 2 8 4 Using descriptors cccccccccsssccessecesseceeseeeseeeescecsaecssseceeseeeeseecsseeesaecseaeeeeseeseseeensaeensaeenes 3 80 7 2 8 5 Data encoding method descriptor cccccecsscessseeeseeseceeeceseeeeeecsseeeseseeeeseeeseeenseeeneeeenes 3 80 7 2 8 6 Target area descriptor sesent niione iee EEEREN SEEEN EOE SEAE SERAN 3 80 7 2 8 7 Data contents descriptor ssesseeseeeseeeeeessessesetesrtesstesrtesstesesssressresstsseesseesseesseesseesseese 3 80 7 3 Video resolution and subtitles and superimposed text display formats ccscccsseeseeeeeeteeeenes 3 81 73 1 Display formats r teesteeseeeeeeetseeeee tees teeeercneeeecenentecenaneecesasisencnsacaseseneneasecenaneeececaneas 3 81 7 3 2 Display aregieeerereerereerererrerereerereereerereereerereereerereerereererrereerereerereeseeseeseserrereeserereererrereerereeerereee 3 81 7 3 3 Initial action position esie g Daigle ese ee tial gis eleie ce sv Sjeis si dlelbie Sieleass sie Sadiele gid sisisle s oie cleie sisidie sie Scie we Sieiein se tiejeec eivia dese cec si ET 3 82 7 4 Characters used in subtitles and superimposed text ccccccccssccssseceeseeeeseeesseeesseeesseeeeseeeeeeenseees 3 82 7 4 1 Character code T A A a E E T 3 82 7 4 2 Ch
34. 8 2 3 Using information on the right to access the area reserved for BS digital broadcasters for wide band CS digital broadcasters In BS digital broadcasting a broadcaster can set access right information for its own part of the broadcaster specific area to permit access to that part from services executed by other broadcasters Reading writing information from to the BS broadcaster specific area by other broadcasters shall be performed based on the above access right information The BS broadcaster specific area shall not include an area used for writing information on the right to access blocks X_BPA_setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider shall execute to set access right information To permit access to the BS broadcaster specific area from services executed by other broadcasters a BS broadcaster shall at least write in its local content X_BPA_setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider in the GlobalCode or onload in a document such as a startup document that never fails to execute and then create a BML document to ensure execution of the relevant function Access right information shall be set block by block based on the fixed length blocks in the broadcaster specific area X BPA setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider Sets information of an access right to the local part of the broadcaster specific NVRAM area for other broadcasters Syntax Number X BPA setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider i
35. AAAA KEEA NAAA AAA ASEARA AN E AEAEE AREKE 2 66 8 1 4 Content selection PNA EEE A A A E E N E cleleieis ee 2 79 2 iv ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 1 Introduction This chapter describes the function specifications for digital satellite broadcasting receivers Digital satellite broadcasting companies that accept outsourcing must operate their businesses assuming that these specifications are the standards The following table shows the degree of priority for each specification from the viewpoint of a digital satellite broadcasting company Required A Optional B These specifications do not restrict product designs of receiver manufacturers That is some manufacturers may refrain from implementing some specified functions implement some functions differently or implement functions superior to specified ones Note however that this functional discrepancy may lead to an error Broadcasting programs in our country Japan are provided through various types of broadcasting services Various rights associated with these programs including copyrights and neighboring rights must be protected through a total system Protection of rights promotes provision of high quality programs and healthy advancement and development of broadcasting As such a receiver unit should ideally assure the uniqueness of a program and clearly convey what a program intends to express For more information about the uniqueness of a program see the section 7 3 Ass
36. ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 BMMexec TEE Interpreter BSCRexec Display memory video plane Display memory still picture plane System Decoder Control memory TEN MPEG 2 switched video linear still picture plane Audio SEEN Decoder Video Display memory D d text diagrams ecoder planet MPEG 1 2 Still picture decoder Text Display memory diagrams g subtitles plane decoder Figure 4 2 Basic receiver unit reference model TBn Transport buffer for elementary stream n Bn Main buffer for elementary stream n in decoder Bcontents Buffer for multimedia content data sent via data carousel Where a module has been compressed with DII Compression Type descriptor for transmission both compressed and expanded data will be buffered BcontentsNV Storage buffer for multimedia content data sent via data carousel Optional in basic receiver unit XfrBA Buffer used to transfer audio content in file format to the audio decoder BMMexec Multimedia code execution memory BSCRexec Script execution memory Bwork Multimedia content execution memory combining BMMexec and BSCRexec BproNV Non volatile memory used to store information on individual receiver users and unique broadcaster information Other buffers For details on the definition refer to ISO IEC13818 1 and DAVIC 1 4 Specifications Part 9 4 2 Presentation functions Presentation functions fo
37. B10 Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System 3 ARIB STD B24 Data Coding and Transmission specification for Digital Broadcasting 3 Definition of terms Receiver software Constituent components of the receiver software including applications libraries the OS drivers and data Data common to all Data which is stored in and used by all receiver units including logo data genre receivers code tables program characteristics code tables and keyword lists Common data is normally stored in non volatile memory Logo Logos for operations such as EPG and program selection are common to all receivers and are defined separately for every broadcaster and or service Logo ID IDs are assigned to all broadcaster logos to ensure consistency of usage by broadcaster associations and other organizations Logo IDs are common to all six logo types Logo type Six different types of logo data defined for various display formats including SDTV and HDTV Genre code Code used in content_nibble_level_1 4 bit and content_nibble_level2 field 4 bit to indicate the genre Often used in content descriptors Program characteristics Code used in user_nibble field 8 bit to indicate the genre Often used in code content descriptors Keywords Pre defined terms used in program descriptions such as starring producer and storyline Module information Download module information contained in mo
38. Component_group descriptor and represent videos audios or subtitles In addition a receiver should not remember the mode that has been selected before a user selects an ES in the multi view TV function 4 6 3 Audio ES selection Multiple audio ESs may be sent from a single service A user should be able to select all ESs When a user first moves to a channel the default ES should be selected A user should be able to use the audio button of a remote to switch from the main audio to the sub audio and from one ES to another ES in a circular manner If a receiver is implemented with a menu interface in which a user can choose a desired audio the receiver must extract information from Audio _Component_descriptor to display appropriate audio selection choices 4 6 4 Subtitle ES selection A maximum of one subtitle ES and one caption ES can be attached to a single service A user should be able to switch from no subtitles to one of the multiple languages within the subtitle ES The default subtitle setting should be no subtitles A user should be able to use the subtitle button to perform the above operation in a 2 13 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 circular manner If a receiver is implemented with a menu interface in which a user can choose a desired subtitle ES the receiver must extract information from selector_byte of data_content_descriptor to display appropriate subtitle selection choices In addition a user should be able
39. ES4 lt Local content Local content Figure 5 1 Local content and events 5 1 2 2 Local content and ES Each piece of local content is transmitted on a separate data carousel ES Local content may be used to reference video audio ES and or event message ES The streaming type identifier for components used to transmit data carousels and event messages is always 0x0D 5 1 2 3 Component tags usage Table 5 3 shows tags for components used in datacasting services including subtitles and superimposed text Note that this excludes video and audio components used in television and radio services Table 5 3 Usage of component tags in datacasting Component type Component tag value Subtitles default 0x30 Subtitles other 0x31 0x37 Superimposed text default 0x38 Superimposed text other 0x39 0x3F Entry component default 0x40 Entry component other 0x41 Ox4F All other components data carousel event message AV 0x50 0x7F stream referenced from datacasting only A video and audio stream which is not selected in the EPG or equivalent receiver menu and can only be played from datacasting content 3 27 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 1 2 4 Entry component identifier The default component in datacasting programs is always the component with a tag value of 0x40 The entry component that sends the startup document at station selection is identified by t
40. HD 960 540 and 24 dot fonts are used 2 Auser should be able to easily display the detail information of the currently watched program 4 4 5 Reserved program display 1 Areceiver should be implemented with a display function for a reserved program list 4 5 Program selection The basic operation of program selection is described below The following description does not restrict manufacturers from applying different implementation procedures for program selection 4 5 1 Channel selection The basic operation of channel selection involves specification of a 3 digit service ID entered with the Ten Key A remote should be implemented with additional one touch buttons for example 12 additional buttons for directly selecting a channel for ease of use Users should be provided with useful user interfaces Manufactures should preset the values for the one touch buttons before shipment so that the preset values are the same as the basic service IDs corresponding to the channels offered by broadcasting companies Users should be able to change the preset values when they want to The operation of channel selection should be based on PSI If a receiver detects cancellation of a program the receiver should display a message informing the cancellation For more information on the definition of program cancellation see 7 6 Program Cancellation in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document 2 12 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 5 2 Progra
41. IP EPA EPO E A A A E SEE E T 1 z 1 Related documents EE E E EE E TS AAAA T TELET E E PEE P E A E POE E E PEA 6 e eleiei ieie sseieiefelsiate s e slaveie e siejeteiersteiaie 1 1 Definition of terms A E T E I T 1 1 Download uses and prerequisites T A A E E A A TATT 1 2 Download transmission guidelines E AA AE A T A T A TAST 1 4 Sel NOtfCations ssc20 eecnceteteacet N NE NNA TEANA AN AON 1 4 5 1 K 1 Transmission route eteeeereerereerereererrererrererrererrereerseeerereereeseesereerereerereererrereerereerersereeeeeeeeereeeseseene 1 4 5 1 2 SDTT Software Download Trigger Table E EEA TTE ETE E A A TE NA E TTA 1 4 5 1 2 1 Receiver software Update oe es ceescesscesseesseeseeeseeeseeeseeeeessceescesscecsceceeceeceeseeeseeeseneeeneees 1 4 5 1 2 2 Data common to all receivers iinn aaae a asai aiaia ean ia eadein iiaiai 1 5 5 1 3 Transmission cycle and transmission speeds eteettttttetteettettrettrettetttrtt rrtt rrtt tee treet te tte tet 1 5 5 1 3 1 Receiver software updates nrocos rin EE R NR EE EEr E 1 6 5 1 3 2 Data common to all receivers 0 0 ee eeceeecesseeseeeseeesceesceescessceescesscessceceeeseeceeceeeceeeeeneeseenes 1 6 5 1 4 SDTT updates s ersrsrerereeeeeeeeteeeteieeeeseenenseeeneneaeeessneneeecenesesesesanescecacasesceensiceeenentesesensnts 1 6 5 1 5 TS packet conversion of SDTT and associated transmission regulations ivevevevevenenes 1 6 5 1 6 Version number 1s oases Su oi6 6 eie ele oie sini eves oveleis sie ela s 01 s e eieid sl
42. Industries and Businesses ARIB works with broadcasters manufacturers of broadcast equipment manufacturers of radio equipment telecommunications carriers and end users to produce standard specifications and technical documents constituting the basic technological requirements of various different forms of radio equipment and systems ARIB technical documents provide the industry with specifications designed to ensure the quality and compatibility of radio equipment particularly with regards to measurement and operational methods based on standard specifications derived from technical standards released by the national government as well as voluntary standards used in the industry The current document sets out guidelines for the operation of BS and CS satellite digital broadcasting stations and function specifications for BS satellite digital broadcast receivers and joint BS and CS satellite digital broadcast receivers The document has been prepared by the ARIB Standards and Specifications Committee through a fully inclusive process involving close consultation with a range of interests including manufacturers of radio equipment and devices telecommunications carriers broadcasters and end users in order to guarantee proper levels of fairness and transparency This document consists of the following sections Part 1 Operational Guidelines for BS Digital Satellite Broadcasting Volume 1 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operati
43. JP_PN MPEG TTS_CP or protocolInfo http get application x dtcp 1 DTCP 1 HOST host DTCP1PORT port CONTENTFOR MAT amp quot video vnd dIna mpeg tts amp quot ARIB OR JP_PN MPEG_TTS_CP Below is an example for CDS ContentDirectory service item when partial TS is transmitted lt item id ID1 restricted 1 parented 0 gt lt de title gt Title lt dc title gt lt upnp class gt object item videoltem lt upnp class gt lt upnp genre gt Genre lt upnp genre gt lt upnp channeIName gt Channnel Name lt upnp channelName gt lt upnp channelINr gt 10000 lt upnp channelNr gt lt de date gt 2008 09 18T18 00 00 lt de date gt lt res protocolInfo http get application x dtcp1 DTCP1HOST 192 168 0 1 DTCP1PORT 30000 CONTENTFORMAT amp quot video vnd dlna mpeg tts amp quot DLNA ORG_ PN DTCP_MPEG TS _JP_T DLNA ORG FLAGS 01110000000000 000000000000000000 ARIB OR JP_PN MPEG TTS _CP gt URLI1 lt res gt lt arib objectType gt ARIB_BS lt arib objectType gt lt item gt In addition below are other examples when partial TS may be transmitted under no protection of DTCP IP 2 81 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 no encryption lt item id ID1 restricted 1 parented 0 gt lt de title gt Title lt dc title gt lt upnp class gt object item videoItem lt upnp class gt lt upnp genre gt Genre lt upnp genre gt lt upnp channelName gt Channnel Namer lt upnp channelName gt lt upnp channelNr gt
44. Not required because num of component ref 0 ISO 639 language code Fixed as jpn Japanese text length The upper limit shall be 16 byte text_char The details of caption text to be displayed on EPG shall be written Table 7 11 Data contents descriptor s selector area setting parameters for subtitles Field Num languages Same as the value in caption management data DMF Same as the value in the data encoding method descriptor ISO_639_ language code Same as the value in caption management data 7 3 Video resolution and subtitles and superimposed text display formats 7 3 1 Display formats Available display formats shall be 960x540 and 720x480 and horizontal and vertical writing for each Combinations of the video plane s resolution and a subtitles and superimposed text display format shall be as shown in Table 7 12 each being in horizontal or vertical writing A display format for 720x480 shall be the same regardless of an aspect ratio for video for display considering an aspect ratio correction shall be made on the transmit side Table 7 12 Video resolution and display format combinations Video plane resolution Subtitles and superimposed text display format 1920x1080 960x540 720x480 720x480 The above shall apply to data broadcasting programs 7 3 2 Display area The display area refers to an area particularized by vertical and horizontal pixels the control code SDF specifies and by the coordi
45. Not used always 0 scaleNumerator scaleDenomina Only 0 1 and 1 1 are used tor 5 3 5 IIT usage Still picture transmission on video PES a still picture carousel used for interactive replay is not used so IIT is not used 5 3 6 Associated receiver operations 5 3 6 1 CM usage If a CM occurs during a datacasting program event a datacasting service different to the main program may be performed in which case the context prior to the CM may be reproduced after returning to the main program or the datacasting service may be temporarily suspended There are no specific agreements on datacasting transmission operation support for these Instead this is implemented via content control using functions such as local content switching event messages and information writing to NVRAM 5 3 6 2 Expire descriptors DID and receiver operations e E An Expire descriptor in the DII module information area indicates that the module has a designated validity period The validity period specified in the descriptor can be used by a receiver with storage function when storing the module Thus the module must be stored in accordance with the validity period specified in the descriptor which must be accessible e E Stored module receiver operation Where the stored module is referenced and found to have a specified validity period this is compared to the current time If the validity period has expired an error is returned for the reference
46. O getBrowserSupprtO OO launchDocumentO OO launchDocumentRestrictedO OC o S O quitDocument OD FO taunchExApp OI Joen Moteo getFreeContentsMemory O OS Jo J isSupportedMediaO OB FO detectComponent OC TOT lockModuleOnMemoryEx OT unlockModuleOnMemoryEx OT unlockAllModulesOnMemory TO Jo J getLockedModuleInfo S deea Jo Note 8 getBrowserStatus O OC TOT getResidentAppVersionO CO FO isRootCertificateExistins O ooo deao o O getRootCertificateInfo S deao o J startResidentAppO OY Joo startExtraBrowserO OY eooo TT Receiver sound control gt SSS S S S O playRomSowndO OO setTimeout o y O setInterval OO olearTimerO OO pauseTimer OO fresumeTimer OO setCurrentDateMode OO External character function o o S T loadoRcsSO OO 3 141 Note 4 Note 5 Note 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Function BML1 0 BML3 0 Use Use Remarks _ unloadDRCS External device control function enumPeripherals passXMLDocToPeripheral Other functionality __ random subDate addDate formatNumber Caption display control function setCCStreamReference getCCStreamReference setCCDisplayStatus getCCDisplayStatus getCCLanguageStatus Print related function API basic print functions getPrinterStatus printFileQ printTemplate printUniQ printStati
47. RGB values need to be finally converted into Y Cb and Cr they remain as is to make it easy to understand Table Appendix 1 CLUT common fixed colors R G B 0 85 170 255 a 0 128 255 Index value R G B a Name Remarks 0 0 0 0 255 Black 1 255 0 0 255 Red 2 0 255 0 255 Green 3 255 255 0 255 Yellow 4 0 0 255 255 Blue 5 255 0 255 255 Magenta 6 0 255 255 255 Cyan 7 255 255 255 255 White 8 0 0 0 0 Transparent 9 170 0 0 255 Half bright red 10 0 170 0 255 Half bright green 11 170 170 0 255 Half bright yellow 12 0 0 170 255 Half bright blue 13 170 0 170 255 Half bright magenta 14 0 170 170 255 Half bright cyan 15 170 170 170 255 Half bright white gray 16 0 0 85 255 17 0 85 0 255 18 0 85 85 255 19 0 85 170 255 20 0 85 255 255 21 0 170 85 255 22 0 170 255 255 23 0 255 85 255 24 0 255 170 255 25 85 0 0 255 26 85 0 85 255 27 85 0 170 255 28 85 0 255 255 29 85 85 0 255 30 85 85 85 255 31 85 85 170 255 32 85 85 255 255 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Index value R G B a Name Remarks 33 85 170 0 255 34 85 170 85 255 35 85 170 170 255 36 85 170 255 255 37 85 255 0 255 38 85 255 85
48. Roce so toca ne Mota ea etiam er ees 3 65 6 3 5 Receiver s preinstalled sounds s sssssseessssseeseeeeseeesseeesseesseeessneesseeesneeseeeneesneessneessnnen 3 65 6 3 6 Sound synthesis on the recejyer e etttttttttreereettttstsstssrettttttttsssssnsneesttttttrstsssneneteett 3 65 6 3 6 1 Mix balan Geis atsa oroen ie a Ral eel ns At ede E aul ele tal ae 3 65 6 3 6 2 Encoding methods that make simultaneous playback of sounds possible 0 3 66 64 Character encoding sser ran bathed ait eli eh ee AM eel ited a a aa eG 3 67 6 4 1 8 unit code including EUC JP sssssssssssseesesseeess sees eeeeseeesneessneessnesssseesseeseeeneeesneesneessnes 3 67 6 4 1 1 Constraints on the character code fUNCtION 0 eee eee eseeeeceeceseeaeeseececeecesesseseseaeeaes 3 67 6 4 1 2 Character set used in data broadcasts 0 cece eseesecesecesceseeseseeceseesessecsecsaseaessesseeeseeaes 3 72 6 4 1 3 Character code initialization Operation ccccccescceesseeeseeeeseeeseneceeseceseeeneeesseseeeseeeeeees 3 73 3 iv ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 4 2 International encoding character code TE SS oie eed oidia a ep since Sais oD eee Sele See dees dale wie 6a didi de eeiddweciabe eee ee meee es 3 73 6 5 Descriptor command picture encoding 00 eee eeseeeseceeceseceseceseccecceccecaecceceneceecceceeeseneseneesaeees 3 73 6 5 1 Geometric Aa KaR 10 60 6 0 stela e e staleie le s ANAA AEE EAEAN AA ARA A E NE e sie edie eistalace EAA AAAA tisleie e se diev
49. SDP text not being drawn beyond that rectangle It is considered that a virtual area with a single character space specified size exists to the right of the first line in the display area and when scrolling SCR is specified the action position shall be set to that virtual write area again e Characters written in the display area before scrolling shall be erased after scrolling is specified Text shall be displayed from its first character from the right end of the display area Scrolling shall start by writing a character to the virtual write area e When without rollout scrolling stops after display of the last character e When with rollout scrolling continues until all the characters disappear on the screen e When data to be next displayed is received during scrolling the end of scrolling shall be awaited If character spacing and line spacing values that have been specified for a range from the start of scrolling instruction to the end of scrolling exceed any of the maximum values defined in Table 7 16 scrolling display shall depend on the implementation of the receiver Virtual write area Display area 3 102 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 5 7 1 Control codes The following control codes shall not be used from the start of scrolling instruction to the end of scrolling Style setting SWF SDF and SDP Size setting SZX and SSM Action position chang
50. This property represents the detailed description of an event As a general rule information about the item name should be obtained from the item_description_char field of the Extended Event Descriptor contained in the event loop of the EIT Information about the event description should be obtained from the item_char filed of the same descriptor Multiple instances of this property can be set in the accumulated contents and each property instance must correspond to each Extended Event Descriptor The order of these property instances must be in accordance with the description_number and the ascending order is preferred If multiple item descriptions are assigned to one item name these item descriptions need to be combined together to form a single arib longDescription The item name should be written on the first 24 bytes of this property and the item description should be written on the remaining bytes after the 24 byte If the length of the item name is less than 24 bytes the space characters should be inserted to the remaining bytes until the 24 byte de description O string arib longDescription O string 2 76 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 res resolution pattern string This property represents the resolution of the output contents The resolution must consist of both the number of horizontal pixels and the number of vertical pixels The entry must be made with half width char
51. a high speed digital interface when the receiver is connected with a MPEG stream recorder For details see 6 Operation specifications for PSI SI tables that can be inserted into partial TS outputs in this section 5 8 3 Control commands for IEEE 1394 See ARIB STD B21 9 1 5 Descriptors commands and tuner models 5 8 4 Specifications for an IP interface If a receiver needs to be equipped with an IP interface as the high speed digital interface see ARIB STD B21 Chapter 9 9 2 IP interface specifications and ARIB STD B21 Appendix 2 High speed digital interface For details on operation of this interface see 8 1 Operation specifications for an IP interface If the receiver is equipped with a wireless LAN the receiver may encounter an error caused by a connection from a receiver that the user is unaware of Therefore an IP interface needs to be implemented with a function that can reduce the user s confusion For operation in the case of output with MPEG PS see the rules for MPEG PS transmission described in 8 1 Operation specifications for an IP interface and DLNA guidelines 5 9 CA module interfaces See ARIB STD B25 Conditional Access System Specifications for Digital Broadcasting and 4 Requirements for a receiver in Section 5 of Part 1 of this document Supply of IC cards must follow the supply requirements of BS Conditional Access Systems Co Ltd e CA interface A receiver must be equipped with a low speed CA interfa
52. aX aad Orah A K 176x120 16 9 x O x sea A a E ae a a TER 176x120 4 3 x x O O yes x no 11 The scaling factor is defined as follows by the combination of the MPEG resolution and plane e Scaling ratio 128 128 100 for video data display is defined as follows 1 Video data quantized at the relevant MPEG resolution 2 Quantized video data displayed on video plane at the following aspect ratio Vertical pixels vertical pixels for video data Horizontal pixels vertical pixels x aspect ratio of video data Note Video data at 352x240 MPEG resolution is given side panels on the left and right of width 4 pixels Thus the video plane display has a total of 360 pixels in the horizontal direction Video data at 176x120 MPEG resolution is given side panels on the left and right of width 2 pixels to make 180 horizontal pixels on the video plane display When side panels are added by the receiver in this way the display format is receiver dependent It is recommended that the side panels are hidden for multimedia content using other planes 3 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Video data at 1280x720 16 9 is mapped to a video plane with resolution 1920x1080 16 9 i e 1080 pixels in the vertical direction and 1920 in the horizontal direction with a scaling ratio of 128 128 e About video data presentation with scaling ratio n 128 n 256 192 160 128 96 80 64 48 32 1 Calculate the aspect ra
53. above format as shown below CCYY MM DDTHH MM SS 09 00 gt Non summer time CCY Y MM DDTHH MM SS 10 00 gt Summer time 1 hour If the start_time has not been specified this property should not be implemented IS ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 This property indicates the end time of an event As a general rule the converted end time should be assigned to this property The end time must be calculated from the start_time and duration which represents the duration of the event that are contained in the event loop of the EIT Then the end time must be converted from the BCD format to the following format specified in the DLNA guidelines The latter format is the same format for the de date If the TOT does not exist the following upnp scheduledEndTime O string a E ies If the summer time offset value is set in the TOT due to the introduction of summer time the time offset HH MM should be attached to the above format as shown below CCYY MM DDTHH MM SS 09 00 Non summer time CCY Y MM DDTHH MM SS 10 00 Summer time 1 hour If the start_time or duration has not be specified and the end time cannot be calculated the upnp scheduledEndTime property should not be implemented This property represents a program description As a general rule the text_char contained in the second loop of the Short Event Descriptor that is contained in the event loop of EIT should be assigned to this field
54. address for the foreground Specifies 2 to the color map lower address for the foreground Blue foreground and Specifies 4 to the color map lower color map lower address for the foreground address setting Specifies 5 to the color map lower address for the foreground Magenta foreground n and color map lower address setting Cyan foreground and color map lower address setting White foreground and W color map lower address setting Specifies 6 to the color map lower address for the foreground Specifies 7 to the color map lower F F F F F F F F address for the foreground K D R L L G N H 3 68 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Use in multimedia Limitations and e er ee Fa code a an uneton code remarks Possible to use 128 common fixed colors across receivers and 96 colors specified by broadcasters To specify a color using COL specify a CLUT s index value 0 223 using a palette number for the upper 4 bits and using CMLA Color setting for the lower 4 bits respectively Example1 When palette number 0 and CMLA 0 a CLUT s index value 0 Example2 When palette number 10 and CMLA 5 which means 0xA5 a CLUT s index value 165 Only POL 04 0 normal polarity and POL 04 1 inverted polarity 1 are used The processing when the normal polarity changes to the inverted polarity shall be foreground color gt background color color halftone gt color halftone 2 color halftone 2 gt
55. an SIT For information on the structures meaning of each field and basic output operation rules of the following descriptors see Section 4 of Part 1 of this document 1 Service Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains basic information about a service that is inserted to the partial TS This information may include the service name and broadcasting company s name Output operation rule e Only one descriptor should be inserted for a single service e The information about the broadcasting company s name and service name should be directly obtained from the broadcasted programs 2 Short Event Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains the event name and short character string that briefly explains about the event Output operation rule e Asa general rule this descriptor should be inserted to an SIT e One descriptor should be output for one event e The information for this descriptor should be directly obtained from the broadcasted programs 3 Extended Event Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains a character string that explains the event in detail Output operation rule e The same descriptor information transmitted with the broadcasted program should be inserted to an SIT e Multiple instances of this descriptor may be transmitted from a single broadcast program Maximum of 16 No restrictions are specified for the number of instances That is all of the descriptor instances can be inserted to the SIT or
56. and any DII with transaction identifier may be obtained default_timeoutDIL flag As per the specifications In certain cases the flag value is 0 and the timeout_value_DII field is not used default_leak_rate_flag Flag value is 0 leak_rate field not used 5 1 2 6 provides more information about the data carousel transmission rate without using leak_rate component_size As per the specifications where employed the confirmed value is used Normally the confirmed value does not changed Modifications that involve an increase in the value are not recognized If usage is not confirmed it may be omitted E In this case storage reservation operations are not permitted transaction_id Not used timeout_value_DII Where omitted or if OXFFFFFFFF no timeout value recommended is specified it is assumed to be 5 000 milliseconds The commissioning broadcaster may choose to transmit DII at fixed cycles and use a fixed value for timeout_value_DII irrespective of the carousel length leak_rate Not used For details of transmission rates of section data refer to 5 1 2 6 3 34 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Data content descriptor entry_componentco Data ES mponent_ref1 Audio ES1 referenced from data ES component_ref2 Video ES1 referenced from data ES Figure 5 2 Content and ES structure 5 1 8 schedule EIT data content descriptor usage e In schedule EIT num_of_component_r
57. and end of subtitling display eeen eneee ieee ieee eeeeeteees cess reseseeteett ertt tererse nenene 3 105 7 9 2 Start and end of superimposed text display eeeeeeeeeeeeeeecenenecencenenenenens 3 105 7 9 3 Setting items on the receiver sss esses ieeeieesseses tess teseneeeseeeeseeeeneeesneesniecsnnesaseesitas 3 105 8 Operating Multimedia Encoding ee cescesecssecssecescecesecssecesecenecececececececaecaecsceceeecceseaeseeeseaeeeeeeees 3 107 Bel WntrOMdUct OM ce drina segete pars vod ease bedded bend shies tas cestsoed ehieledde OAA R EE RRE 3 107 8 2 Using NVRAM commonly used for MM Services ccccccssseceesseeeseeesseeesseeeseneeesseeesseeeseeeesaeene 3 107 8 2 1 Identifying the broadcaster common areas ss sissies sees teeesteeeseeeseessecsieesseestass 3 107 8 2 2 Identifying the broadcaster specific area sss eeeeeeeereeeee ett trtttreereerert rttr trsresse tettetett 3 108 8 2 3 Using information on the right to access the area reserved for BS digital broadcasters for wide band CS digital broadcasters 0e eeen ettteeetttteettteretett ener tenneneeneaneneetens 3 108 8 2 4 Use of the viewer s place of residence information from MM services teveeenenenenene 3 111 8 3 Using remote control keys from MM Services cccscccsssseesseeeeneeeeeeeeeecscecseceessseeeseeeneeenseeenes 3 111 8 3 1 Possible values for used key list attributes esses ett tteterteeeerrer tertres ere 3 111 3 vi ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 3 2 C
58. and telecommunications carriers CLUT Color Look Up Table a table used to convert index values for color information into actual physical values DAVIC Digital Audio Visual Council designs standardized formats for the transmission and reception of digital information in MPEG format DRCS Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets a text encoding format for text broadcasting and datacasting that enables external and user defined characters to be transmitted as patterns ES Elementary Stream made up of encoded images sound and independent data carried in PES packets The ES is transmitted in the form of PES packets with the same stream ID EUC JP Japanese character codes encoded in accordance with ISO 2022 ISO International Organization for Standardization I frame Intra Frame a frame made up of compressed data joined within the frame MNG Multiple image Network Graphics file format for animation graphics also known as MING Multiple PNG images can be displayed in order in a repeating sequence MPEG 1 A compression format for video and audio data developed by the international standards agency Moving Pictures Expert Group 1 ISO IEC 11172 MPEG 2 A compression format for video and audio data developed by the international standards agency Moving Pictures Expert Group 2 ISO IEC 13818 PES Packetized Elementary Stream video audio and independent text data packetized into variable length packets PID Packet Identifier 13 bit stream iden
59. as described in Table 8 3 as well as the requirements specidied in DLNA guidelines A receiver must also follow the descriptions in Table 8 3 if the receiver needs to implement the properties with the implementation level O Optional Table 8 3 Properties that should be assigned to the accumulated contents Implementation property property name level type property description This property indicates whether the properties of the accumulated contents are in accordance with the specifications arib objectType string described in 8 1 Operation specifications for an IP interface A digital satellite receiver should assign ARIB_BS to this property using half width characters This property represents the event name As a general rule the event_name_char contained in the first loop of the Short Event Descriptor should be assigned to this property The Short Event Descriptor is contained in the event loop of the EIT If the event_name_char is unknown a receiver should insert the same event name assigned to upnp channelName as described in the DLNA guidelines de title string This property indicates the genre to which the event indicated by the dc title belongs As a general rule a converted character string that corresponds to the value of the content_nibble_level_1 general category in the Content Descriptor should be assigned to this property The conversion must be in accordance with the gen
60. assigned arib caProgramInfo boolean This property indicates whether the program is free or requires fees As a general rule if the free CA mode of the EIT is 1 the program requires fees and the value 1 should be assigned to this property If the free CA mode is 0 the program is free and the value 0 should be assigned to this property 2 72 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 arib caProgramInfo O available boolean This property indicates whether the viewer has subscribed to the program If the arib caProgramInfo is 1 meaning fee requiring program this property indicates whether the viewer has subscribed to the default ESs If the arib caProgramInfo is 0 meaning free program this attribute does not exist If the viewer has subscribed to the default ESs the value 1 should be assigned to this property Required O Optional The properties of upnp are defined by UPnP Forum 2 73 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 1 3 3 Properties that should be assigned to the accumulated contents If a receiver has the accumulation function and outputs the accumulated contents through an IP interface in accordance with 8 1 Operation specifications for an IP interface the accumulated contents should have the properties described in Table 8 3 A BS digital receiver must implement the properties with the implementation level Required
61. assigned to this field version_number In a normal operation this field should be incremented by 1 when the PMT is updated If the PMT of the original broadcasted program is inserted to the partial TS and a system error occurs during the broadcast the version_number may be incremented by more than 1 This version_number can be directly output current_next_indicator The value 1 should be assigned to this field section_number The value 0x00 should be assigned to this field last_ section number The value 0x00 should be assigned to this field PCR_PID The PID of the TS packet that transmits the relevant PCR packet should be assigned to this field program info _ length The loop length of The Ist_loop should be assigned to this field The maximum loop length should not exceed the value for section length 1st program loop 2nd ES loop The maximum loop count is 16 stream_type The stream type identifier of the relevant ES should be assigned to this field Stream type identifiers are defined in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document elementary_PID The PID of the relevant ES or TS packet that transmits payload should be assigned to this field ES_info_length The length of the next ES descriptor should be assigned to this field 2 41 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 2 2 2 Descriptors that can be inserted into a PMT Table 6 10 lists the descriptors that
62. be able to record all services An analog VTR should be able to record the main service and do not need to be able to record all services A function for displaying multiple SDTVs at the same time is optional MVTYV should be started with an event and terminated with an event That is MVTV should not be started or terminated during an event An EPG should display whether a program uses MVTV 4 7 6 Reception of CA switching service See Section 5 of Part 1 of this document e When explaining this function to a user in a manual and other places the function name must be 4 8 Guidance channel switching function Reception of data broadcasting services 4 8 1 Requirements for a receiver A receiver must be implemented with the following functions and specifications described in 4 Requirement functions for a basic receiver for reception of data broadcasting services in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document 4 2 Requirement functions 4 3 Remote 4 4 TS decoder 2 18 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 5 Memory required in a receiver 4 8 2 The start and termination operations of data broadcasting service processing For details on the start and termination operations of data broadcasting service processing in a receiver see 5 1 12 Relevant receiver operations in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document 4 9 Reception of interactive data broadcasting services See the following chapters in Section 6 of Part 1 of this
63. can be used in a PMT Table 6 10 Descriptors that can be used in a PMT condition 0x09 Conditional Access System Descriptor fx OxDE Content Availability Descriptor o 0x42 Stuffing Descriptor JO O D Hierarchical Transmission Descriptor O Z o Digital Copy Control Descriptoer Target Area Descriptor Must be inserted to the appropriate descriptor field within a table if this descriptor has 2 been inserted to a broadcast program and the program component needs to be output O Can be inserted to the appropriate descriptor field within a table x Cannot be inserted to any part of a table Recommended to be inserted to the appropriate descriptor field within a table 1 Can be inserted to Ist loop 2 Can be inserted to 2 loop D Can be inserted to both 1 loop and ioe loop 6 2 2 3 Descriptors that can be inserted to the first loop Program loop of a PMT For information on the structures meaning of each field and basic output operation rules of the following descriptors see Section 4 of Part 1 of this document 1 Digital Copy Control Descriptor See Digital Copy Descriptor in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document Purpose This descriptor should be placed into a PMT when digital copy control information needs to be indicated or the maximum transmission rate needs to be described for all target services This descriptor should also be used when both of the actions desc
64. card number will be transmitted We shall use the above information only for the present service example television shopping Operation window example for NVRAM data erasure Main menu or portal window Member registration New Change This operation erases member information stored in the receiver Erase Contents Are you ready to erase member Stored information stored in the receiver Check Contents Stored OK Please enter your password Member information stored in the receiver Authentication complete Name OO000O Address OO OO OO TEL Date of birth AA AA AA Password __ User authentication window Check Contents Stored window 3 152 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Appendix 5 Use of NVRAM when the ID of the previous broadcaster is assigned If the ID used by the previous broadcaster is assigned to the local broadcaster ID broadcaster_id a new broadcaster hereafter elevant broadcaster should completely erase before use the parts of the broadcaster specific NVRAM area and broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common area hereafter NVRAM specific area that are assigned to the relevant broadcaster because these areas parts may have been used by the previous broadcaster To be specific 0x00 or 0x20 shall be written all over the relevant parts before using the NVRAM specific area in content In addition because it is necessary to judge whether or
65. document for details on how to support interactive data broadcasting services reception Chapter 5 Communication protocol 6 4 Recommended receiver functions 8 4 Receiver functions 9 1 Operations when a receiver is turned off 4 10 Reception of subtitles and captions See the following subsections in 7 Encoding operations for subtitles and captions in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document 7 4 Characters used in subtitles and captions 7 5 Control codes used for subtitles and captions 7 6 Operation of DRCS 7 7 Initial operations 7 8 Mono media used in subtitles and captions 7 9 Recommended receiver operations Reception of captions is a vital function of a receiver because captions send special reports on natural disasters editorial notes of a program and a time signal 4 11 Program reservation This section defines the rules for view reservation and recording reservation 4 11 1 Reservation registration 1 Ifthe program that a user wants to reserve has multiple ESs the user should be able to select an ES when creating reservation 2 Ifthe program that a user want to reserve has captions the user should be able to choose whether to record the captions 3 If there is a possibility that the desired program may not be viewable the user should be notified 4 Ifthe desired program prohibits copying the user should be notified 2 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 6 If any viewing restrictions are applied to the de
66. engine does not support the obtain BML s version During a replay of data The receiver failed to Move from the current broadcast display the data channel to another channel An execution error occurs and then return to the during a contents replay previous data channel The receiver cannot obtain again the external reference data Note 1 The example error message differs depending on the broadcast inactive statuses described in 7 6 Handling of Inactive broadcast in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document The following are the example error messages 1 Inactive 1 An example error message is The broadcasting is inactive 2 Inactive 2 An example error message is Broadcasts cannot be received 3 Inactive 3 An example error message is The broadcasting is inactive 4 No signals An example error message is Broadcasts cannot be received If it is difficult to implement multiple error messages in a receiver the error message for the statuses 1 Inactive 1 and 3 Inactive 3 can be also Broadcasts cannot be received If the receiver is capable of identifying the causes of the statuses 2 Inactive 2 and 4 No signals the receiver can display an additional message for a viewer for example The reception condition has been worsened so that the viewer can easily acknowledge the cause of the status 2 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 Hardware and Software Requirements 5 1 Tuner e A turn should be
67. equipped with 1 IF input system e The turn should support the local frequency 10 678GHz of the satellite converter e For information on specifications for the tuner part see 4 4 1 to 4 4 4 of ARIB STD B21 For information on front end signal processing see 4 4 5 of ARIB STD B21 5 2 TS decoder See ARIB STD B21 4 4 6 Transport processing If the decoder needs to support data broadcasting services see 4 4 TS decoder in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document 5 3 Video decoding and outputting See both 6 1 Video decoding process and output signals and Appendix 1 Method of switching the video format of ARIB STD B21 For information on the RGB analog terminal and digital video terminal see both 5 15 4 RGB analog terminal and 5 15 5 Digital video terminal in this section For information on video output through a digital video and audio terminal see 5 15 6 Digital video and audio terminal in this section 5 4 Audio decoding and outputting See 6 2 Audio decoding process and output and Appendix 4 Down mix processing in the AAC decoder of ARIB STD B21 If a receiver is implemented with additional options such as downmixing for an external semi surround processor and downmixing for stereo sound field extension both of which are described in ARIB STD B21 6 2 Audio decoding process and output the receiver should display the downmixing setting status so that a user can acknowledge which setting status is active If a receiver
68. event relay can be determined once PAT is deleted from PMT_PID Once it happens the receiver should stop the recording 2 17 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 7 5 Reception of multi view TV broadcasting See 7 4 Multi view TV in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Multi view TV consists of 1 service_id and multiple ESs Among multiple SDTVs one is the main service and others are sub services A user must be notified of reception of multi view TV MVTV in the main channel The PID of the main channel that is described in PMT must be the default ES The relationship between the main service and sub services is specified in component_group_descriptor After an MVTV event ends the receiver must move to the next event with the default video and audio A user must be notified of the start of multi view TV through captions or announcement A user must be able to switch the channels by using the video button or another equivalent function of a remote Grouped switching of a video and audio may not be possible during a few seconds after the start of multi view TV because the receiver may not be able to obtain component _group_ descriptor In this case a video component and audio component are switched independently The attribute of each component in MVTV must be the same A receiver can determine whether a component is a part of MVTV by examining EIT p f A digital VTR should
69. free or requires fees As a general rule if the free CA mode of the EIT is 1 the program requires fees and the value 1 should be assigned to this property If the free CA mode is 0 the program is free and the value 0 should be assigned to this property arib caProgramInfo O boolean This property indicates whether the viewer has subscribed to the program If the arib caProgramInfo is 1 meaning fee requiring program this property indicates whether the viewer has boolean subscribed to the default ESs If the arib caProgramInfo is 0 meaning free program this attribute does not exist If the viewer has subscribed to the default ESs the value 1 should be assigned to this property arib caProgramInfo avail O able Required O Optional If the duration is unknown because the accumulation is being performed or the item does not have the res property this attribute does not need to be implemented 8 1 4 Content selection 8 1 4 1 protocolInfo and MIME Type If a digital satellite receiver needs to output a stream from its DMS Digital Media Server through HTTP the receiver must specify the content selection by using protocolInfo and recommended MIME Types protocolInfo is defined in the Media Management section of the DLNA guidelines and the recommended MIME Types are described in DTCP VISE The content selection must be specified as follows protocolInfo consist
70. in this chapter as an option Definitions Linked pre stored data programs Independent data programs interactively linked to television programs or data enriched television programs through hyperlink descriptors with the hyper_linkage_type specified as 0x80 combined_prior_data and 0x81 combined_posterior_stream They shall be broadcast in services with the service_type specified as 0xA8 They are assumed to be broadcast before the event times of television programs or data enriched television programs and assumed to be viewed after being stored Like independent data broadcasting services after storage these programs may be viewable as independent programs Independent pre stored data program Of programs to be broadcast with the service_type specified as 0xA8 programs other than linked pre stored data programs They are based on storage and like independent data broadcasting services viewable as independent programs after storage 9 2 Operation related to linked pre stored data programs 9 2 1 Controlling the viewing of linked pre stored data programs For the operation of linked pre stored data programs real time viewing shall be prohibited in the PMT EIT s on demand viewing permission information ondemand_retrieval_flag 9 2 2 service_type of channels that operate linked pre stored data programs Linked pre stored data programs shall be broadcast in services with the service_type set to OxA8 9 2 3 Schedule patterns of linked pre s
71. information for service format in the service list descriptor copy_control_ type Format information for copy control digital recording control data Control information for digital copying in the digital copy control descriptor to perform copy control A receiver must follow IEC 60958 if it uses the linier PCM to output audio It must follow IEC 61931 AAC extension if it uses the AAC stream to output audio 5 10 3 Hi speed digital interface output Manufacturers decide whether to equip high speed digital interface to a receiver If a receiver needs to be equipped with high speed digital interface the following requirements must be fulfilled A receiver must obtain information from service_type copy_control_type digital recording control_data and encryption_mode to perform copy control A receiver should appropriately control MPEG_TS output in a digital audio service temporary audio service data service temporary data service and bookmark list service In addition sometimes there are output restrictions in the case of output with MPEG PS to an IP interface See Digital copy control descriptor and Content availability descriptor in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document A receiver must use DTCP to protect the copyrights of programs whose protection is specified by broadcasting companies For details on DTCP see the DTCP specification document To use DTCP with MPEG _TS to perform output for digital TV service temp
72. inverted polarity 1 are used The processing when the normal polarity changes to the inverted polarity shall be foreground color gt background color color halftone 1 gt color halftone 2 color halftone 2 gt color halftone 1 foreground color gt background color size DRCS DRCS DRCS and double height width WHF and color map lower address setting se wins se romare i eae Specified size B R Y B P S N S KF DF RF LF LF GF NF OL OL SZ SZ SZ ZX 3 97 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 C1 Control function Limitations and supplemental remarks As standard 1 second shall be set for the flashing frequency and 1 1 shall be set for the flash ON OFF time ratio For flashing usage refer to 7 5 2 Possible to use awaiting processing only Flashing control CDC Conceal display control Write mode wa Time control Characters with the parameter P1 set to 0 shall not be used in scrolling strings Only underlines is used For underline usage refer to 7 5 5 Only underlines is used For box usage refer to 7 5 4 Repeat character Start lining and separating mosaic characters Stop lining and SPL separating mosaic characters introducer O Usable A Usable with conditions x Not usable The function to specify macros for control codes MACRO Macro setting x shall not be used possible to use default macros only 3 98 ARIB TR B15 Version
73. is reached Example If the number of units is 70 two dummies PID7 and PID8 will sent in order to bring the total to 72 Similarly dummy data is used in daily updates to enable assignment of PID and tag values in sequence 5 2 5 Module and Carrousel structure 5 2 5 1 Receiver software update There are no stipulations regarding the modules in the Carrousel 5 2 5 2 Data common to all receivers Normally only the modified portions of content are sent However sometimes the cumulative total of the modifications is sent instead in case the receiver has not received all of the modified portions Content is not downloaded by type such as logo data and genre code tables these are all together in a single Carrousel Genre code tables program characteristics code tables and keyword lists each consist of one module Logo data has modules for six different logo types Every module includes logo data for all logo IDs to be 1 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 updated Logo data is sent for all six types Figure 5 4 shows a sample Carrousel structure for data common to all receivers Name Descriptor DDB i f i CENAE CommonTableDataModule genre code table FEATURE CommonTableDataModule program characteristics table KEYWORD KeywordDataModule ___ _ reserved words iist L0G0 00 s LogoDataModule J Voge data SD4 3 smal L0G0 01 s LogoData Module Toge daia 8069 smal
74. least prevent the loss of any data prior to the download For more information about required functions refer to ARIB STD B21 Section 12 3 1 Necessary Functions Operational scenarios are described in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 5 1 1 Receiver Download Operational Scenarios 6 2 5 Power function This function regulates the power based on notification information It supplies power to the circuit used to receive software information when instructed by the local timer then switches the power off again after the software has been downloaded and the download completed It also maintains power supplies to the minimum required circuits when the main power is switched off and switches the power off again after the software has been downloaded and the download completed It works in the same way as power regulation for EMM capture For more information about required functions refer to ARIB STD B21 Section 12 3 1 Necessary Functions 6 2 6 Version number display function This function displays current valid version information in the event that the download function fails to operate properly and the receiver manufacturer and or broadcaster provides assistance to the user via telephone 1 Ideally the version number should be protected so that it is not displayed in the course of normal user operations and can only be accessed via a specific sequence of operations conducted at power on time 2 The version number should be con
75. left the viewed and DII of the following shall be entry component monitored 1 DU of the component to transport modules specified by lockModuleOnMemory Ex tag values 0x40 0x50 and 0x60 2 DII of the component to transport modules that subscribe ModuleLocked or ModuleUpdated interrupt events Components of event 2 3 4 3 messages to be monitored 2ES can be subscribed number of ESs that can be in BML3 0 only subscribed simultaneousl 10 3 4 Identification of media received A BML version declares the functional scope of the browser to be used in content but it has nothing to do with the range of access permission of NVRAM because that range depends on the type of media being received BML3 0 content may also contain descriptions specific to BS broadcasting such as access to the BS specific NVRAM and that should be noted in the implementation of the receiver 10 4 Transmission 10 4 1 Use of DownloadInfoIndication DII messages In BS Level 3 while both content of BML1 0 and content of 3 0 exist as specified in 10 5 2 BML3 0 content placement DII s Control descriptors shall not be put The version shall be obtained from version information in a BML document 10 4 2 Event messages that do not depend on data event IDs In BS Level 3 event messages with event_msg group id 1 can be transmitted for reference from BML3 0 content For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 2 3 4 3 10 4 3 NPT refere
76. maximum bit rate is the average of the transmission rates within one sixtieth of one second 2 The default value for the maximum bit rate The maximum bit rate is specified in the maximum _bit_rate field of the digital copy control descriptor and this descriptor can be placed in the PMT SDT and EIT If the bit rate of each component of a program does not exceed the bit rate described in 5 2 6 Default maximum bit rates in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document the digital copy control descriptor does not need to be placed in either the PMT SDT or EIT If this descriptor is not inserted to any tables the default maximum bit rate described in 5 2 6 Default maximum bit rates must be used for each component of a program A digital satellite receiver obtains the maximum bit rate of each component calculates the sum of all maximum bit rates related to the recording target components and determines which recording mode should be used for a D VHS Once the recording mode is determined the receiver can use the JEEE1394 commands to control the recording modes The following is an example Reference Example recording modes for a D VHS The following 6 recording modes are available to a D VHS and have different main data input rates all recordable data are recorded Instead of recording all programs in the HS mode the receiver can automatically change the recording mode according to the characteristic of each program For example a program that uses
77. method descriptor in the head component of the PMT 2 loop E Linked pre stored data program A data program which is broadcast as a service_type 0xA8 service and which contains hyperlinks to standard or data enriched television programs via hyper_linkage_type 0x81 combined_posterior_stream Hyperlinks must be provided in both directions with the corresponding pre stored data program specified in the hyper_linkage_type 0x80 combined_prior_data hyperlink in the television program Refer to Chapter 9 Optional for basic receiver unit E Independent pre stored data program A data program which is broadcast as a service_type 0xA8 service but which does not contain a hyper_linkage_type 0x81 combined_posterior_stream hyperlink descriptor in the corresponding data program EIT Refer to Chapter 9 Optional for basic receiver unit E The service type OxCO or 0xA8 of the broadcast service is used to distinguish between an independent data program and a linked or independent pre stored data program 5 1 1 3 Datacasting services and other program types e Data programs by viewing type Data programs are either viewed in real time or stored for subsequent viewing Programs that cannot be viewed in real time have a very long data carousel cycle This effectively prevents viewing by acquiring modules from the data carousel in each cycle The status of the program with respect to real time viewing is notified via
78. more information Manufacturers can freely allocate any colors to the 32 receiver dependent colors lt Reference Allocation of colors to the 8 bit CLUT index colors gt See 4 2 1 Table 1 Resolution of a window plane in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document Common fixed colors 128 colors Subtitles and logos can only use the common fixed colors EPG and data broadcasting services can also use these colors Receiver dependent colors 32 colors The EPG and menus of a receiver use these colors Manufacturers can freely specify any colors Colors specified by a broadcasting company 96 colors 2 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 These colors are used for graphic characters in a data broadcasting service that is provided by a broadcasting company Broadcasting companies can freely specify any colors When an EPG is display on the 8 bit CLUT subtitle plane any colors can be specified for the 128 colors other than the 128 common fixed colors When an EPG is displayed on a plane other than the subtitle plane or character and graphic plane the EPG can use any colors This is also applicable when an EPG is display in a receiver that supports a superior color display function than the 8 bit CLUT 4 The video and audio of a selected program must be continued during EPG window display that uses all channel SI For example a receiver can display a shrunk video window to continually display the video of a program during EPG window display A recei
79. needs to be equipped with a digital audio output function the receiver must follow the AAC extensions described by IEC 60958 and IEC 61937 If the digital output needs to be performed through the Bluetooth interface the receiver must acquire the Bluetooth logo permission in order to assure the compatibility with the Bluetooth standard For more information on audio output through a digital video and audio terminal see 5 15 6 Digital video and audio terminal in this section 5 5 Memory 5 5 1 RAM e Ifa receiver needs to support the data broadcasting services see 4 5 Memories that a receiver must be equipped with in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document e The receiver must be equipped with a memory buffer that is sufficient enough for the transmission speed for reception of notification information and downloadable software e Manufacturers can decide how big the RAM size should be for receiver resident programs such as SI and EPG 2 26 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 5 2 NVRAM e For information on a memory that supports downloading of software and receiver common data see 6 1 Rules for a memory in Section 1 of Part 1 of this document e Ifthe receiver needs to support data broadcasting see 8 2 Operation of NVRAM that is shared by MM services in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document e For information on a memory that supports email reception see 4 3 Memory in Section 5 of Part 1 of this document e Manufacturers can freel
80. needs to be inserted to both loops JST_time should only be inserted to the descriptor in the Ist loop and not to the descriptor in the 2nd loop Only the service time information should be managed e The other_descriptor_status needs to be set to 0 when only the Partial TS time descriptor has been changed and other descriptors within the SIT have not been changed e If this descriptor is inserted to the 1st loop of an SIT the event_version_number event_start_time and duration fields become invalid e Errors in the time inserted by JST_time should be within 2 seconds Table 6 22 shows the output operation rule for each field of this descriptor Table 6 22 Output operation rules for the Partial TS Time Descriptor Output operation rule for each field descriptor_tag The value 0xC3 should be assigned to this field descriptor_length The length of the descriptor should be assigned to this field event_version_ number This field becomes invalid if the descriptor is inserted to the Ist loop of an SIT event_start_time This field becomes invalid if the descriptor is inserted to the Ist loop of an SIT The value OxFFFFFFFFFF should be assigned in such case duration This field becomes invalid if the descriptor is inserted to the Ist loop of an SIT The OXFFFFFF should be assigned in such case offset If daylight saving time summer time needs to be applied to JST_time
81. not the relevant broadcaster already starts using the NVRAM specific area by erasing the relevant parts on its own it is preferable that the relevant broadcaster shall take a measure such as writing some identification information to any block in the NVRAM specific area 3 153 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 lt Intentionally blank gt 3 154 OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL SATELLITE BROADCASTING ARIB TECHNICAL REPORT ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E 1 Fascicle 1 December 12th 2008 This Document is based on ARIB technical report of Operational Guidelines for Digital Satellite Broadcasting in Japanese edition and translated into English in March 2010 Published by Association of Radio Industries and Businesses Nittochi Bldg 11F 1 4 1 Kasumigaseki Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0013 Japan TEL 81 3 5510 8590 FAX 81 3 3592 1103 Printed in Japan All rights reserved
82. only a limited number of the descriptor instances can be inserted to the SIT for example the first two instances 4 Component Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains information on the video component stream that constitutes an event Output operation rule e Ina broadcasted program one descriptor is output for each video component within an event If a stream identifier descriptor is inserted to the PMT this component descriptor should be inserted to the SIT as a general rule The component descriptor must provide information about the video 2 54 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 component that is inserted to the SIT and the information must remain the same since the information is first transmitted Other notes e The information that the component descriptor provides during broadcast may be inconsistent with the actual properties of the component because an event mode may be changed during an event It is preferable that the component descriptor be changed at the time of partial TS creation so that the information it provides becomes consistent However it is also acceptable to simply insert the unchanged component descriptor to the SIT In a broadcasted program the component_type of the component descriptor indicates the type of the representative component of a program When the event mode is changed during a program the component_type does not change immediately This must be taken into consideration when a par
83. parameters Field unit_separator Shall be 0x1F as specified data_unit_parameter 0x20 text 0x35 bitmap data 0x30 single byte DRCS 0x31 double byte DRCS data_unit_size As per the specifications However 1 PES packet shall not exceed 32KB in size data_unit_data_byte Stores data unit data 7 2 8 Using PSI SI 7 2 8 1 Using component tags A component_tag value ranging from 0x30 to 0x37 shall be set for subtitle ES and a component_tag value ranging from 0x38 to 0x3F shall be set for superimposed text ES However the default component tag value for subtitle ES shall be set as 0x30 and the default component_tag value for superimposed text ES shall be set as 0x38 3 79 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 2 8 2 Using PMT For PMT updates in principle ES information shall be added or deleted at the time of start end of subtitles and superimposed text however it shall be also made possible to use PMT with ES information always being published 7 2 8 3 Stream format identification stream type for subtitles and superimposed text shall be 0x06 independent PES packet 7 2 8 4 Using descriptors Table 7 8 shows the usage of PMT and EIT descriptors for subtitles and superimposed text Table 7 8 PMT and EIT descriptor usage Descriptor PMT EIT Stream identification descriptor Mandatory Data encoding method descriptor Mandatory Target area descriptor Mandatory when specifying a target ar
84. pixels in both directions at the receiver end to produce 1920x1080 size 3 18 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 2 4 Audio reproduction function Table 4 5 lists specifications pertaining to audio reproduction It is expected that broadcasters will not transmit mono media encoding that is not listed here or mono media that has not been encoded in accordance with the regulations Details of the encoding systems are given in Chapter 6 Table 4 5 Audio reproduction function Encoding Details method Transmission specification Audio PES streaming type identifier OxOF Data carousel streaming type identifier 0x0D 13 14 Transmission specification Data carousel streaming type identifier 0x0D Subtitles warning sound 13 Chapter 6 Operating Mono media Encoding describes constraints such as simultaneous decoding of video encoded and other audio encoded data 14 During repeated playback of decoded file format data transmitted in the data carousel periods without audio are permitted between repetitions 15 Total ROM size for preinstalled sounds 480KB 3 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 2 5 Fonts Fonts are restricted to a size consistent with the required on board ROM size of the receiver to prevent interference with normal operation Table 4 6 shows font specifications Table 4 6 Fonts S e ae eg Sea aS ies Font typefaces Typefaces 3 Maru Gothic Futo Maru Gothic and Kaku Gothic
85. plane 360x 240x1 16 9 Size 720x480 2 x horizontal vertical pixel expansion 360x 240x1 4 3 Size 720x480 2 x horizontal vertical pixel expansion 0 where the a value definition sets an 8 bit color map in CLUT the upper 4 bits of the color map are mapped to the 4 bits in CLUT When combining the text diagrams and subtitles planes together a degree of non linearity is permitted in a mixing in order to allow some freedom in the structure of the mixing path However this means that the presentation results must reflect changes in a which has 16 gradations 3 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 4 2 shows restrictions associated with each plane in areas such as mono media code that can be presented and size and position of mono media content Table 4 2 Restrictions in display plane Video plane Eligible MPEG 2 mono media Only one video can be presented at a time irrespective of code encoding method MPEG 1 Only one video can be presented at a time irrespective of encoding method Position From plane even pixel numbers to odd pixel numbers for both x and y coordinates 1 Even pixel numbers for both x and y coordinates No layering of video Still picture plane Eligible JPEG mono media code and y coordinates Even pixel numbers for both x and y coordinates Unrestricted 2 plane mono media From any pixel to any other pixel for both x and y coordinates Unrestricted 2 Subtitles pla
86. program is not stored Starts presenting a startup document in the entry component of a data enriched television program When a linked pre stored data program is stored Starts presenting a startup document in the entry component of the relevant linked pre stored data program When viewing a television program and when data content is inactive When a linked pre stored data program is not stored No action When a linked pre stored data program is stored 3 121 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Starts presenting a startup document in the entry component of the relevant linked pre stored data program Selection from Directly selecting Launches the content selected EPG selection content in a linked Even when independent viewing of the relevant content is prohibited in f d p 8 p om store re stored data the PMT and the related video sound is not stored if a linked television p program list tentative nartic program program data enriched television program is on the air it is preferable that the relevant television program data enriched television program will be selected and the relevant content will be then launched with the video and sound of such a program 9 2 13 1 Launching the data broadcasting engine In any of the following conditions if auto_start_flag 1 for the relevant linked pre stored data program the data broadcasting engine shall automatically start e When
87. program linked to the selected program is stored the receiver shall execute a judgment process with respect to the launch of data broadcasting for the relevant linked data program If the above condition is not met as usual the receiver shall execute a judgment process with respect to the launch of data broadcasting for the program selected 2 For judgment on the launch of the data broadcasting engine judgment based on independent_flag shall be added Presentation of data broadcasting services shall not be performed if independent viewing permission information specified by a data encoding method descriptor in the entry component is set to independent viewing prohibited or if stored data and video and sound are not played together if playback is not in progress with a television program data enriched television program that is linked to a linked pre stored data program Note that monitoring of return to entry flags is not necessary during presentation of data content in a linked pre stored data program 3 122 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 2 14 Processing for programmed storage of a linked pre stored data program 9 2 14 1 Processing for programmed storage guidelines 1 Programmed storage shall be performed from an EPG and data broadcasting engine For details on the extended API for programmed storage refer to 9 4 2 Storage shall be performed in units of events and in units of contents 3 For components to be stored progra
88. s target area descriptor in independent pre stored data program The target area descriptor shall not be used in independent pre stored data program 9 3 6 Use of the PMT s digital copy control descriptor in independent pre stored data program Shall be the same as linked pre stored data programs Refer to 9 2 6 9 3 7 Use of the p f EIT s data content descriptor in independent pre stored data program Shall be the same as linked pre stored data programs Refer to 9 2 7 9 3 8 Use of DII related to storage of independent pre stored data program Like linked pre stored data programs DII version updates shall not occur during an event in independent pre stored data program So basically transaction_id does not change during an event 9 3 9 Use of carousels related to storage of independent pre stored data program Shall be the same as linked pre stored data programs Refer to 9 2 10 9 3 10 Use of the multimedia encoding method related to independent pre stored data program For name spaces to save stored modules resources the procedure for linked pre stored data programs shall apply Refer to 9 2 11 1 9 3 11 Use of event messages related to storage of independent pre stored data program e Event messages or NPT shall not be transmitted in independent pre stored data program e General purpose event messages and NPT reference messages are not to be referenced from data content in an independent pre stored data program 9 3 12 i
89. such a device As of 2000 the upper limit of the number of times for writing in general is approximately one hundred thousand If it is desired to accumulate information as the time of content presentation elapses use of global variants and Ureg is preferable If the Greg function which is added in ARIB STD B24 Ver3 1 is supported use of that function is preferable for temporary data storage such as data exchange among multiple services Use of NVRAM for temporary data storage is not recommended Appendix 4 Guidelines on Information Operation on Data Broadcasting NVRAM 1 Basic concept regarding the handling of data broadcasting NVRAM NVRAM used for broadcasting is based on the following concept e Physical functionality and performance shall be guaranteed by manufacturers e Private information written shall be the user s property e Information management and communication with users regarding permission to use information shall be handled by broadcasters 2 Definition of private information on NVRAM Private information on NVRAM treated in the present guidelines is the one defined in JIS Q 15001 Requirements of Compliance Program Related to Protection of Private Information Private information refers to information related to individuals information contained in the relevant information such as descriptions including names and dates of birth numbers symbols and other codes and information that helps to identify individua
90. tag values for download content are used to augment the download content at the receiver There are nine types of PID and tag values available one for data common to all receivers and eight for receiver software Eight types of PID and tag values are assigned to receiver software for each model in turn in the order of transmission Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 7 Model 8 Model 9 Model 10 Model 11 PID1 tag1 PID2 tag2 PID3 tag3 PID7 tag7 PID8 tag8 PID1 tag1 PID2 tag2 PID3 tag3 J Figure 5 3 Assignment of PID and tag values without data common to all receivers Model 1 Common Model 2 Model 6 Model 7 Model 8 Model 9 Model 10 PID1 tag1 PIDk tagk PID2 tag2 TTT PID6 tag6 PID7 tag7 PID8 tag8 PID1 tag1 PID2 tag2 fo Figure 5 4 Assignment of PID and tag values with data common to all receivers Where the number of units updated is eight or less units dummy data is inserted Each dummy lasts 10 seconds and consists of either null packets or adaptation fields only or empty Carrousel packets Model 1 Model 2 Dummy 3 Dummy 7 Dummy 8 Model 1 Model 2 Dummy 3 PID1 tag1 PID2 tag2 PID3 tag3 TTTS PID7 tag7 PID8 tag8 PID1 tag1 PID2 tag2 i PID3 tag3 Jo Figure 5 5 Assignment of PID and tag values for eight or less units Where the number of units updated is not a multiple of eight dummy data is sent continuously until a multiple of eight
91. the ondemand _retrieval_flag in the PMT data encoding method descriptor and the EIT data content descriptor Where a data program is designed to be stored for later viewing in conjunction with a television program the commissioning broadcaster may forbid viewing of the data program independently of the television program The status of the program with respect to independent viewing is notified via the independent_flag in the PMT data encoding method descriptor and the EIT data content descriptor e E Types of data program storage Some types of content in data programs may be stored while other types may not The same applies to additional data in data enriched television programs The status of the content with respect to storage is notified via the file storage flag in the PMT data encoding method descriptor and the EIT data content descriptor This flag is ignored in basic receiver units with no storage function Refer to PMT data encoding method descriptor 5 1 5 and EIT data content descriptor 5 1 7 3 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 1 1 4 service_type for datacasting program channels There are three forms of service_type for services broadcast by different data programs as shown below 1 Data enriched television programs are broadcast on service_type 0x01 or 0x02 television or radio services channels 2 Independent data programs are broadcast on service_type 0xC0 channels 3 Pre stored linked an
92. the still picture as shown in Figure 4 3 The rectangular area is the video area and the number of areas that can be set is 1 In the second pattern the still picture is positioned on top of the video for the entire screen display as shown in Figure 4 4 The rectangular area is the still picture area and the maximum number of areas is 4 Where multiple still picture areas are specified the still picture can be layered as shown in examples 1 and 2 in Figure 4 5 however in this case the area is not rectangular as required in the regulations and therefore cannot be implemented In examples 3 and 4 the areas are not rectangular but they are acceptable because the boundaries of the rectangular areas are considered to be in contact Still picture a ul ru screen Moving APEE 3 Rectangular area Figure 4 3 Example 1 Moving picture and still picture combinations Moving picture Hasan eeececccccce Fu screen gt Still gt Stil Se ot DEMES ci Rectangular area Still Still picture picture eeeoeeee eeeoeeeee eeoeeoeoeee eeeeeese Figure 4 4 Example 2 Moving picture and still picture combinations 3 12 Moving pts Still picture i A Sisson a L l Still picture 2i Figure 4 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Ju screen iStill picture 31 E e Rectangular ar area Example 3 Moving picture and still picture combinations 4 2 3 Mono media encoding and presentation planes Tabl
93. time offset value is set in the TOT due to the introduction of summer time the time offset 4HH MM should be attached to the above format as shown below CCY Y MM DDTHH MM SS 09 00 Non summer time CCY Y MM DDTHH MM SS 10 00 Summer time 1 hour If the start_time has not been specified this property should not be implemented upnp scheduledEndTime string This property indicates the end time of an event As a general rule the converted end time should be assigned to this property The end time must be calculated from the start_time and duration which represents the duration of the event that are contained in the event loop of the EIT Then the end time must be converted from the BCD format to the following format specified in the DLNA guidelines The latter format is the same format for the dc date If the TOT does not exist the following format should be applied CCYY MM DDTHH MM SS If the summer time offset value is set in the TOT due to the introduction of summer time the time offset HH MM should be attached to the above format as shown below CCY Y MM DDTHH MM SS 09 00 Non summer time CCY Y MM DDTHH MM SS 10 00 Summer time 1 hour If the start_time or duration has not be specified and the end time cannot be calculated the upnp scheduledEndTime property should not be implemented dc description string This property represents a program description
94. to be used for MNG Chunk name Usage details PIVOT Ri 3 nace Mandatory RS ER ERESS OS ES EES ET Or MEND oe hs hac nataedsasancthe Mandatory oo _IHDR PNG chunks IEND Compliant with the PNG usage specifications RTERMS Z onthe oxi cette lacs Compliant with ARIB STD B24 FRAM 22412 ncuadsadedewaasaaseult Compliant with ARIB STD B24 DEFI Compliant with ARIB STD B24 6 2 4 2 Constraints on MNG usage 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total data size 256KB Note that the MNG file total data size refers to a total amount of data when different MNGs are exploded Also note that the data amount of each MNG shall be a value of number of horizontal pixels x number of vertical pixels x bitdepth x number of PNG images Total number of PNG images 64 images Note that the total number of PNG images refers to the number of all PNG images held by an MNG Value specified for the update interval of PNG files Minimum 200 milliseconds Maximum 5 000 milliseconds Specified in units of 100 milliseconds Repeat To set endless loop Ox7fffffff shall be specified as the repeat count To specify a limited number of repeats a value of an update interval of PNG files x number of PNG images x repeat count shall not exceed 120 seconds Display size Maximum data size of all PNG files in a single screen 256KB Note that the total display area per second shall not exceed 256KB Others Playing when the streamStatus attribute play the displa
95. to determine whether the ES is a static image Therefore when a static image needs to be output as a partial TS Video Decode Control Descriptor must be inserted to the PMT 6 2 3 DIT Discontinuity Information Table 6 2 3 1 Structure and operation of a DIT Purpose This table indicates the discontinuity points of a stream that will be output as a partial TS If there are some discontinuity points in a partial TS for some reasons a receiver inserts a DIT to the partial TS Structure Table 6 12 shows the structure of a DIT which consists of a single section This DIT section is transmitted through a transport stream packet whose PID value is 0x001E The table ID for a DIT is Ox7E 2 45 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 12 Structure of a DIT Discontinuity Information Table Data structure Bit Identifier discontinuity_information_section table_id 8 uimsbf section_syntax_indicator 1 bslbf reserved future use 1 bslbf Reserved 2 bslbf section_length 12 uimsbf transition _flag 1 uimsbf reserved_future_use 7 bslbf Meaning of each field The meaning of each field is defined by 9 1 8 2 of Chapter 9 of ARIB STD B21 and 7 1 1 of ETS 300 468 Output operation rules 1 2 3 When a partial TS is output a DIT must be inserted to the discontinuity points of the stream based on the system time Specifically the discontinuity points of PCR If discontinuity of continuit
96. to priorities shall be noted Note 5 Not operated in terrestrial broadcasting Note 6 The method for checking implementation of this function is different between BML1 0 and BML3 0 Refer to Table 10 3 Note 7 Not defined in STD B24 at the moment Refer to TR B14 Section 3 Note 8 If there is no module that is already locked or that is making a request for locking an array with a length of 0 shall be returned as a return value Some receivers exist however that return NULL as a return value so that point shall be considered when using the relevant function in content 10 5 5 Notes on operation by mixing different BML versions together For transition from BML3 0 content to BML1 0 content the functions usable in BML3 0 shall not be assumed in BML1 0 content e Modules locked by lockModuleOnMemoryEx in BML3 0 content shall not used in BML1 0 content e Transition to BML1 0 content after specifying remain for partial JPEG shall be prohibited e For the beitem element of BML1 0 content the event_msg_group_id attribute shall not be specified Modules locked by lockModuleOnMemoryEx in BML3 0 should be unlocked within BML3 0 content but they may be forcibly transitioned to a startup document in the entry component that is written in BML1 0 due to disappearance of the components being presented return to entry flags etc Thus broadcasters using lockModuleOnMemoryEx shall consider proper use of unlockAllModulesOnMemory in a startu
97. to select a caption from the initial setting menu but the sender of the caption SE predetermines whether to display the caption and the caption is normally displayed automatically Note that a receiver must display both the subtitle ES and caption ES at the same time if both ESs are present 4 7 Adaptation to various TV broadcasting methods 4 7 1 Reception of signals sent through hierarchical modulation See ARIB STD B21 6 3 Receiver s function of hierarchical modulation in digital satellite broadcasting and 7 1 Operation of hierarchical modulation in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document e Functions required for reception 1 2 3 4 5 Demodulation of signals sent through hierarchical modulation Invalidation of the higher layer through monitoring of the error rate of 8PSK A decoding function of the video and audio at the lower layer However a receiver does not need to be implemented with a function for concurrently outputting the decoded video and audio of the same stream type that exist between the higher layer and lower layer Automatic switching to another stream layer after a receiver invalidates the higher layer according to the Hierarchical Transmission Descriptor within the monitored PSI Manufacturers can freely decide whether to automatically switch from the higher layer to the lower layer A function for indicating that the receiver is currently receiving the lower layer signals Display of a
98. 1 Carousel 2 Carousel 3 DII DII DII data_event_id 1 data_event_id 1 data_event_id 1 DIl_version 0 DIl_version 1 DIl_version 2 Any module Any module Any module moduleld 100 moduleld 100 moduleld 100 moduleVersion 0 moduleVersion 1 moduleVersion 2 Data event 3 gt DII data_event_id 3 Carousel 4 DII data_event_id 1 DIl_version 3 Any module moduleld 100 moduleVersion 3 If any module in the DII is updated including module version update or change in the number of modules the DII version will be updated An event break is not always accompanied by a data event break Where the transmission period of the local content is the same as the event period the associated data content descriptor has one to one correspondence Figure 5 5 Data event and local content structure TH 9 7 UOTSISA SIT AL dav ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 3 1 6 Empty carousels usage e An empty carousel is a data carousel with no DDB where the numberOfModules field consists entirely of DII with zeroes e Empty carousels are used to switch between send stop for component data without changing the ES description in the PMT for instance when a given component is required only for a particular period in an event Switching between empty and non empty carousels also switches the data_event_id e The rules for DII minimum transmission intervals refer to 5 3 2 apply equally to empty carousels when they are transmitted e DII ver
99. 2 BML3 0 content placement e At least a startup document in the entry component and a startup document in the component directly launched from an EPG shall be written in BML1 0 because content to be received immediately after channel selection shall be receivable by all receivers e bml version contained in a PMT and EIT shall be specified as 1 0 e BML documents launched by other media through epgTuneToComponent shall be written in BML1 0 e Bookmarks for BML3 0 content should not be registered into receivers not supporting BML3 0 10 5 3 Operation coverage of new functions Table 10 4 shows coverage of terrestrial digital receivers functions in BML1 0 and 3 0 The meanings of descriptions in the Use field are as follows O Usable O Usable as an option Not usable 3 136 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 10 4 Operation coverage of new functions in terrestrial and satellite common use receivers Function mom Content where tildes are use to describe its local ES Content where HD data is added to video other than HD and MPEG 2 I Content that uses 112 128 scaling for HD or SD video Content that causes partial JPEG to remain Clipping of an X coordinate of video Content where the range of colors set by a broadcaster for PNG and MNG is extended to 207 from index 17 to 223 MNG with an update frequency of 100ms or more and less than 200ms Content assuming a resident character input application Content that u
100. 20 specified for 720 MP HL Value specified for MP HI4L Value 480 specified 480 544 720 p Value specified 240 352 for MP LL Meanings of MPEG 2 Video encoding parameters code numbers in Table 6 2 aspect_ratio_information 1 Square pixel 2 4 3 display 3 16 9 display frame_rate_code 4 30 1 001 Hz 7 60 1 001 Hz progressive sequence 0 Interlaced scanning 1 Progressive scanning colour_primaries 1 Value specified in Rec ITU R BT 709 BT 1361 transfer_characteristics 1 Value specified in Rec ITU R BT 709 BT 1361 matrix_coefficients 1 Value specified in Rec ITU R BT 709 BT 1361 6 1 2 2 Other limitations e MPEG 2 Video shall be transported through an image PES stream format identification 0x02 e The scalings 256 128 192 128 and 160 128 shall apply to MP LL only 6 1 3 MPEG 4 Video Encoding methods using MPEG 4 Video shall be optional 3 59 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 2 Still picture and bitmap pattern encoding 6 2 1 MPEG 2 I frames 6 2 1 1 Constraints on encoding parameters Table 6 3 Constraints on MPEG 2 frame Sequence extension extension parameters vertical_ horizontal_ aspect frame_ progressive low colour transfer_ matrix_ size_value size_value rao rate_code sequence delay primaries characteristics coefficients information Value MP HL Value specified for MP H14L Value specified for MP ML aspect_ratio_information
101. 255 39 85 255 170 255 40 85 255 255 255 41 170 0 85 255 42 170 0 255 255 43 170 85 0 255 44 170 85 85 255 45 170 85 170 255 46 170 85 255 255 47 170 170 85 255 48 170 170 255 255 49 170 255 0 255 50 170 255 85 255 51 170 255 170 255 52 170 255 255 255 53 255 0 85 255 54 255 0 170 255 55 255 85 0 255 56 255 85 85 255 57 255 85 170 255 58 255 85 255 255 59 255 170 0 255 60 255 170 85 255 61 255 170 170 255 62 255 170 255 255 63 255 255 85 255 64 255 255 170 255 65 0 0 0 128 Black 66 255 0 0 128 Red 67 0 255 0 128 Green 68 255 255 0 128 Yellow 69 0 0 255 128 Blue 70 255 0 255 128 Magenta 71 0 255 255 128 Cyan 72 255 255 255 128 White 73 170 0 0 128 Half bright red 74 0 170 0 128 Half bright green 75 170 170 0 128 Half bright yellow 76 0 0 170 128 Half bright blue 77 170 0 170 128 Half bright magenta 78 0 170 170 128 Half bright cyan 79 170 170 170 128 Half bright white gray 80 0 0 85 128 81 0 85 0 128 82 0 85 85 128 83 0 85 170 128 84 0 85 255 128 85 0 170 85 128 86 0 170 255 128 87 0 255 85 128 88 0 255 170 128 89 85 0 0 128 90 85 0 85 128 91 85 0 170 128 92 85 0 255 128 93 85 85 0 128 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Index value R G B a Name Remarks 94 85 85 85 128 95 85 85 170 128 96 85 85 255 128 97 85 170 0 128 98 85 170 85 128 99 85 170
102. 3 1 7 e Activation and termination of local content is normally performed in conjunction with data_event_id update in the DII of the carousel currently being viewed 5 3 1 4 Introduction of return to entry flag e In certain situations it may be necessary to forcibly shift control to the entry local content in synch with local content switching for the entry component irrespective of the type of local content being viewed To this end a flag return to entry flag return_to_entry_flag is provided in order to notify the entry carousel DII private information area The receiver monitors this flag irrespective of the type of component local content on display e The return to entry flag is not used in DII for data carousels transmitted in components other than the entry component 5 3 1 5 Local content and data content descriptors e E If there is no local content switching for the duration of the event and the local content transmission period is the same as the event period as per the definition provided in Chapter 9 the data content descriptor and the local content have one to one correspondence e If multiple local content are transmitted during the event period the data content descriptor provides information about the multiple local content as a whole 3 43 pre Time Event Content Data event 1 soo Data event 2 o Data ES entry_ DII sre DII data_event_id 1 data_event id 2 Carousel
103. 3 in DLNA guidelines A response to a request from Range dtcp com involves the HTTP response codes Table 8 4 shows some 2 83 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 conditions pertaining to a Range dtcp com requrest and corresponding HTTP response codes Table 8 4 HTTP response codes corresponding to a Range dtcp com request Condition Response code When a receiver normally responds to the Range dtcp com request 200 OK 206 Partial Content should not be used When the requested range from Range dtcp com 416 Requested Range Not is invalid For example the start position of the Satisfiable requested range exceeds the end position of the content When the request from Range dtcp com is 400 Bad Request grammatically incorrect When the receiver does not support the 406 Not Acceptable Range dtcp com request to the content When a receiver responds to a request from Range dtcp com with the response code 200 OK the Content Range dtcp com header fields must be inserted to the HTTP response header The Content Range dtcp com is described in DTCP VISE The format of the Content Range dtcp com is as follows Content Range dtcp com Content Range dtcp com content range spec content range spec byte content range spec byte content range spec bytes unit SP byte range resp spec instance length bytes unit bytes byte range resp
104. 4 1 Purpose of event MeSSAQES cccccsccesssceeseceeteeeeeecesceessceceeseceeseeceseecesaecseeeeseseesenaeeneaeenes 3 49 5 3 4 2 Transmission Of event messages ccccceessceessceeseeceseeessceeeceseeeeseeeseeeseseeeeseeeseeeneeeneaeens 3 49 5 3 4 3 Transmission of general purpose event MESSAGES cccecssceesseceseeeeeeeeeeesseeenseeeneneenes 3 49 5 3 4 4 Transmission of NPT reference messages eccesceseceseceneeceseceaeceseceaeceaeceaeceaeeeaeeeaeees 3 50 5 3 4 5 Event message processing by the reCe1ver cccccesccsesscceesseeeseeesseeceeaeeeeseeesseeenseeensneenes 3 51 5 3 4 6 Usage OF DSMEC sec NO heinn aa tanniahdvctcvane tasteatsvancdawevabtens vas damevancent A A 3 53 5 3 4 7 Usage of general purpose event message descriptors ssesssssssessressresseseeessessressees 3 54 5 3 4 8 Usage of NPT reference Aescriptors sieneen esa s e s ES E EES EEE R 3 54 5 3 5 TIT usage serrrsreererseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeetenseeesneneieeecnensaeeeessnentecacinessesesasasescesacacescesntacecensnteececeness 3 54 5 3 6 Associated receiver operations e ON E E ET E E slslarel0 E E T TTN 3 54 5 3 6 1 AS MSA BS estes sa ctecenss tee satis exes tile ts ah ee cea rea Sti deat ccna lle ih oc ceehd dora or He coed 3 54 5 3 6 2 Expire descriptors DIT and receiver Operations ccccecscceesseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeenseeenseeenes 3 54 5 3 6 3 Filtering resources for datacasting reception ccccceessceesceeseesseeeeeeeeeseeeseeensee
105. 4 6 E1 Line direction display block size Action position reference point Character spacing Word direction Font sizex2 display block size Character spacing Line spacing 2 Fontsize Line spacing 2 Figure 7 12 Relationships among display block font size double height character spacing and line spacing in vertical writing 3 91 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Action position reference point Line direction display block size y Character spacing 2 y Font size A Character spacing 2 Word direction display block size Line spacing Font sizex2 Line spacing Figure 7 13 Relationships among display block font size double width character spacing and line spacing in vertical writing 3 92 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Action position reference point Line direction display block size A Character spacing y A Word direction display block size Font sizex2 y A Character spacing Ws gt lt gt lt Line spacing Font sizeX2 Line spacing Figure 7 14 Relationships among display block font size double height width character spacing and line spacing in vertical writing 3 93 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 7 15 shows the initial values for font size character spacing and line spacing Table 7 15 Initial values for font size character spacing and line spacin
106. 4 6 E1 Table 7 19 Extended control code set CSI Control function Limitations and supplemental remarks Instruction possible only after initialization of the display screen and before appearance of characters with bitmap display and display action or appearance of control code Only 1 code parameter is used parameters that can be specified for P11 P1i shall be only 7 960x540 horizontal writing and 8 960x540 vertical SWE Switeh formal writing for a 960x540 caption plane resolution and only 9 720x480 horizontal writing and 10 720x480 vertical writing for a 720x480 caption plane resolution Note that if this control code is instructed it takes precedence over the format specified in caption management data ccc Color composition E control Instruction possible only after initialization of the display screen and before appearance of characters with bitmap display and display action or appearance of control code For color variations in addition to colors from 0 black to 15 half bright white defined in ARIB STD B24 possible to specify one from 16 to 127 of the common fixed colors For raster color control usage refer to 7 5 3 Instruction possible only after initialization of the display screen and before appearance of characters with bitmap display and display action or appearance of control code Instruction possible only after initialization of the display screen and before appearance of characters with b
107. 8 1 arib objectType string Operation specifications of an IP interface in this document A digital satellite receiver should assign ARIB_ BS to this filed using half width characters Required O Optional The properties of dc are defined by Dublin Core Metadata Initiative Table 8 2 shows the operation rules for the properties of a channel item A BS digital receiver must implement the properties with the implementation level Required as described in the Table 8 2 as well as the requirements specified in DLNA guidelines A receiver must also follow the descriptions in Table 8 2 if the receiver needs to implement the properties with the implementation level O Optional Table 8 2 Operation rules for the properties of a channel item Implementation property property name level type property description This property indicates whether the channel item is in accordance with 9 2 IP interface specifications of ARIB STD B21 and 8 1 arib objectType string Operation specifications of an IP interface in this document A digital satellite receiver should assign ARIB_BS to this filed using half width characters This property indicates the event name As a general rule the event_name_char contained in the first loop of the Short Event Descriptor should be inserted to this property The Short Event Descriptor is contained in the event loop de title string of the EIT The inserted inf
108. ARIB ENGLISH TRANSLATION SATELLITE BROADCASTING ARIB TECHNICAL REPORT ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 Fascicle 1 Established on October 26th 1999 Revised on March 29th 2000 Revised on May 31st 2001 Revised on July 27th 2001 Revised on January 24th 2002 Revised on March 28th 2002 Revised on July 25th 2002 Revised on September 26th 2002 Revised on March 26th 2003 Revised on June 5th 2003 Revised on July 29th 2003 Revised on October 16th 2003 Revised on February 5th 2004 Revised on July 22nd 2004 Revised on September 28th 2004 Revised on December 14th 2004 Revised on March 24th 2005 Revised on September 29th 2005 Revised on November 30th 2005 Revised on March 14th 2006 Revised on May 29th 2006 Revised on September 28th 2006 Revised on December 12th 2006 Revised on May 29th 2007 Revised on September 26th 2007 Revised on December 12th 2007 Revised on March 19th 2008 Revised on Jun 6th 2008 Revised on September 25th 2008 Revised on December 12th 2008 Version 1 1 Version 1 2 Version 2 0 Version 2 1 Version 2 2 Version 2 3 Version 2 4 Version 2 5 Version 2 6 Version 2 7 Version 2 8 Version 2 9 Version 3 0 Version 3 1 Version 3 2 Version 3 3 Version 3 4 Version 3 5 Version 3 6 Version 3 7 Version 3 8 Version 3 9 Version 4 0 Version 4 1 Version 4 2 Version 4 3 Version 4 4 Version 4 5 Version 4 6 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL Associatio
109. At the above time the display area and display position shall be set to values in Table 7 13 In addition the values for font size character spacing and line spacing shall be set to values in Table 7 15 7 7 2 Initialization through caption text The receiver shall perform initialization defined in ARIB STD B24 when receiving the same caption text data as that of the data group set and language being processed for presentation 7 7 3 Initialization through a text data unit When receiving the same caption text data as that of the data group set and language being processed for presentation if a text data unit is contained in that caption text data the receiver shall perform initialization defined in ARIB STD B24 Note that the default values for initialization shall be as follows index value 15 for the foreground halftone color and index value 30 for the background halftone color 7 7 4 Initialization through character control code The receiver shall perform initialization defined in ARIB STD B24 immediately before it starts processing screen erasure CS and format setting SWF Note that the default values for initialization shall be as follows index value 15 for the foreground halftone color and index value 30 for the background halftone color 7 8 Mono media used in subtitles and superimposed text 7 8 1 Using geometric Geometric shall not be used in subtitles or superimposed text 7 8 2 Using bitmap data Bitmap data can b
110. B TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 Operating Mono media Encoding 6 1 Video encoding 6 1 1 MPEG 1 Video 6 1 1 1 Constraints on encoding parameters Table 6 1 Constraints on MPEG 1 Video encoding parameters Constraints on Sequence Header n Other parameters pel aspect ratio picture_rate 6 12 parameters Meanings of MPEG 1 Video encoding parameters code numbers in Table 6 1 pel_aspect_ ratio 6 16 9 display 525lines 12 4 3 display 525lines picture_rate 4 30 1 001 Hz 6 1 1 2 Playback in synchronization with sound MPEG 2 AAC Synchronized playback of MPEG 1 which is transported through an image PES and MPEG 2 AAC which is transported through a PES shall be made possible 6 1 1 3 Other limitations MPEG 1 Video shall be transported through an image PES stream format identification 0x01 6 1 2 MPEG 2 Video Shall be compliant with the specifications of Section 7 4 1 Video MPEG 2 Video 3 58 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 1 2 1 Constraints on encoding parameters Table 6 2 Constraints on MPEG 2 Video encoding parameters Constraints on encoding parameters constraints Constraints on Sequence display on Sequence Constraints on Sequence Header sxtension extension Other horizontal aspect frame l parameters vertical _ T ee progressive_ colour transfer _ matrix_ size ratio rate_ j F Gon 3 size value sequence primaries characteristics coefficients value information code 19
111. CCICOUCCCDCOCTROOOC UC CC DOUC ERC OCC OOOO CICONCCDOCET E E DOC Co TI ris Je 14 6 Receiver guidelines for downloads nie ease God E T LETETT A LATT le 14 Onl MEMOr ysis vette eles eee eee Rs BO en Bi eres Bet 1 14 6 2 Operatioii eseuen bh ka eee ieente end sie een State aboot She nbeeds Sather ee 1 15 6 2 1 Reservation function veee a i a a ae A A a A a a sibia e a 1 d 1 5 6 2 2 Reception function PIII EEIEIIE O E IT IETT T A EO IEI IIN E TATT TT 1 2 1 6 6 2 3 Consent function AA TETI TTET EOSTI ATTEST ITITI TATTI EIT IE P NN 1 s 1 6 6 2 4 Recovery from abnormal event function sue ale ters A PE IE PI EI OET IE E E T T A E T 1 16 6 2 5 Power function ET ITNE ENS E E I I T TE TE ES TTET AE ETTE TET A TRET 1 17 6 2 6 Version number display function EAR T ETET TAT LETILTOTT TEETE 1 1 Fi 6 3 Common data reception Q lt uidelines ec cecccccesceeseeceneeeeseeeeseeesececeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeseseeseteeeeteeenteeenses 1 17 6 3 1 Cross media standardization of genre codes program characteristics codes and Keywords rrerrsrerereseeiseeeeeeeteeeeseeneeeensneeeecnneseseeassneeeisasaeeeciseasescnentececesaneeseceenseecesesasanes 1 17 6 3 2 Receiver tracking of version number of common data aicisig slcle E clese sieiaie eve shale e s slelole s s elale e sidels sis s sle sie e sle 6 6 ajo l 1 8 6 3 3 Downloading REN IE VEEN PNE NE I E E I EN N A A A E N E E AA NT 1 18 7 Operational guidelines for receiver information update seryicesteeeevere
112. DMF 0010 auto display when receiving and selective display when recording playing 1010 selective display when receiving and selective display when recording playing ISO_639_language_code Language code to be used Format 1000 960x540 horizontal writing 1001 960x540 vertical writing 1010 720x480 horizontal writing 1011 720x480 vertical writing TCS 00 8 unit code data_unit_loop_ length As per the specifications However 1 PES packet shall not exceed 32KB in size data_unit Stores a data unit text and DRCS 7 2 5 2 Caption management data used for superimposed text Considering time signal superimposed text it shall be made possible to set real time as well as free for TMD for the purpose of time synchronization through STM If caption management data has not been received for three minutes or more the receiver shall perform the initialization that executes at the time of channel selection Table 7 5 shows parameters that can be specified for caption management data used for superimposed text Table 7 5 Caption management data parameters for superimposed text Field TMD 00 free O1 real time Free and real time cannot exist at the time of presentation Num_languages 1 2 language_tag 0 1 DMF 0000 auto display when receiving and auto display when recording playing 0010 auto display when receiving and selective display when recording playing 1010 selective disp
113. DTCP1HOST host DTCP1PORT port CONTENTFORMA T video mpeg 8 1 4 4 Access to a content to specify a range If a digital satellite receiver is designed to access a program content to specify a range through TimeSeekRange dIna org the receiver must follow the rules specified in the DLNA guidelines If a receiver is designed to access a program content through Range dtcp com which is defined in DTCP 2 82 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 VISE the receiver must follow the following rules If a BS digital receiver is designed to access a specified range through Range dtcp com if there is description of ARIB ORG_JP_PN in the fourth field of res protocolInfo in the content that can be supported ARIB OR JP_OP 1 must be inserted If the content cannot be supported the ARIB OR JP_OP parameter should not be inserted If there is description of DLNA ORG PN cleartextbyteseek full or lop cleartextbytes flag of DLNA ORG_ FLAGS must be set according to the specifications in DLNA guidelines However when both ARIB ORG_JP_PN and DLNA ORG PN are described ARIB OR JP_OP may not be inserted due to restrictions on res protocolInfo s length The format of Range dtcp com is as follows e Range dtcp com Range dtcp com range specifier e range specifier byte range specifier e byte range specifier bytes unit byte range set e bytes unit bytes e byte range set byte range spec e byte range spec first byt
114. DTT structure and meanings are as per ARIB STD B21 12 2 1 Transmission Scheme of Notification Information Examples of notification information are given in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 3 1 Notification Information 5 1 2 2 Data common to all receivers Sub tables for data common to all receivers are configured as a single section The number of schedule information loops is 0 SDTT is sent simultaneously with the Carrousel that transmits the download content but not at any other time Since downloads of data common to all receivers are treated as Common to All Receiver models maker id and model id must use Oxfffe or similar that shows Common to All Receivers Section 5 1 4 2 describes version_id The group id is always 0 group_id is not used in the case of data common to all receivers The number of download content descriptors and num_of_contents is 1 compatibility flag and text_info flag in the download content descriptor are normally 0 these can be ignored by receivers Descriptions in module_infor_byte are the same as moduleInfoByte in DII normally superimposition of Name descriptors only other information can be ignored by receivers Private data length is normally 0 this can be ignored by receivers Download content descriptor add_on is always 0 and is not used 5 1 3 Transmission cycle and transmission speed The SDTT is sent once every ten minutes or more Maximum transmission speed is 10 kbps see also esti
115. O wide band e Content that is shared with CS Level 1 and that can use the common u broadcasting use extended se digital functions defined in CS receivers broadcasting after checking their implementation Level 3 Terrestrial O O Refer to 10 5 1 BS and e Content that is shared with e Content that is reserved for Level 3 and that wide band Level 1 and 2 and that can use can use the broadcasting use extended CS the broadcasting use extended functions or new functionality defined in common u functions defined in terrestrial terrestrial broadcasting in the same se digital broadcasting after checking conditions as in terrestrial broadcasting receivers their implementation The above content should be put such that it will not be presented in receivers for Level 2 or lower BML1 0 content is intended to be shared among Level 1 to 3 assuming that it can be received with no problem by conventional type receivers and contents covering receivers of all types shall be put in it Use of functions whose implementation depends on the receiver shall be permitted on condition that they are executed after checking their implementation by using getBrowserSupport so that the viewer will not feel uncomfortable when viewing content In BML3 0 however content to be broadcast in BS digital broadcasting is written by using new functionality in terrestrial broadcasting and is reserved for terrestrial and satellite common use it is not presentable compa
116. SAD COMO cies hs EO OE E ee et nn ea ctay ate eae eee Seale eae aaa ae oan ean aes cea at 2 33 5 15 1 Priory for various kinds of display sssssssssseessessseesesseeesnseeseeeeseeesseesnneesnneesneensneeeseneees 2 33 5 15 2 Priority for power standby processing sree este ieeesseeessteeesessssseessseeesiecssseeessiaes 2 33 5153 Reset butone ee r a E tare A AATE 2 34 5 15 4 RGB analog terminalet etette t tts tssssstesstesttt tits tessstenetetett tets tesssnenneeetetttessntt 2 34 5 15 5 Digital video termimal s s ss ssssessssesssssessssesseeessseeseesnessneessncssnsesseesssseessseeseesnnssnenseneesy 2 34 5 15 6 Digital video and audio terminal s sssssessseeseessseessseeessnsessnsesseeeeseessneeseeessnnensnseeseeesneens 2 34 Sis T Ree ee a A es aa ae me eer total een etna 2 34 6 Operation Specifications for PSI SI Tables That Can Be Inserted into Partial TS Outputs 2 35 6 1 Output operation specifications ceesccccssccssseceeneeeeseeeeseecceeseceeseeceeecseecseeeeeseeesseeeseeeseeeeseaseeeaes 2 35 6 1 1 Definition of tables and descriptors lt lt sssesssieseiesseesseeesseeessseesseeeeseeeseessesssessneeesnseesneeey 2 35 615 Tabletommonitems oi ae n ss ess eA eee E E E ees 2 36 6 1 3 Interval for resending each table Repetition interval essere ieseeeeseeseseeesneeeey 2 37 6 2 Table operation specifications ccccecscccsssscssssceeseceeseeeeseeceseecseeecesseeeeseecsseecsseeesereeeesaaeesseeeseeeenaes 2 38
117. SDTT recapture or download content acquisition are properly completed prior to start_time in order to prevent any portion of the first download content from being lost 1 13 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 3 2 Data common to all receivers The SDTT transmission status can be used to determine if download content transmission is in progress It is important that power control processes for the purpose of SDTT recapture or download content acquisition are properly completed prior to DII acquisition in order to prevent any portion of the first download content from being lost 5 4 Emergency halt in receiver update service In the event of an emergency halt in the download download content transmission will cease However SDTT transmission may continue so the receiver should perform a timeout 5 5 Suspension of receiver update service If there is no download content whatsoever transmission of SDTT and download content is suspended PMT transmission continues however which means that PMT_PID may remain unchanged in PAT 5 6 Summertime daylight saving time SDTT start_time and transmission times are based on UTC 9 hours irrespective of local summertime schemes 5 7 Security 5 7 1 Receiver software update Encryption of download content associated with receiver software updates for cipher or other purposes is receiver implementation dependent Security guidelines are provided in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 5 2 Transmi
118. TS the receiver must use the tables described in Table 6 1 For details on each table see ARIB STD B10 and ARIB STD B21 Table 6 1 PSI SI tables used in digital satellite broadcasting Table name Function description PAT Program Association Table This table contains IDs of TS packets through which PMTs of a partial TS are transmitted PMT Program Map Table This table contains IDs of TS packets through which the coded signals that constitute a broadcasting program are transmitted DIT Discontinuity Information Table This table contains discontinuity points where a partial TS program may have inconsistant information regarding the program array SIT Selection Information Table This table contains information on a partial TS program Table 6 2 shows the values assigned to PIDs of the transport stream packets that transmit sections of a partial TS Table 6 2 PIDs for PSI SI tables PID Table 0x0000 PAT PIDs are specified in a PAT PMT 0x001E DIT 0x001F SIT Table 6 3 shows the values table_id assigned to tables that contain information about sections of a partial TS that a receiver outputs These values are specified in Section 4 1 of Part 1 of ARIB STD B10 Table 6 3 table_id for tables table id Table 0x00 PAT 0x02 PMT Ox7E DIT Ox7F SIT 6 1 1 2 Types of descriptors and their identifiers Table 6 4 lists the descriptors that can be used in
119. TS time descriptors may be inserted to the 2 loop of an SIT to hold the time information for each service However if some descriptors hold JST_time and others do not hold JST_time the descriptors processing may become too complicated Therefore in order to simplify the processing only the 1 loop of the SIT should hold JST_time and the 2 loop should not hold JST_time Instead the descriptor in the 2 loop should only manage the time information of the relevant services Note however that it is also acceptable that all the descriptors contain JST_time 15 Broadcast ID Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains various IDs that are necessary when a user replays the data broadcasts These IDs are transmitted during data broadcast Structure Table 6 24 shows the structure of the Broadcast ID Descriptor Table 6 24 Structure of the Broadcast ID Descriptor Data structure bit Identifier broadcast_id_ descriptor descriptor_tag 8 uimsbf descriptor_length 8 uimsbf original network_id 16 uimsbf transport_stream_id 16 uimsbf event_id 16 uimsbf broadcaster_id 8 uimsbf Meaning of each field The meaning of each field is defined in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document Output operation rule e This descriptor must be placed in the 2nd loop of an SIT if the data component of a program Component tag value from 0x40 to OxDF needs to be output to a partial TS 2 59 ARIB TR B15 V
120. The broadcasting period has already passed The user selects a non existing channel The phone line has not been correctly connected or set This channel cannot be viewed because it is a non broadcasting channel The video has been switched to the lower layer Receiving no signals Check the connection with the antenna Note 1 The selected channel does not exist The receiver could not connect to the center 2 24 E200 E201 E202 This channel program cannot be viewed The video will be automatically switched to the higher layer once the reception level returns to normal Please wait for a while Check the connection of the antenna cable Check the connection of the antenna cable Check whether correct values have been specified to the antenna settings Check the connection of the antenna cable Check the broadcasting period with a program guide E204 Check the channels with a program guide Check the connection and settings of the phone line Make sure that the phone line is connected correctly ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 During a replay of data The receiver cannot receive Move from the current broadcast any data channel to another channel The BML document and then return to the cannot be obtained previous data channel again During a replay of data This receiver cannot display E401 Move from the current broadcast channel to another channel The receiver s BML
121. The media type of the distribution system where the partial TS is created should be assigned to this field If the media type is digital satellite broadcasting the code 0x4253 should be assigned to this The network identification number of the distribution system where the partial TS is created should be assigned to this field The When this descriptor is placed in the first loop of an SIT this descriptor manages information regarding the time when the partial TS is created Structure Table 6 21 shows the structure of the Partial TS Time Descriptor Table 6 21 Structure of the Partial TS Time Descriptor Data structure bit Identifier partialTS_time descriptor descriptor_tag 8 uimsbf descriptor_length 8 uimsbf event_version_number 8 uimsbf event_start_time 40 bslbf Duration 24 uimsbf Offset 24 bslbf Reserved 5 bslbf offset_flag 1 bslbf other_descriptor_status 1 bslbf JST_time_flag 1 bslbf if JST_time_flag 1 JST_time 40 bslbf 2 52 Meaning of each field ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 The meaning of each field is defined in 9 1 8 3 in ARIB STD B21 Output operation rule e Itis recommended that this descriptor be inserted to an SIT e JST time should be inserted at an interval of less than 10 seconds e This descriptor should not be inserted to the 2nd loop of an SIT if this descriptor has already been inserted to the 1st loop However if this descriptor
122. Use of the viewer s place of residence information from MM services The following URI is used to read write from to the viewer s place of residence information which is expected to be stored into NVRAM by the initial setting function on the receiver from MM services nvram receiverinfo lt regiontype gt Table 8 4 shows strings that can be set as lt regiontype gt For details of the viewer s place of residence information refer to Section 2 lt regiontype gt Table 8 4 Type Read Write from MM services Types of the viewer s place of residence information Field type prefecture Prefecture code that corresponds to a target area descriptor bit position in the prefecture setting bitmap ARIB STD B10 Appendix G Table G 2 Only Read possible as a numeric value U 1B regioncode Area code that supports emergency information signals the Ordinance for Regulating Radio Equipment Clause 9 Section 3 No 5 The Ordinance for Regulating the Operations of Radio Stations Clause 138 and MPT Bulettin s 60 No 405 Only Read possible as a numeric value U 2B For the lower 12 bits 0 for all the upper 4 bits zipcode Postal code 7 digits Read Write possible as a fixed length string with a length of 7 Example 5001234 e If values for the broadcaster shared and broadcaster specific areas are not set an empty string 0 when reading as a numeric value shall be retur
123. Version 4 6 E1 5 15 3 Reset button A receiver should be equipped with a reset button to be prepared for a failure where a receiver becomes inoperable The reset button should be able to recover the receiver from the inoperable status 5 15 4 RGB analog terminal e Manufacturers can decide whether to equip a VGA terminal to a receiver If it needs to be equipped with a VGA terminal the terminal connector must fulfill the requirements described in 4 Physical Connections in Enhanced Display Data Channel Standard Version 1 issued by VESA The output signal format must fulfill the requirements described in 2 VESA Video Signal Definition in Video Signal Standard Version 1 Rev 1 issued by VESA e Manufacturers can decide whether to equip a DVI terminal that outputs analog signals If a receiver needs to be equipped with a DVI terminal the terminal connector should fulfill the requirements specified in 5 Physical Interconnect Specification in Digital Visual Interface DVI Revision 1 0 issued by DDWG The output signal format should fulfill the requirements specified in 2 5 Analog of 2 Architectural Requirements in Digital Visual Interface DVI Revision 1 0 e For information on the operation of RGB analog outputs see Section 8 of Part 1 of this document 5 15 5 Digital video terminal e Manufacturers can decide whether to equip a DVI terminal to a receiver If a receiver needs to be equipped with a DVI terminal the terminal
124. Where the receiver outputs data components those with component tag value in the range 0x40 0x7F to the partial transport stream these must be matched to the descriptors listed in Table 5 7 below As per the provisions of Section 2 Table 5 7 Descriptors output to partial TS Name Table described Required optional Data encoding method descriptor PMT 24 loop Required Data content descriptor SIT 2 loop Required Broadcast ID descriptor SIT 2 loop Required Hyperlink descriptor SIT 2 loop Optional e When playing multimedia content with the partial transport stream as the input source operations for functions that require the use of SI information which is not included in the partial transport stream shall be receiver dependent For example the broadcasting use extended functions described below EPG functions station select epgTune reservation epgReserve epgRecReserve Operation control functions check whether broadcast is in progress or not isBeingBroadcast 5 1 12 9 Preferred EPG display format e The data program display may be combined with the radio and television listings or a dedicated data program EPG may be provided The choice of implementation is receiver dependent e Table 5 8 shows the preferred EPG display format for datacasting services e E Chapter 9 describes the EPG display format for receivers compatible with pre stored linked and independent data programs 3 41
125. a aici dee 3 26 5 1 2 2 Local content and ES sissies ae etree eee creat a ohh ie eels ot 3 27 3 j ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 1 2 3 Component tags USAGE eceeeccesceseceseceneeeseceseceseeeseceseceseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeneeenees 3 27 5 1 2 4 Entry component identifier c ceccccessccsssceeseeeeseecesceceeneeeeseeenseecssaeeseseeeeeeenseeesseeeneaaes 3 28 1 2 5 ES COMSUPAINES isane e e Np aa Eaa EE EAN AVERS aaraa 3 28 5 1 2 6 Section datacasting rule S si innn EE eve E Ea E Eaa Eaa 3 28 5 1 2 7 Default maximum bit rate for datacasting programs cccccecsscessseceseeeeteeeeteeeeteeesseees 3 28 5 1 2 8 Audio and video components in datacasting services cccescceesseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeteceeneneene 3 29 5 1 3 Series reservation of datacasting services ose sleveln e AAAA AENA AN EAEE AEE N AAAA AAAA EA ele s diel e eislnie ARAR 3 30 5 1 4 PMT specific to datacasting service usage street tetris terttetten trt tettert terrent tettet ee t 3 30 5 1 5 PMT data encoding method descriptors usages tte tects rrtt trte rttr ttet tett eent 3 30 5 1 6 PMT region descriptor usages trteereeeteriteteeeee tees tenee eens neeeneenneeeeeanneneneneneeeenentaensene tty 3 32 5 1 7 p f EIT data content descriptors usages trees teeters teeeeeeneeeeseneeeecenenteeeeneney 3 32 5 1 8 schedule EIT data content descriptor usage ssc tereeteeeeereeeeneeeeeeneeetennaneeeentans 3 35 5 1 9 p f EIT hyperlink descriptor usage sitesi
126. a associated with it shall be treated as one unit and the ACC audio file data format shall be composed of one or more than one such units One audio frame is equal to 1024 samples as a unit in PCM it is approximately 21 3 milliseconds at a sampling rate of 48KHz ADTS AAC ADTS AAC Header Audio frame Data Header Audaio frame Data _ Audio frame e Figure 6 1 ACC audio file data format 6 3 2 AIFF C 6 3 2 1 Encoding parameters Table 6 8 AIFF C encoding parameters Sampling frequency Bit length 3 64 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 3 2 2 Maximum data size The maximum data size shall be 96KB or less 6 3 2 3 Other limitations Sound encoded by using AIFF C shall be transported through a data carousel stream format identification 0x0D The basic receiver unit does not need to support Private_chunks chunks other than Format _ Version _ Chunk Extended_Common_Chunk and Sound_Data_Chunk The number of channels shall be one There is no need to support repeat playback Playback of the seamed stream is not possible 6 3 3 MPEG 4 Audio Encoding methods by using MPEG 4 shall be optional 6 3 4 Additional sound Additional sound shall not be used 6 3 5 Receiver s preinstalled sounds The encoding method for the receiver s preinstalled sounds shall be AIFF C and compliant with the specifications in 6 3 2 1 However depending on the receiver s implementation it is possible to adopt another func
127. a partial TS Descriptions of all descriptors are provided in 5 2 Types of descriptors and their identifiers in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document Descriptors that are excluded from Table 6 4 cannot be used in a partial TS 2 35 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 4 Descriptors that can be used in a partial TS Descriptor name Function descriptions Stuffing Descriptor See Section 4 of Part 1 of this document Service Descriptor Same as above Short Event Descriptor Same as above Extended Event Descriptor Same as above Component Descriptor Same as above Stream Identifier Descriptor Same as above Content Descriptor Same as above Parental Rate Descriptor Same as above Hierarchical Transmission Descriptor Same as above Digital Copy Control Descriptor Same as above Hyper Link Descriptor Same as above Audio Component Descriptor Same as above Target Area Descriptor Same as above Emergency Information Descriptor Same as above Data Component Descriptor Same as above Data Contents Descriptor Same as above Video Decode Control Descriptor Same as above Event Group Descriptor Same as above Broadcaster Name Descriptor Same as above Component Group Descriptor Same as above Series Descriptor Same as above Content Availability Descriptor Same as above Partial Tr
128. a selection is made for a television program or data enriched television program for which a linked pre stored data program linked to it is stored e When the television program event changes to a new one while continuously viewing the same channel and when a linked pre stored data program for that new television program event is stored Note that during presentation of data content in a linked pre stored data program if the television program event changes to a television program event that no linked pre stored data program is linked to or stored for the presentation shall continue In this case because data content can be terminated only by channel selection it is preferable that the data content in a linked pre stored data program has the function to reselect a channel by using the channel selection process directed at the local service epgTune 9 2 13 2 Receiver s action related to linked pre stored data programs when a data broadcasting program starts This section presents guidelines on reception operation at the start of a data broadcasting program including a stored linked pre stored data program Receiver s basic actions guidelines at channel selection The following shall be added to the receiver s basic actions guidelines at channel selection specified in 9 2 13 1 When a television program or data enriched television program is selected the existence of data broadcasting programs stored is checked If a linked pre stored data
129. a_group_version Not used data_group_link_number 0x00 last_data_group_link_number 0x00 data_group_size As per the specifications However 1 PES packet shall not exceed 32KB in size data_group_data_byte Stores data group data caption management data and caption text data CRC_16 Performs error detection through CRC16 When an error is detected the receiver discards the relevant data group 3 77 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 2 5 Using caption management data It is possible to put multiple data units of the same or different data unit parameters into the same caption management data When multiple data units exist in the same caption management data they shall be processed in order of appearance Note that data allowed to be written into text shall be limited to the control codes SWF SDF SDP SSM SHS and SVS not the character code set requiring screen display 7 2 5 1 Caption management data used for subtitles Caption management data shall be transmitted at least once every three minutes If caption management data has not been received for three minutes or more the receiver shall perform the initialization that executes at the time of channel selection Table 7 4 shows parameters that can be specified to caption management data used for subtitles Table 7 4 Caption management data parameters for subtitles Field TMD 00 free num_languages 1 2 language_tag 0 1
130. able to all receivers sold as new models from one year after that revision It shall use the following Array Array 2 Settings for the number of a caller ID notification Array 3 Settings for the preferred fixed connection release number Array 4 Settings for the telecommunication carrier identification number A return value shall be limited to a number or empty string only 3 114 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e From the viewpoint of protection of private information a return value shall not be transmitted as information Notes on compatibility e For the use of this function it is assumed that the following three revisions which have been defined after the version 2 2 of this document shall be all reflected in target receivers 1 getPrefixNumber implemented 2 The number addition function in Section 6 6 4 2 implemented as A Specification 3 Process for network setting identification bProvider argument in connect implemented in accordance with Section 6 6 3 1 Telephone number transmission conditions e This function shall be applicable to receivers sold after publication of the version 2 2 revision of this document and shall be applicable to all receivers sold as new models from one year after that revision However considering receivers sold before the above it is mandatory to check whether or not receivers support this function by using getBrowserSupport prior to use If the above cannot be confi
131. according to the specifications for the display format and font size Horizontal and vertical writing Standard Double byte code Double height row No cell No Double width M Double height width Characters etc Greek characters 6 Bordering 8 16 84 Supplemental symbols 93 1 45 48 91 Standard size pixel pattern Medium size pixel pattern Small size pixel pattern a i f 3 5 lt a O is O nro ea Oe i 07 O O O O O O O O O O0 Symbols are added in sing byte code sets 2 Row 2 cell 94 excluded 3 Shall be standard only 4 Shall not be used in vertical writing 3 83 Being es Of o mea EA Eon EA E feed oA a O O O O p Special codes space delete oO o o ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 1 When vertical writing is selected for the display format the receiver shall display the following using font shapes different from those in horizontal writing Row 1 cells 2 3 17 18 28 30 33 37 42 59 and 65 Row 4 cells 1 3 5 7 9 35 67 69 71 and 78 Row 5 cells 1 3 5 7 9 35 67 69 71 78 85 and 86 Row 92 cells 48 49 50 and 51 Note that in Katakana and Hiragana sets it is necessary to respond to the following codes Katakana 2 1 2 3 2 5 2 7 2 9 4 3 6 3 6 5 6 7 6 14 7 5 7 6 and 7 9 7 13 Hiragana 2 1 2 3 2 5 2 7 2 9 4 3 6 3 6 5 6 7 6 14 and 7 9 7 13
132. acters and the format is shown below The number of horizontal pixels x The number of vertical pixels Example 1920x1080 upnp rating string This property represents the parental rating As a general rule a converted form of the rating field of the Parental Rate Descriptor should be assigned to this property The rating must be converted to a hexadecimal number 0xXX For example if the value of rating is 10 0X10 should be inserted This property only shows how high the parental rate is and is not necessarily used for other purposes upnp icon URI This property represents the URL to the logo of the service member channel upnp icon arib resolution pattern string This property represents the size of the logo of the service member channel The format for this property must be the same for the res resolution property The number of horizontal dots x The number of vertical dots Example 64x36 arib videoComponentType unsigned integer This property represents the type of the video component As a general rule a converted form of the component_type value of the Component Descriptor contained in the EIT should be assigned to this property The component_type must be converted to a decimal number If one service_id contains multiple video ESs multiple instances of this property can be set for the accumulated contents The property instance that corresponds to the defa
133. aeeeneneneseecnneseeeeasanencneaeaseeeneneesesenents 3 144 10 5 7 1 Identification of the area shared among terrestrial digital television broadcasters 3 144 10 5 7 2 Identification of the area reserved for affiliates of terrestrial digital television proadcastefSreresiannt n eta tte Ae cate A cok Aenea Side Coa id add aye aad nach Aa ae 3 144 10 5 7 3 Identification of the area reserved for BS digital broadcasters commonly used in both broadcasting and COMMUNICATION 0 eeceeesceeseceeseeeeeeeeeeceseeesceceeaeeeseeeneeensaees 3 144 3 ix ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 10 5 7 4 Identification of the registered outgoing call storage area oo ee eeceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 3 144 10 5 7 5 Identification at automatic channel selection by epgTune or epg TuneToComponent cccecccessscesssceeseeeeseecssceceseecesseeeeseeeseeceseeesaeeneeeeeeeeeeteeenseees 3 144 10 5 7 6 Broadcasting stream and mono media referenced from communication content 3 144 10 5 8 Selecting services of other media AAE EEEE AELE STET TEAT ETETE EA E TEER 3 144 10 5 9 Programmed recording and viewing reservation for other media vevvevevevenenenenss 3 145 10 6 Operation of new functionality for captioning sseseeseeessesseosseesseesetesreesrtesstesresseesseesseesseessees 3 145 10 6 1 Captioning rollup mode tetttttetttrtttrtterttttetttt rttr ertett rttr tertre rtter tetr tenr eer tert ertme tnt 3 145 1 0 6 2 Out screen display fun
134. al remarks Black foreground Specifies 0 to the color map lower address for the foreground Specifies 1 to the color map lower address for the foreground and color map lower address setting Red foreground and color map lower address setting Green foreground and color map lower address setting Yellow foreground and color map lower address setting Specifies 2 to the color map lower address for the foreground Specifies 3 to the color map lower address for the foreground Blue foreground and Specifies 4 to the color map lower address for color map lower O the foreground address setting Magenta foreground Specifies 5 to the color map lower address for the foreground Specifies 6 to the color map lower address for the foreground and color map lower address setting Specifies 7 to the color map lower address for the foreground G M Cyan foreground and C color map lower address setting White foreground C M Only 128 common fixed colors across receivers can be used To specify a common fixed color across receivers using COL specify a CLUT s index value refer to Appendix 1 using a palette number for the upper 4 bits and using CMLA for the lower 4 bits respectively Example1 When palette number 0 and CMLA 0 CLUT s index value 0 Example2 When palette number 4 and CMLA 5 which means 0x45 a CLUT s index value 69 Color setting Pattern polarity Only POL 04 0 normal polarity and POL 04 1
135. alue shall be horizontal writing and the resolution shall be the same as the resolution of the BML document Initialization related to code instructions and code calls and initialization related to action and status instructions shall be performed as specified in ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 3 Chapter 8 Initialization Note that the initial values for font size character spacing and line spacing shall be set in accordance with Table 7 15 The initial values for character font front color halftone and back color halftone shall be set as Maru Gothic index value 15 and index value 30 respectively The initial value for raster color shall be set as transparent index value 8 6 4 2 International encoding character code Not used 6 5 Descriptor command picture encoding 6 5 1 Geometric Not used 3 73 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 Operating Subtitles and Superimposed Text Encoding 7 1 Scope and definition of services BS digital broadcasting provides the following two services related to subtitles and superimposed text Subtitles Caption service synchronized with the main video audio and data service e g translation subtitles Superimposed text Caption service not synchronized with the main video audio and data service e g news 7 2 flash program schedule notice time signal etc Scheduling and transmission operations 7 2 1 Constraints on scheduling and transmission 1 2 3 4 5
136. an be accessed via direct tag specification e The following operational restrictions apply in relation to the above l Default specification only at activation of startup documents for data enriched television programs and independent data programs featuring television audio and video This is to prevent the datacasting engine from switching audio video that is already being played by the EPG or equivalent at the commencement of presentation of the startup document Viewing television audio and video from datacasting content in a multi view program is by default specification only since television audio video contains multiple components Both default specification and direct tag specification can be used to return to television audio and video when playing an audio video selected via direct tag specification For dual mono television audio only default specification may be used The selection status of the dual mono television audio in this case is receiver dependent Where necessary the channel ID is also specified 3 29 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Related receiver operations are described below 1 The receiver uses EPG or equivalent to play audio and video at station selection from independent data programs containing television audio and video in the same way as data enriched television programs 2 Where only one television audio selection is available the receiver will not perform audio switching when the audi
137. annel selection One of the methods by which a user can select a channel A user presses the up and down cursor buttons to increase or decrease the service_id to select a channel One touch channel selection One of the methods by which a user can select a channel One touch buttons are preprogrammed to correspond to particular broadcasting companies or services and pressing a particular button directly switches the channel to the corresponding service Subtitles One of the services that superimpose texts on the video of a TV broadcast The superimposed texts are highly relevant to the video of the TV broadcast Captions A subtitle service that does not synchronize with the main video audio or data This service is used for special reports editorial notes of a program and time signals 2 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Hierarchical modulation A type of modulation that combines a large scale modulation such as TC8PSK and a small scale modulation that can be received on low C N such as QPSK or BPSK Emergency Warning System EWS A report on natural disasters A receiver must monitor the start signal of EWS and display the report once it is broadcasted Temporary service A service that is designed to temporarily broadcast the program contents on the different channel from the normal member channel The normal service is temporarily stopped and then this service is used Mul
138. ansport Stream Descriptor This descriptor provides information on the partial TS Network Identification Descriptor This descriptor provides information on network identification Partial TS Time Descriptor This descriptor provides information on the partial TS time Broadcast ID Descriptor This descriptor provides information on broadcast IDs that are necessary for data replays Tag values descriptor_tag that need to be assigned to all descriptors except for Broadcast ID Descriptor should follow the specifications described in 5 2 Types of descriptors and their identifiers in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document and 9 1 7 2 in ARIB STD B21 The tag value 0x85 should be assigned to Broadcast ID Descriptor 6 1 2 Table common items 6 1 2 1 version_number 1 Assignment of version_number version_number should be independently assigned to each table The PMT of a broadcasted program can be output with the same version number as the PMT of a 2 36 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 partial TS only if assignment of the PMT to the partial TS does not pose any problems If a receiver rearranges the structure of the PAT DIT SIT or PMT the receiver can assign any value to the version_number of each table 2 When to change a partial TS If a receiver directly outputs the PMT of a broadcasted program as the PMT of a partial TS the partial TS should only be changed when it is broadc
139. aracter font A ess T A ov d w S oie sine Seleiaieie E cle oe Sele oe Seb A LELETET 3 82 7 4 3 Font size iadaa aaea aea eaaa aA Eana Seis sig Selene Sete AAEE eaa aa Set we sec 3 83 7 4 4 Display block A E TATA ATELE IT TEET TAE E ETA T EI AE E E T ETA TST 3 84 7 4 5 Non spacing characters teeeeteteeteetterrterttertt ertt etttrttertterterttereer ertett trrt nte rrte rten tree tte teenet 3 95 7 5 Control codes used in subtitles and superimposed text sssesssesseseeesseeseesseessresssessesseesseessesseese 3 96 7 5 1 Control codes E OA TATELA TTET E A E TT E A A T E L TL ST 3 96 3 y ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 5 2 Using flashing eetet tt ees eseseeeeseeseeseeseeseeseeseeseeseeseesessecsarseesersessersersarsias 3 101 T3231 TAMA LAUlONS zed Soest sacs Sass does nesses arid oe aso ea oe aaa tee etl ote ee T 3 101 Aig Raster Gl Ou OREO na hipaa ale a EGS AN Manat E E 3 101 7 5 4 Using boxing sr essiessesiscisses sees eeeeeeeseessecsssecssseeseeesecsnsessiesssecssseessseeneesisecsinsnsnaestaas 3 101 7 5 5 Using underlining eetere trt treere ettt eitt trserststeteett ette tersste neet eert tere rerenne net 3 102 7 5 6 Using boundary highlighting eee eee eerteeereererttteeereeereetettt ttt reerrseneeeeettrternreseneeneeet 3 102 7 5 7 Using scrolling eee eeeeeetettrtttteererterttttttrstesttettt ritt teseteesntteett ette tersennenteteett tern eesenennet 3 102 7 5 7 1 Contool eres cere ee a ere eE Tec Tercrec Terre Terrace Ter cree Sercrec Ter cr
140. art 1 of this document 1 2 3 4 4 7 3 A receiver must monitor the emergency warning descriptor in the descriptor region 1 of the current channel s PMT after the start control bit of TMCC has been changed from 0 to 1 A receiver must select and display the channel represented by service_id if start_end_flag of the emergency warning descriptor is 1 and area_code is the same as the area code that is set in the receiver unit A receiver must continue monitoring the PMT as long as the start control bit of TMCC stays 1 Once the emergency warning descriptor is deleted from the current channel s PMT the reception processing of Emergency Warning System signals must be terminated Then the receiver must recover the settings before the reception of EWS signals The receiver must not memorize the channel used for EWS reception If a user switches a channel during reception of Emergency Warning System signals the reception processing of Emergency Warning System EWS signals should be terminated However if the start control bit of TMCC has been changed from 0 to 1 again the receiver must start the reception processing of Emergency Warning System EWS signals e Areceiver must not start the reception processing if start_end_flag of the emergency warning descriptor turns to 0 because 0 represents test signal transmission e Ifa receiver does not support reception of TMCC during power off or standby the recei
141. as bml_major_version 1 bml_minor_version 0 receivable in the basic receiver unit configuration independent_flag As per the specifications Value is 1 if the content transmitted in the event can be viewed independently or 0 otherwise A basic receiver unit without storage function does not need to reference this flag style _for_tv_flag As per the specifications When this flag is 0 style is not formatted for television content cannot be laid out on television receiver the basic receiver unit will conclude that it cannot be displayed bml_major_version bml_minor_version As per the specifications Where these fields are provided and bml_major_version 1 the basic receiver unit will deduce that it can be viewed ondemand_retrieval_fla g As per the specifications Flag value is 1 when the content transmitted with the component can be viewed in real time or 0 otherwise Always for data enriched television program entry component In a basic receiver unit with no storage function a flag value of 1 means viewable and any other value means it is not viewable file storable flag Indicates whether the content is storable 0 Not storable content 1 Storable content A flag value of 0 indicates that the content is not storable Such as local content that can change during an event or content that the commissioning broadcaster does not want stored A basic receiver unit without storage function does not nee
142. asted However if the receiver rearranges the structure of a table the partial TS should be changed when the table information is changed For information on how to perform a stream change that involves insertion of a DIT see the document section on a DIT If the stream change does not involve insertion of a DIT a delay that is associated with a stream change should be minimized 3 Version change A receiver should manage the version number and can assign any value to the version number When a table is either updated or changed the version_number should be incremented by 1 The version number should be correctly managed even when the PMT ofa broadcasted program has not been normally updated The version_number should also be incremented by 1 when a change to a table involves insertion of a DIT 6 1 2 2 current_next_indicator The value 1 should be assigned to the current_next_indicator of all tables and then the tables should be output If the value 0 is assigned to the current_next_indicator the corresponding table should not be output When a receiver rearranges the structure of a table the value 1 must be assigned to the current_next_indicator 6 1 2 3 running status The running status of all SITs should be undefined assigned with the value 0x0 and then the SITs should be output 6 1 2 4 reserved ISO_reserved and reserved_future_use items The value 1 should be assigned to all the bits of
143. ation ATETA cca sees cles ss acewee desis dees cs T AT seems tsiee 1 e 1 0 5 2 6 1 Recerver softwaresupdates 220 scenic nian eel nen el Aco hare 1 10 5 2 6 2 Data common to all receivers erinan ion an a E E E A NR 1 10 5 2 7 DDB DownloadDataBlock s sststerestieeeteerieieieiieieeseeneneenenneneeeeeasanencneneneesenseneeennentiey 1 11 5 2 7 1 Receiver software update ceccceccceessceessecsssecsseecesseceeseeesseeeeseecsseeeseaeeeeseeeseeeseeeneaeenes 1 11 5 2 7 2 Data common to all receivers sussie nna a aA a riait 1 11 5 3 Transmission timing of notification information and download content ccccecssseeetseeeteeeeees 1 13 5 3 g 1 Receiver software update E ENE EA ESTAT TTE OTT EO SE T I E E A O TT 1 a 1 3 5 3 2 Data common to all receivers PAANO A REEE A TETEE TT E T TA STOTT ETE TEE E Js 1 4 i ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 4 Emergency halt in receiver update service ccccecscceessceesseeeseeceeeeeeeseeceseeesceeseseeesseseseeenseeeneneenes 1 14 5 5 Suspension of receiver update service ceecccsescceessceeseeeeseeeescecsscecesseceeseeesseeeseecseneeeeseeeeeeenseeenses 1 14 5 6 Summertime daylight saving time ccccccescceessceeneeeeseeesseecesseceeeeeeeeeeseeeseecsereeseeeeeteeenteeenses 1 14 5 7 Security aiene ec irat etc A cht TORVE EE E E Cevdvavestdeyel E E E 1 14 5 7 1 Receiver software update SOOO E OE E N E COOL COOL ECOL OCD DOOR Cnr 1 oi 14 5 7 2 Data common to all receivers BCC TOOCOOC
144. ation to a viewer and event switching As atule broadcasting companies notify a viewer of an event relay by providing captions or announcement However a receiver can also notify a viewer of an event relay once it detects an event in EIT p f of the event relay destination Manufacturers can decide whether to implement and how to implement notification of an event relay to a viewer in a receiver If a manufacturer decides to implement notifications the notification must at least provide information that the current event will be continued in another service and information regarding the time of transition After the notification the user should be able to change the channel to move to the relay destination service where a program event will continue Recording support If a user has set reserved recording for an event for which an event relay is scheduled and the recording has already started the receiver should automatically switch to the relay destination event as soon as the currently recorded event ends in order to continue the recording of the remaining portion of the event The continued recording should be started after the receiver confirmed that the relay destination event is assigned to EIT p f If the relay destination has not been assigned to EIT p f until the current event ends an event relay is not scheduled therefore the continued recording should be eliminated If the relay destination service is a temporary service the end of an
145. ation to provide local services that are relevant to the viewer s location for example weather reports and election results in the data broadcasting service For more information on actual values assigned to ward codes see ARIB STD B10 Appendix G 2 22 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 2 Area code An area code supports the emergency information signals whose implementation is specified in Ordinance for Regulating Radio Equipment Article 9 3 5 Ordinance for Regulating the Operations of Radio Station Article 138 and Ministerial Ordinance of MPT No 405 of 1985 This information is used for the emergency warning system EWS For more information on actual values signed to area codes see ARIB STD B10 Appendix D A receiver should be equipped with a function that automatically set an appropriate area code once the viewer sets the ward code which is described in 1 3 Postal code 7 digits A receiver uses this information to provide local services that are relevant to the viewer s location for example weather reports and election results in the data broadcasting service This information is also used to identify the access point nearest to the viewer s location in the interactive data service 4 13 7 Download permission setting This setting enables a user to specify whether to permit software updates through data downloading For more information on the downloading function see Section 1 of Part 1 of this document Manufactur
146. be set to Update If the date set to Update passed the date of access right information update held in the receiver the access right information shall be judged as updated However if a not yet passed date is set to Update the date set shall be judged as an invalid one and the access right information set in X_BPA_setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider shall be regarded as invalid X_ BPA setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider shall be executable only when a valid date is set to Update in it Valid date that can be set to Update A date that passed the date of access right information update held by the receiver And a date that has not passed the date X_BPA_setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider was executed Example 3 109 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Valid date a lt x lt b e Invalid x Date to date x lt a x gt b be set to Update a Date of update held by the receiver b Date X_BPA_setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider was executed lt Invalid date Cannot be set to Update Valid date Can be set to Update Time Cannot be set to Update Actions of broadcasting use extended functions for the BS broadcaster specific area The broadcasting use extended functions writePersitentArray readPersitentArray X_BPA_writePersitentArrayForAnotherProviderWithAccessCheck X_BPA_readPersitentArrayForAnotherP roviderWithAccessCheck can op
147. both 10801 and normal stereo audio may be recorded in the HS mode and a program that uses both 480i and normal stereo audio may be recorded in the STD mode Automatic change in the recording mode enables a user to efficiently use the D VHS so that the recording time is maximized HS mode 28 2Mbps STD mode 14 1Mbps LS2 mode 7 0Mbps LS3 mode 4 7Mbps 2 61 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 LS5 mode 2 8Mbps LS7 mode 2 0Mbps The above bit rates indicate the total bit rates that can be recorded to a recording tape When an MPEG2 transport stream is to be recorded to a D VHS a header will be added Therefore the actual recordable bit rate for an MPEG2 transport stream is approximately 70 to 80 of the above value for each mode For example in the STD mode the actual recordable bit rate for an MPEG2 transport stream is approximately 12 Mbps 7 2 Copy Generation Management System Analog CGMS A When a digital satellite broadcasting receiver transmits analog signals the signals must be protected from copying with CGMS A CGMS A for 4801 525i is defined in JEITA EIAJ CPR 1204 and copyright related information is specified in IEC 61880 CGMS A for 480p 525p is defined in JEITA EIAJ CPR 1204 1 and copyright related information is specified in IEC61880 CGMS A for 720p 750p and 1080i 11251 is defined in JEITA EIAJ CPR 1204 2 and copyright related information is specified in IEC61880 7 2 1 Definition of CGMS A The def
148. broadcaster common area from MM services readPersistentArray writePersistentArray shall execute by interpreting one fixed length block as one file Reading writing information from to the broadcaster common area from MM services shall execute in units of fixed length blocks The URI shown below is used for identification of fixed length blocks nvram common lt block number gt lt block number gt 0 15 Regarding the use of the broadcaster common area for both way communication refer to Section 6 3 107 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 2 2 Identifying the broadcaster specific area As with the broadcaster common area operation for the broadcaster specific area shall be performed in units of fixed length blocks To read write information from to the broadcaster specific area from MM services the URI shown below is used for identification of blocks nvram lt block number gt Broadcaster ID of a broadcaster to provide MM services broadcaster_id If a procedure function for the broadcaster specific area readPersistentArray or writePersistentArray executes by specifying names in a way different from the above NVRAM reading writing shall not execute but readPersistentArray shall respond with null failure as a return value and writePersistentArray shall respond with NaN failure as a return value The above means that it is not possible to reference another broadcaster s part of the broadcaster specific area
149. cReserve epgRecCancelReservation For services other than data broadcasting services based on storage functionality all descriptions in BML documentation shall use abbreviations refer to ARIB STD B24 Section 2 9 2 with the exception of reference to other services mentioned above and arguments directed to broadcasting use functions whose arguments specify events Except for arguments directed to broadcasting use functions whose arguments specify events event_id is always omitted Module update monitoring ModuleUpdated locking of modules on memory lockModuleOnMemory cache setCachePriority and referencing of resources such as mono media from BML documentation shall target only modules to be transported by the same components as the currently presented document contains A value that can be specified to the href attribute of the anchor element in launchDocument shall be only a BML document to be transmitted via a component contained in the same service as the currently presented document provides However for pre stored supported receivers refer to 9 2 11 1 The number of resources that content can obtain and retain in the content memory on the receiver simultaneously shall be limited to 384 To realize the above limitations it is preferable to restrict the total number of resources which have unique name spaces each within a single data event period to 384 or less However if it is ensured at the time of content creation that the abo
150. cScreen Print related function API memory card related saveImageToMemoryCard saveHttpServerlmageToMemoryCard saveStaticScreenToMemoryCard Directory operation functions _ saveDir saveDirAs createDir a getParentDirName getDirNames S o e T O isDirExistinsO S o e S File operation functions SSS S S S O tsaveFile S o e T O saveFileAs o d o y y o getFileNames isFileExisting File input output functions writeArray readArray Inquiry functions getDirInfo getFileInfo getCarouselInfo getModuleInfo getContentSource getStorageInfo Data carousel storage functions saveCarouselAs saveCarousel saveModuleAs saveModule saveResourceAs saveResource ark control function 3 readBookmarkArray OO TO lockBookmarkO OB TO unlockBookmarkO OB TO getBookmarkInfo OB TO getBookmarkInfoo OH FO __ startResidentBookmarkList OY doen ___ Note 1 It is preferable to implement this function to receivers with the series reservation function 3 142 Book 3 O O O O O O Ojojoo ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Note 2 Shall be treated as optional in BML3 0 considering receivers without modems in the future Note 3 Shall not be used as in terrestrial broadcasting because there is no track record in BS broadcasting Note 4 Differences in interpretation with respect
151. calculated via the following algorithm based on this information and the STC value obtained at that point in time STCc 3 52 Algorithm used to calculate the NPT value ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 if STCc gt STCr then if Scale 1 1 then else Scale 0 1 end if else STCe lt STCr if Scale 1 1 then else Scale 0 1 NPTc NPTr STCc STCr NPTce NPTr NPTc NPTr end if end if NPTc NPTr STCr STCc Corresponds to section B in Figure 5 7 Corresponds to sections A and E in Figure 5 7 Corresponds to section C in Figure 5 7 Corresponds to section D in Figure 5 7 e If NPT related processing occurs in the period after the document is presented but before the first NPT reference message can be obtained i e before the first NPTReferred interrupt event the receiver operation shall be as follows When a general purpose event message specifying ignition at the NPT time is received The message is ignored and monitoring of general purpose event messages continues NPT time specified interrupt event setting bevent Interrupt event setting is not performed GetNPT Returns error value e The subscribe validity period in an NPT reference message is the period stated in the document that specifies the subscribe 5 3 4 6 Usage of DSMCC_section Table 5 11 Usage of DSMCC_section that sends event messages Fiel
152. caling only when pictures with a resolution of 960x540 are transported and then presented as 1920x1080 pictures on the receiver side by doubling horizontal and vertical pixels 6 2 2 3 Other limitations The screen size to be presented shall be the still picture plane s full screen size or smaller Progressive mode shall not be used 6 2 2 4 Markers and marker segments to be used Table 6 4 shows markers and marker segments to be used for JPEG Table 6 4 Markers marker segments to be used for JPEG Marker Remarks Processing by the receiver SOIL ssa Start of image od Normal processing DQT oe all Define quantization table 2 Normal processing DRI S550 cil Define restart interval Normal processing Note 1 SOFn Start of frame Normal processing Patten tele Only SOFO FFC0 tobe decoded J DHT e228 Define Huffman table Normal processing 2 SOS ae Start of scanning l Normal processing RSTm End of restart interval Normal processing Note 1 EOI go End of image aaa Normal processing 2 COM Comments a Normal processing 222 APPn Marker for application use Tpnored szos Aa oaa DNL Special size specified Ignored Note 1 How to handle DRI and RSTm errors shall depend on the receiver 3 61 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Because only the markers from SOI to DNL mentioned above appear in the baseline method other markers shall be treated as errors 6 2 3 PNG Shall be compliant with the specifica
153. can be omitted from the third field However if the DTCP IP protection is necessary for the entire content or a part of the content these two entries must be inserted The MIME type of the content that is transmitted as the payload of a PCP should be assigned to the CONTENTFORMAT section of the third field If a TS formatted stream with a time stamp needs to be transmitted video vnd dIna mpeg tts should be assigned to the CONTENTFORMAT section The above type of stream is defined in 8 1 4 Transmission of MPEG video audio in a time stamped TS format in Vol 2 of ARIB STD B24 If protocolInfo is used for the Out parameter of CMS GetprotocolInfo the third field does not need to include DTCP1HOST host and DTCP1PORT port because the address and port of the host that performs AKE may differ among different contents If protocolInfo is used as an attribute of the res res protocolInfo the double quotation marks enclosing video vnd dIna mpeg tts overlap with the ones enclosing the entire protocolInfo This leads to an error in XML Therefore the double quotation marks enclosing the entire protocolInfo should be replaced with single quotation marks or the ones enclosing video vnd dIna mpeg tts should be replaced with amp quot Therefore res protocolInfo should be described as follows protocolInfo http get application x dtcp1 DTCP1HOST host DTCP 1PORT port CONTENTF ORMAT video vnd dina mpeg tts ARIB OR
154. can take any number A change to a stream may involve addition of a DIT If the services before and after the DIT are continuous the event _version_number should also be continuous when it is incremented event_start_time If the descriptor is inserted to the 2nd loop of an SIT this field indicates the start time of the relevant event The start_time of the EIT should be assigned to this field If this field needs to be invalid the value OxXFFFFFFFFFF should be assigned duration If the descriptor is inserted to the 2nd loop of an SIT this field indicates the duration of the relevant event The duration of the EIT should be assigned to this field If this field needs to be invalid the value 0xFFFFFF should be assigned offset If daylight saving time summer time needs to be applied to event_start_time the offset time should be assigned to this field The value for this field should be obtained from the local_time_offset of the local time offset descriptor in the TOT If daylight saving time summer time does not need to be applied the value 0x000000 should be assigned to this field For more information on daylight saving time see Section 4 of Part 1 of this document offset_flag One of the following values should be assigned to this field to indicate whether the offset time should be added to or subtracted from the event_start_time and JST time 0 Offset time should be added to the eve
155. casting companies to a program list This does not apply for some programs such as data services that are unsupported by the receiver A receiver must display short programs on a program list so that a user can notice the existence of these programs A receiver must display long programs or programs that run beyond 24 hours on a program list A user should be able to notice the existence of these programs regardless of which time period the user has chosen from the EPG If a user chooses to display a program list in the newspaper format the receiver should use a format similar to the newspaper format 10 full width characters per line The length of a program name program title sub title of a long program should be within 40 characters If the space is limited program name display within 20 characters is also acceptable Names of programs that do not extend beyond 30 minutes should be displayed within 20 characters A receiver should indicate whether a program will charge any fees on the program list A receiver should display the attributes of a program These attributes are contained within SI and include information regarding the video mode audio mode availability of attached data subtitle fee requirement digital copy permission and parental control A receiver should display the latest and accurate information about programs on the program list as soon as possible when program information has been updated Loop scroll sho
156. cc3 icici ei tA Ree AA A 3 62 6 2 3 2 Chunks to be tised for PNG ciin fascial acd lasek Sas ies ee a ee AION Ma eect 3 62 6 2 3 3 Other limitations iss scksses sos cecuesebeved E EEE ces evehdons veh teuetevion sued Deusteriented 3 62 ESA gt RANG ace itch erated cit ale Rad crak e a chiar ctre Ee 3 62 6 2 4 1 Chunks to be used for MNG sessies sirenen teerder sedep eienen dota Perdor uin 3 62 6 2 4 2 Constraints on MING Usa peissos ne a oa ee eee 3 63 6 3 Au digencodihg n peee e e step sees eed ies A ees Re edie E EA KE EER en 3 64 Cat MPEGI AANG En a E a Bn eR E E PN ee 3 64 6 3 1 1 Encoding parameterS ccccccsscccssscsssecsseessneeesscecssceceeeeesseecsseecsceeseeeeseecseeesseeeseaeeeaes 3 64 6 3 1 2 Transporting MPEG 2 AAC esssesessesserssessessessrssessessessessessessessrssesseseessessesersseserssesseneesees 3 64 6 3 1 3 Limitations in data carousel distribution 0 0 eee eeeeeeseereceeceeceseseseeseseceseesesseeneeeaeess 3 64 6 3 1 4 ACC audio filedata format nin sea aa ecese has ddtean a aeiaai 3 64 he NE Ah OE S Cre ne ee nme eB Pe OE OR RIES POE er ey PE oP eee ae 3 64 6 3 2 1 Encoding parameters c scccc ccscesincesdscsscccdasstvesd sess tian iior Tai ris aiara TE a ESES a aS iaie 3 64 6 3 2 2 Maximum data S1Z 3 2c sceccsccudscateccdecesccsdecutcesdusessevicualecadesspscvsduudeestessoecusesebenslesenscdevasbeetes 3 65 6 3 2 3 Other limitations innin e EEE a T NE E EVENES E EE 3 65 633 MPEG iid eevee ee ees 3 65 63A MAIOnAl
157. ce which is described in the above specification document Descrambler A receiver must be equipped with a descrambler described in the above specification document e Other CAS related controls The above specification document describes more details The following two control functions must be equipped to a receiver in addition to controls functions for CAS related user interfaces ECM EMM reception function 5 10 Copy control 5 10 1 Analog video output e Specific copy control functions must be implemented to a receiver for each analog video output format as shown in the following table 2 28 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e A receiver must obtain the control information from service_type Identification information for service format in the service list descriptor copy_control_type Format information for copy control digital recording control_data Control information for digital copying and APS_control_data Control information for analog output copying in the digital copy control descriptor See Digital copy control descriptor in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document Specifically a receiver must obtain information on false synchronization pulses and color strips that are introduced by Macrovision from APS _control_data Control information for analog output copying It must obtain information on CGMS A which is sent as a video ID signal from digital recording control_data Control information for dig
158. ce descriptor but not both last_section_number in DSMCC section that transmits event messages is always 0 Thus a sub table that transmits one event message always does so in section 5 3 4 3 Transmission of general purpose event messages From the BML document it is possible to use either a general purpose event message transmitted in the same component as the local content that transmits the document or a general purpose event message transmitted in a different component Thus only one type of general purpose event message component_tag can be specified per BML document Identification from event_msg_group_id is not used event_msg_ group_id is always 0x000 private_data_byte is used To prevent reception of incorrect general purpose event messages between chronologically adjacent local content the data_event_id in the general purpose event message has the same value as the data_event_id in the relevant local content This applies also when the general purpose event message is transmitted via a different component to the corresponding one with the local content 3 49 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Each DSMCC section can have up to 8 general purpose event message descriptors If message_id is set to 255 or if message_id is omitted and the setting is for any message_id a specific message_id 0 254 cannot be designated at the same time and message_version must be either omitted or set to 255 Where message_id is shown
159. cified by broadcasting companies e The receiver should appropriately control MPEG_TS output in a digital audio service temporary audio service data service temporary data service and bookmark list service e If DTCP needs to be applied the signal must include DTCP_descriptor For details on DTCP see the DTCP specification document e The receiver should allow MPEG _TS output of a digital audio service temporary audio service data service temporary data service or bookmark list service if the value of copy_control_type is 11 because it satisfies the requirements of IEC61883 4 5 10 4 Digital video output e A receiver must be equipped with a DVI The receiver must follow the HDCP specifications to set appropriate protection technology for contents whose copy control is specified by the digital copy control descriptor or contents whose protection is specified by the content availability descriptor For information on operations regarding this issue see Section 8 of Part 1 of this document 5 10 5 Digital video and audio output e A receiver must be equipped with an HDMI The receiver must follow the HDCP specifications to set appropriate protection technology for contents whose copy control is specified by the digital copy control descriptor or contents whose protection is specified by the content availability descriptor For information on operations regarding this issue see Section 8 of Part 1 of this document 5 11 Download
160. ckets Setting parameters Refer to Table 7 1 Maximum number of ESs to be simultaneously transmitted to the same layer 1 Maximum number of languages per ES 2 PES unit data group Maximum PES size 32KB Minimum time interval of PES packet transmission 100 milliseconds Maximum ES rate 256Kbps Reception buffer 64KB or more for both one language and two languages Other than the above 16KB is required for DRCS refer to 7 6 3 75 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 7 1 PES packet setting parameters for subtitles Field Stream_id OxBD private_stream_1 PES _packet_length Byte size in the subsequent PES packets 1 data_identifier 0x80 private_stream_id OxFF PES data_packet_header_length Shows the field length of PES_data_private_data_byte Normally 0x00 shall be entered 2 PES data_private_data_byte This field can be skipped 2 Synchronized_PES_data_byte Stores the data of a caption data group 1 Usage by entering 0 into this value without specifying the PES packet length shall be prohibited 2 When using PES data private _data_byte be sure to specify the correct length of PES data private _data_byte to PES data_packet_header_length For PES packet transmission the following limitations shall be imposed e There should be proper correspondence between PES packets in order of transmission and PTS stamps in order of time e At the PTS time of a n PES packet the to
161. color halftone 1 foreground color gt background color ss Smaisize O Sha norbe specified Tor DRGS MSZ Medium size O Shall not be specified for DRCS C o ooo o Possible to use only double Specified size height double width and double BE width Conceal display control Write mode modification TME O Time control control a not use the function to MACRO Macro setting specify macros for control codes E use default macros e Repeat character Repeat character Start lining and a underlines is used STL separating mosaic For underline usage refer to 7 5 5 characters Stop lining and Only underlines is used SPL separating mosaic characters For box usage refer to 7 5 4 Box control Control sequence introducer O Usable A Usable with conditions x Not usable Pattern polarity 3 69 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 3 Extended control code set CSI gt Use in eo Control function nalimed iced Limitations and supplemental remarks Instruction possible only after initialization of the display screen and before appearance of characters with display action or appearance of control code Only 1 code parameter is used parameters that can be specified for P11 P1i SWF Switch format shall be only 7 960x540 horizontal writing and 8 960x540 vertical writing for a 960x540 text diagrams plane resolution and only 9 720x480 horizontal writing and 10 720x480 vertical writing for a 720
162. component is taken to indicate a datacasting program using XML based multimedia encoding method and the following process is performed If the receiver is not compatible with the data encoding system used the datacasting service will not commence If the value of auto_start_flag in the entry component data encoding method descriptor is 1 the following process commences immediately If the value is 0 the process commences when the viewer presses the data button The decisions involved in steps 7 through 10 below are used to determine whether to activate the datacasting engine The BML B XML version number specified in the data encoding method descriptor of the entry component is used to determine whether to display the data Content is viewable if bml_major_version bml_minor_version is omitted or if bml_major_version is 1 and not viewable otherwise If the content is deemed to be not viewable the datacasting service is not displayed Where the content is deemed to be not viewable based on the on demand viewing permission information in the data encoding method descriptor of the entry component the datacasting service is not displayed Where a receiver that is compatible with region designation in multimedia datacasting services deems 3 36 10 11 12 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 that the region designated in the region descriptor of the entry component is outside the region information for the receiver the datacasting se
163. connector should fulfill the requirements specified in 5 Physical Interconnect Specification in Digital Visual Interface DVI Revision 1 0 issued by DDWG The output signal format should fulfill the requirements specified in 2 Architectural Requirements in Digital Visual Interface DVI Revision 1 0 e For information on copyright protection technologies see 5 10 4 Digital Video Output in this section and Section 8 of Part 1 of this document 5 15 6 Digital video and audio terminal e Manufacturers can decide whether to equip an HDMI terminal to a receiver If a receiver needs to be equipped with an HDMI terminal the terminal must fulfill the requirements specified in High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification issued by HDMI Licensing LLC e For information on copyright protection technologies see 5 10 5 Digital Video and Audio Output in this section and Section 8 of Part 1 of this document 5 15 7 Modem See ARIB STD B21 Chapter 11 Specifications of bidirectional communication function A PSTN compatible modem V 22bis or more MNP4 or more is required when it is to be equipped 2 34 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 Operation Specifications for PSI SI Tables That Can Be Inserted into Partial TS Outputs 6 1 Output operation specifications 6 1 1 Definition of tables and descriptors 6 1 1 1 Types of tables and their IDs If a receiver needs to output a digital satellite broadcasting program as a partial
164. content is specified 10 5 7 4 Identification of the registered outgoing call storage area Refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 16 2 10 5 7 5 Identification at automatic channel selection by epgTune or epgTuneToComponentt arib 1 1 1 or arib de 1 1 1 shall be specified as a URI for selecting the local channel or the local component by using epgTune or epgTuneToComponent respectively For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 12 6 3 10 5 7 6 Broadcasting stream and mono media referenced from communication content To reference a stream in broadcasting content from communication content a target shall be specified by using an absolute URI that starts with arib 1 1 1 To reference mono media not a stream in broadcasting content a target shall be specified by using an absolute URI that starts with arib dc 1 1 1 For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 14 10 4 10 5 8 Selecting services of other media If the receiver supports media other than BS digital broadcasting it is possible to select services of such media by using epgTune or epgTuneToComponent For details refer to ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Appendix 1 8 5 1 Operating the action control function To specify a service in terrestrial digital television broadcasting depending on the content it is necessary to change the transition destination area by area so if a receiver has no area information settings the button to tran
165. criptor should also be used when both of the actions described above need to be performed If this 2 44 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 descriptor has been sent with the broadcasted program the descriptor needs to be output without any changes Output operation rule e Ifthe relevant ES needs to be protected from digital copying and this descriptor is originally contained in a broadcasted program the original descriptor must be inserted into the PMT as it was when its was first transmitted 6 Video Decode Control Descriptor Purpose This descriptor is used when the video decoding must be controlled at the changing point of video coding methods within the same service_id This descriptor also indicates whether the ES is a static frame image of an MPEG I Output operation rule This descriptor should be inserted to a PMT if the original broadcasted program contains this descriptor and the actions specified by this descriptor needs to be perform in the video that constitutes a partial TS Other notes Video Decode Control Descriptor contains the following sets of information that enable reception control 1 Seamless video switching when the video format is changed 2 Determination of whether the ES is a static frame image of a MPEG I If the same reception control needs to be performed during broadcast and replay both of the above sets of information should be output A receiver may use the second information set
166. ction A A A T E E A A A E 3 1 45 10 7 Print function Sena E S EE E E E R E 3 145 10 7 1 Extended API group svrrstsestsrstereeisieeseieteetenneneeecneneneneannencieneneeseientisneenenetneecent ets 3 145 10 7 2 Print data format E E ENON E EE E E E E E E T E T E ele siaislefoie esle e s els 3 146 10 7 3 Supplementary items regarding API for print related functions oveveeeevevenenenenen 3 146 10 7 4 Presentation by the receiver E E A A AE E E E E E E E sle els one e eis oe o s 3 1 46 Appendix 1 CLUT Common Fixed Colors cceccccecssscssseesseeseeceeeeesseecsscecsceeseseeseseeesseeeseeessneeseaeeesaes 3 147 Appendix 2 Module Compression Format c cccccecssscssssessceeseeeeeeeesseeceseecscecseseeesseeesseecssaeessaeeseseeeaes 3 149 Appendix 3 Notes on Access to NVRAM ou ccccccsssccesseesseceeecesseeeeseecseeceseecnsaecnscecenseeesseecesaeensaeeneaeeeaes 3 150 Appendix 4 Guidelines on Information Operation on Data Broadcasting NVRAM ccscesceesreeseeeees 3 150 Appendix 5 Use of NVRAM when the ID of the previous broadcaster is assigned ceseeseeseeeteee 3 153 3 x ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 1 Introduction BS digital broadcasting based datacasting services are provided in accordance with ministerial ordinances and notifications from the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Committees as well as standards and specifications released by the Association of Radio Industries and Businesses abbreviated hereafter
167. ction for an external recorder either This function does not include skipping and a pause performed by a user A receiver must not intentionally insert totally unrelated program contents to the program or program contents that are being output to the screen For example if a receiver displays totally unrelated program contents notifications or advertisements with the currently displayed program a viewer may become confused and think that the unrelated program contents are actually a part of the displayed program Note however that this type of function does not include multiple contents display that can be performed by a user For example two screens display and small screen display are not intended to confuse a viewer and therefore can be implemented as a part of receiver s functions 2 65 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 ANNEX 8 1 Operation specifications for an IP interface 8 1 1 Packet format ABS digital receiver shall use the PCP Protected Content Packet which is described in DTCP Volume 1 Supplement E DTCP V1SE instead of the packet format described in 9 2 2 2 Packet format in Chapter 9 of ARIB STD B21 when it performs output with partial TS One PCP should contain enough amounts of data so that if a receiver receives the program contents of one PCP the program duration is between 0 3 second and 2 seconds However this rule does not apply to the PCP that is sent right before Nc update and the PCP that is attach
168. d Usage Remarks table id As per the specifications 0x3D section_syntax_indicator As per the specifications 1 private indicator As per the specifications 0 dsmcc_section_ length As per the specifications data_event_id General purpose event messages same value as data_event_id for corresponding local content NPT reference messages OxF event_msg group_id General purpose event messages 0x0000 NPT reference messages OxXFFF version_number 1 continuity guaranteed for the same sub table identified by table_id data_event_id and event_msg group id combination current next indicator Always 1 3 53 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 3 4 7 Usage of general purpose event message descriptors Table 5 12 Usage of general purpose event message descriptors Field Usage Remarks event_msg group_id Same value as event_msg_ group_id in DSMCC _ section always 0x000 time_mode Uses the following modes 0x00 event ignited immediately upon reception 0x02 event ignited in accordance with NPT time data event msg type Always 1 event _msg id As per the specifications message_id message_version private_data_byte As per the specifications Maximum 255 bytes 5 3 4 8 Usage of NPT reference descriptors Table 5 13 Usage of NPT reference descriptors Field Usage Remarks postDiscontinuityIndicator Only 0 is used dsm_contentID
169. d independent data programs are broadcast on service_type 0xA8 dedicated channels These channels are ignored on a basic receiver unit with no storage function 5 1 2 Content structure and components usage in datacasting services 5 1 2 1 Content versus local content Table 5 2 explains the distinction between content and local content while Figure 5 1 shows the relationship between local content and events Content Table 5 2 Content versus local content Definition i Application y Collection of local content transmitted for a given component over a given event period Indicated in the data content descriptor Not designated for content Local content Collection of BML documents transmitted for a given data event of a given component May switch between successive pieces of local content within a single component in order M Where the transmission period for local content is the same as the event period ES1 in Figure 5 1 the EIT data content descriptors have 1 1 correspondence For other forms of local content EIT data content descriptors are not 1 1 Chapter 9 provides definitions of correspondence between event periods and local content 3 26 Event ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Time gt Local content 1 1 correspondence in data content descriptors Local content Local content Local content ES1 ES2 S a a a a Data event Local content Local content ES3
170. d only when the processing capability is available The details of use are defined in section 8 2 3 Shall not be defined as basic functions nor optional functions in this standard Table 10 5 Operation coverage of browser pseudo objects in terrestrial and satellite common use receivers EE aa aa Ureg related function Uregi Greg related function o Ge o O EPG related function epgGetEventStartTimeQ o O epgGetEventDuration O S O fepeTune pn epgTuneToComponent S O epgTuneToDocument S O epgIsReserved epgReserve epgCancelReservation epgRecIsReserved epgRecReserve epgRecCancelReservation rogram group index related function grpIsReserved grpReserve grpCancelReservation grpRecIsReserved grpRecReserve grpRecCancelReservation grpGetNodeEventList grpGetERTNodeName grpGetERTNodeDescription epgXTune Series reservation function seriesIsReserved seriesReserve seriesCancelReservation c oO c oO gt WwW O O oN OD Note 1 o OED OD OED gt WwW 3 139 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Function BML1 0 BML3 0 Remarks Use Use _ seriesReclsReserved OI foen _ seriesRecReserve FO Joen Moel _ seriesRecCancelReservation FOI OD Persistent memory function readPersistentString S eo e S readPersistentNumber S beo be S readPersistentArrayO OO _ writePersistentString o
171. d to reference this flag additional arib_carousel_info data_event_id Not used in PMT Value is fixed at OxF 1111 event section flag Always 1 3 31 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 1 6 PMT region descriptor usage The region descriptor is sometimes used for multimedia datacasting services and superimposed text but not in subtitles Where a multimedia datacasting service is subject to regional restrictions region descriptors are applied to all the multimedia data components of the relevant event s Region restrictions are not applied to individual multimedia data components Where a multimedia datacasting service is subject to regional restrictions the same region descriptor is applied to all components of the service Where superimposed text is subject to regional restrictions region descriptors are used in the relevant components Thus region descriptors are not used in the 1 loop Region description formats is 0x01 BS digital prefecture specification only Where region descriptors exist the receiver operation is as follows Ideally if the components of the multimedia datacasting service to be displayed region have region descriptors that do not include the receiver s region information the datacasting service for the relevant event should not commence In this case the receiver notifies the viewer of a multimedia datacasting service outside the designated region Where superimposed text compo
172. daptation fields only or empty Carrousel packets is inserted for the remaining time through to the end of the required duration 10 sec Model N 4 7 Repeated every 24 hours Up to 180 models Time High speed oe Model Moda Model transmission r i i i i la AY l 179 2 0Mbps n J receivers receivers l ea Low speed i i i transmission f f 0 5Mbps T 20 min Figure 5 2 Reference model of download content transmission schedule low transmission speed for data common to all receivers and models 2 and Z high transmission speed for all others 5 2 3 2 Data common to all receivers Data common to all receivers is sent at least once every 20 minutes as shown in Figure 5 2 The common data is treated as a Common to All Receivers model The business or group submits a request for the desired download period to the download broadcaster The download period varies in accordance with the number of units performing downloads The download broadcaster draws up a schedule in consultation with the receiver manufacturers The Carrousel cycle is three cycles After content equivalent to three cycles has been sent dummy data either null packets or adaptation fields only or empty Carrousel packets is inserted in the remaining space through to the end of the required duration 1 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 2 4 PID and tag values assigned to download content PID and
173. data programs Display Display of a television program Indicates the existence of a television program to indicating or data enriched television which a linked pre stored data program is linked presence of program for which linkage exists and the existence of a data program that is linked to associated Hyper_linkage_type 0x80 a data enriched television program datacasting Display Display when a linked pre stored Indicates in the pane for television programs or indicating data program already stored data enriched television programs that a data presence of stored data exists for a television program or data enriched television program program already stored exists Displays the relevant program s title in the pane assigned to already stored data programs Display when a linked pre stored data program is already stored Only when independent viewing for the relevant linked pre stored data program is permitted displays that program s title in the pane assigned to already stored linked pre stored data programs 9 3 Operations related to independent pre stored data program 9 3 1 Controlling the viewing of independent pre stored data program For independent pre stored data program two types of program are used programs viewable in real time and programs for which real time viewing is prohibited 9 3 2 service_type of channels that operate independent pre stored data program Independent pre stored data p
174. delines on the receiver s actions related to independent pre stored data program at channel selection 3 126 Table 9 10 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Receiver s actions related to independent pre stored data program at channel selection Selection method Selection Receiver s action operation Channel selection on Selecting an Does not launch the data broadcasting engine if the remote control independent real time viewing is specified as prohibited in the pre stored data ondemand_retrieval_flag of the PMT for an program independent pre stored data program Selection from EPG Directly selecting Launches the content selected selection from content in an stored program list independent tentative name pre stored data program 9 3 12 1 Receiver s actions related to independent pre stored data program when a data broadcasting program starts Shall be the same as specifications related to linked pre stored data programs Refer to 9 2 13 2 9 3 13 Processing for programmed storage of an independent pre stored data program 9 3 13 1 Processing for programmed storage Shall be the same as specifications related to linked pre stored data programs Refer to 9 2 14 1 9 3 13 2 How to calculate the size of content Shall be the same as specifications related to linked pre stored data programs Refer to 9 2 14 2 9 3 14 Guidelines on storage operation processing related to independent pre stored data progra
175. dent bookmark list function 5 15 4 5 9 6 2 Use after function check through the receiver application identification function Print function 5 9 6 1 5 9 6 2 Use after function check through the receiver application identification function Mail dispatch function 5 9 4 5 9 6 2 Use after function check through the receiver application identification function HTML browser call function BML1 0 Use after checking the launchExApp function through getBrowserSupport BML3 0 6 1 5 9 6 2 Use after function check through the receiver application identification function Launch of the IPTV Browser 6 3 5 9 6 2 Use after function confirmation using the identification function of the receiver application 10 5 4 Operation coverage of browser pseudo objects Table 10 5 shows coverage of browser pseudo objects in BML1 0 and 3 0 The meanings of descriptions in the Use field are as follows O Shall be defined as basic functions in this standard Usable without checking the processing capability of the relevant function on the receiver by using the getBrowserSupport function O 1 Optional functions in Terrestrial Broadcasting Operation Standard For use in content the processing capability of the relevant function on the receiver shall be examined by specifying APIGroup for functionname and a value specified in B24 Section 2 Appendix 1 for additionalinfo in the getBrowserSupport function so that the relevant function s
176. duleInfoByte in DII Notification Information used for notifications including download service ID schedule information information and receiver type Sent via SDTT Schedule information Download start time and duration stored in SDTT schedule loop Forced download Download requiring forced execution Selected optional A download that has been chosen by the viewer from a list of executable download downloads on the selection screen License information Information about whether a forced download is permitted without restrictions using the receiver s consent function 1 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 Download uses and prerequisites e Update receiver software Modifies the receiver software Includes bug fixes modifications designed to repair problems caused by differences in interpretation of operation between transmitter and receiver and general improvements to the display and to response speed and user controls Update common receiver data Updates broadcaster logo data program genre code tables program characteristics code tables and keyword lists common to all receivers 1 3 Update genre code tables and program characteristics code tables Adds information only does not modify previously defined areas Maximum length of table definitions is 20 characters this applies to updated data Program characteristics code applies to OxEO content_nibble only Text information is statement ba
177. e Line spacing value 2 line spacing ratio 2 x font size The action position reference point for the display block shall be the lower left corner of the display block in horizontal writing and the center at the top of the display block in vertical writing However in vertical writing 3 94 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 if the line direction display block size is an even number value the action position reference point in the line direction is shifted one dot in that move direction For example if the line direction block display size 68 dots the action position reference point in the line direction becomes the 35th dot The details of the action position shall be as follows 1 The action position shall not move even when the display block is resized 2 After a character is displayed the action position shall automatically advance Note that the above is not applicable to non spacing characters 3 When the display block extends beyond the edge of the display area characters shall be displayed after a new line starts In such a case the action position shall move as much as the line direction display block size in the line direction in relation to a character at the line break 7 4 5 Non spacing characters A non spacing character shall be displayed by being merged into a character the subsequent code specifies or merged into a space The following shall be characters into which a non spacing character is merged or cod
178. e such as a space that can be used between codes Blank NULL Extended control control codes for instructions and calls Special functions SP and DEL usable as end Character code set Spacing characters and external characters usable as end non spacing characters 3 95 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 5 Control codes used in subtitles and superimposed text 7 5 1 Control codes Control codes used in subtitles shall be compliant with ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 2 7 1 2 However the limitations described in Tables 7 17 7 18 and 7 19 shall be imposed on their usage Table 7 17 CO control set Control function Use Limitations and supplemental remarks NUL a 4 9 BEL Bell Sx ee a oo oO APF Action position Forward O S OE APD Actionlineforward_ O gt S O ane S aeo Action position carriage return Predetermined action position forward oo ae ee ee _ lt lt lt ESC Escape CO OP s1 Lockingshiti O S LSO Lockingshito O Z S O ss2 Singeshit2 Of sss Singeshit3s OO RS Record separator data p header identification sign Unit separator data unit Used only for identification of a data unit and US Bee aie i identification sign not used in an 8 unit code string O Usable A Usable with conditions x Not usable 3 96 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 7 18 C1 control set C1 re Control function Use Limitations and supplement
179. e 4 4 provides an overview of the constraints on mono media encoding in the planes listed above It is expected that broadcasters will not transmit mono media encoding that is not listed here or mono media that has not been encoded in accordance with the regulations Details of the encoding systems are given in Chapter 6 3 13 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 4 4 Restraints on mono media encoding for display planes Encoding method MPEG 2 Transmission Video PES 9 streaming type identifier 0x02 8 specification Image size 1920x1080 16 9 1440x1080 16 9 1280x720 16 9 720x480 16 9 544x480 16 9 480x480 16 9 352x240 16 9 720x480 4 3 544x480 4 3 480x480 4 3 352x240 4 3 10 128 32 128 11 specification 352x240 4 3 16 9 176x120 4 3 16 9 10 Scaling 256 128 192 128 160 128 128 128 96 128 80 128 64 128 48 Ea ors asec lar plane Transmission Data carousel streaming type identifier 0x0D Assumes 4 2 0 resolution 4 2 2 input must not cause failure in receiver display PNG Transmission Data carousel specification streaming type identifier 0x0D Subtitles Independent PES Peon streaming type identifier 0x06 Bulpoo o apiA ep Y 29 2 O 50 age O Data carousel specification streaming type identifier 0x0D 8 bit character Transmission Independent PES streaming type identifier 0x06 encoding specification Data carousel streaming type identif
180. e APB APR APF PAPF APU APD APS ACPS SHS and SVS Display effects FLC STL SPL and HLC Time control TIME Raster color setting RCS Note that APB APR APF PAPF APU APD APS ACPS FLC STL SPL HLC and RCS specified before scrolling instruction shall be canceled when scrolling is instructed 7 5 7 2 Scrolling speed After scrolling SCR is specified the receiver starts scrolling as soon as possible but there may be delay between when scrolling is specified and when scrolling starts We recommend a rate of 3 characters second or less for the scrolling speed The unit of the dot that moves to one time shall depend on the implementation of the receiver 7 5 8 Display function priority Regarding display functions through control codes display is performed in the following priority 1 Font size 2 Boundary highlighting 3 Underlining 4 Boxing 5 Polarity inversion 6 Color setting and flashing Note Order in the same priority shall be unfixed 7 6 Using DRCS As specified in ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 2 7 1 1 5 single byte and double byte DRCS sets shall be called DRCS patterns shall be encoded using pattern transmission only not using geometric And 0 shall be specified for fontID font identification If any value other than 0 is specified the receiver interprets it as 0 The buffer secured for DRCS in the receiver shall be 16KB for subtitle DRCS and 16KB for superimposed text DRCS It shall be made possible to si
181. e Sle ecie ies 3 73 7 Operating Subtitles and Superimposed Text Encoding ececcccesceeseecesseeeseceeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeneeeeaes 3 74 7 1 Scope and definition Of services 0 0 ecccccssccessecesteeeeeeeeeecececssnecensecessaecsseeesseeeseseeeeseeeseeessaeeeeaes 3 74 7 2 Scheduling and transmission Operations cccccesccseseceeseeeeseeesseecsseceeeeeseeeseeesseeeseseceeeeeeeeenaees 3 74 7 2 1 Constraints on scheduling and transmission ANAA TAE EKAA ATAA A AAA EEA EEA EA RA EVAAA ANAA NERIA 3 74 T22 PES transmission specification used for subtitles EAT E 3 75 7 2 3 PES transmission specification used for superimposed text oevever erenereretreetereeeen 3 76 7 2 4 Using data groupseeeeteteetttttttttttettetttetttertett rtt ett rtt erte rete rteetterttentesrenntenterttrte rsen rten tentti 3 77 7 2 5 Using caption management datasets eerste tees ert rtt rttr terete rttertettten tent tnnt entent 3 78 7 2 5 1 Caption management data used for subtitles 2 0 0 0 eccccecssccesceeeseeeeneeeeeeesseeesseeeesaeeeaes 3 78 P22 Caption management data used for superimposed text cccecsceesseceeteeeeteeeeteeeeneeeenee 3 78 7 2 6 Using caption text data css triers ieetereteeieeee tees teeeereneeeerneneenceneneeeeeisieencnsneneeeentnties 3 79 TET Using data units teeterererierereseee eee terneeeneseeesneeaeeseneneensersneneicaraneeeiensaseenientasnsenentans 3 79 7 2 8 Using PSI SI AAE E E A E T E O E N E EAE EE E E A N E E A O sie eieiejeis sie S 3 79 7 2
182. e component of a program When the event mode is changed during a program the component_type does not change immediately This must be taken into consideration when a partial TS needs to be output 2555 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 Hyper Link Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains hyperlinks to other programs in program information and other information related to the program Output operation rule e Insertion of this descriptor is optional 8 Data Contents Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains information on the data component stream that constitutes an event Output operation rule e This descriptor is transmitted for a data component of an event during broadcast optional If this descriptor is attached to a data component and the data component needs to be inserted to a partial TS the attached descriptor must be inserted to the SIT 9 Content Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains information on the genre of the event Output operation rule e Insertion of this descriptor to an SIT is optional e One content descriptor is transmitted for one broadcast program optional If this descriptor is transmitted with a program the descriptor should be directly inserted to the SIT 10 Event Group Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains information about related services grouped services during SD HD switching broadcasting and links to a relay service Output operation rule e If this descri
183. e e T writePersistentNumber S y be S writePersistentArray OO copyPersistent S eoo y T getPersistentInfoList 7 deletePersistent ee getFreeSpace o eoi y T Control of persistent memory areas with access control OOo Oooo Doo O O _ setAccessInfoOfPersistentArray o e e S checkAccessInfoOfPersistentAmay S d e S writePersistentArrayWithAccessCheckO o d be S _ readPersistentArrayWithAccessCheck S d e S __ X_BPA__setAccessInfoOMPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider OCA Oca __ X_BPA_checkAccessinfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider X_BPA_writePersistentArrayForAnotherProviderWithAccess Check X_BPA_readPersistentArrayForAnotherProviderWithAccess Check Interactive function Interactive function delayed call transmission Interactive function BASIC procedures connect Note 2 disconnect Note 2 sendBinaryData a aaa receiveBinaryData I O sendTextData Note 2 receiveTextData Note 2 Interactive function TCP IP setISPParams getISPParams connectPPPWithISPParams FO o disconnectPPP COZ FO getConnectionType CFO FO fisIPComnectedQ OD TO saveHttpServerFileAS o saveHttpServerFile oo sendHttpServerFileAs o O i saveFtpServerFileAs oo o T S saveFtpServerFieO o e S S y sendFtpServerFileAsO ooo yooo S S sendTextMaiO OY Joe sendMIMEMail OY Joem transmitTextDataOverIP CO
184. e e ss ele elee sistuleicie s ele eve eleieleis sie ele ere sie aid T T 1 6 5 1 6 1 Receiver software pdates susien i eS ele hes a ee A a 1 6 5 1 6 2 Data common to all reCe1VETS 0 0 eeeeseescessceseeeseeeseeeseeesceesceescessceescesseessceeseeceeeceeeeeeeeneeues 1 6 5 2 Transmission of download content ce ceecessessseeseeeseeeseeecesseceseeescecsceseecseeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeaes 1 7 5 2 1 Transmission route eteererrerereerereererrererrererrererrereersreerereereesereererrereerereererrereerereerersereeeeesereeeeesenenee 1 7 5 2 2 Transmission speed vee rseeetrtetereteeeeees esis eeeeeencneaeeensneeeeceneneeccenaneececeenseceesecasasencnsnees 1 7 5 2 3 Download time period and cycle vv stsrertetee erie eientneceeneneeeenneeeeenceneceneeeneeceeentaegs 1 8 5 2 3 1 Receiver software updated ccecscccessccssscesseeseeceseeeeeecsseeesseecseseceeseeeeseeeseeeseneeseneeeaes 1 8 5 2 3 2 Data common to all receivers 2 0 ee eeseescesseesseeseeesceescessceescescesscecscecseeeeeeseecseeceeeeeeeeeneeees 1 8 5 2 4 PID and tag values assigned to download content tett ttttttttttettetteettrtt ertt rrtt rrtt rrtt tettet 1 9 5 2 5 Module and Carrousel structure seeeeeseerereererereesesrereesereesereerersereerereerersereereeereereesereeeeeeereeeereesenee 1 9 5 25 1 Receiver software update xe citelcsiher tees leek teste a Sie ee alec eared 1 9 5 29 22 Data Common to all recever Sa araa Caan tad A A A N NSA 1 9 5 2 6 DII DownloadInfoIndic
185. e event of a change to any one of these The updated data must be sent rather than the changes to the original data Where the update results in deletion of the reference service ID the data must be overwritten the next time the logo ID is used Example 1 When this logo Logo ID 10 reference service ID A B C and logo data X is modified to Logo ID 10 reference service ID A and logo data X and 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Logo ID 11 reference service ID B amp C and logo data Y the download data will be Logo ID 10 reference service ID A and logo data X and Logo ID 11 reference service ID B amp C and logo data Y Example 2 When these logos Logo ID 10 reference service ID A and logo data X Logo ID 11 reference service ID B and logo data Y are modified to Logo ID 10 reference service ID A amp B and logo data X the download data will be Logo ID 10 reference service ID A amp B and logo data X 5 Download transmission guidelines 5 1 Notifications 5 1 1 Transmission route Fully TS transmission 5 1 2 SDTT Software Download Trigger Table For the time being service_id defined in SDTT and used for transmission content shall be limited to 929 The maximum length of each section in SDTT is 4 096 bytes Multi sections are permitted in sub tables in the event of a receiver software update The maximum number of sections is 180 including receiver software updates and data common to all rec
186. e operations require the following functional specifications Types of data compatible with transport decoder Replaying streamed and stored audio data Replaying streamed and stored video data Displaying video and still picture graphics and text Modem based interactive communication Maximum data size for continuous recording O 6 amp Maximum data size for system information such as fonts Memory size for data acquisition and decoding Guidelines for remote control operation TS decoder functionality is described in display functionality is described in and modem functionality is described in memory capacity is described in and and remote control functionality is described in 3 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 gt Non stored data flow TS output decoding demodulation Remote control NVRAM ROM Figure 4 1 Hardware configuration for basic receiver unit 4 1 2 Receiver reference model The receiver reference model indicates the resources within the receiver and sets out the reception limits of the basic receiver unit with respect to data broadcasts Figure 4 2 shows the receiver reference model The reference model is essentially the decoder model shown in DAVIC 1 4 Part 9 modified in accordance with the specifications in the Operational Guidelines Unless stated otherwise the definitions used here conform to DAVIC def
187. e pos last byte pos e first byte pos 1 DIGIT e last byte pos 1 DIGIT The first byte pos indicates the location of the first byte of the pre encryption content and the last byte pos indicates the location of the last byte of the pre encryption content A sample description of Range dtcp com is shown below e Range dtcp com bytes 1539686400 e Range dtcp com bytes 1539686400 1541710655 If the requested range from Range dtcp com is less than the size of a TS formatted packet with a time sample one packet 192 bytes the requested range must be expanded so that it matches the size of one 192 byte packet and a response to the request must be performed The expansion operation should be performed as follows e Ifthe start position of the requested range is different from the beginning position of a TS formatted packet with a time stamp the start position of the response range must be extended to the beginning position of the TS formatted packet with a starting position of the requested time e Ifthe end position of the requested range is different from the end position of a TS formatted packet with a time stamp the end position of the response range must be extended to the end position of the TS formatted packet with a starting position of the requested time For content other than TS format with a time stamp the response range in response to the range specifying request of Range dtcp com must be in accordance with Volume
188. e retransmitted at an interval described in Section 6 1 3 e Ifthe structure of a partial TS service remains the same since the service was originally broadcasted and also fulfills the requirements specified by the current standard the PMT of the service can be directly output If the PMT needs to be modified and then output the new PMT should replace the existing PMT If a PMT is sent as Multi Sections and the PMT is not compatible with a program that needs to be output as a partial TS the PMT must not be directly output The PMT must be first modified to be compatible with a partial TS before being output e Ifa broadcasting service is cancelled a relevant PMT may not be output If a partial TS consists of only this broadcasting service only a PAT is assigned to the partial TS The partial TS should not be output Table 6 9 describes the rules for output operation of each field Table 6 9 Output operation rules for a PMT Rules for output operation of each field table_id The value 0x02 should be assigned to this field section syntax indicator The value 1 should be assigned to this field section_length The section length of a PMT should be assigned to this field The maximum length for an entire section is 1024 bytes Therefore the maximum value for this field is 1021 program number The service_id of the relevant service should be assigned to this field The value output during broadcast should be directly
189. e same even if the scheduled time has been changed The event_id should be unique within a channel The time should be processed in minutes For example if a receiver displays the time it should be rounded to the nearest minute Some reserved programs may be cancelled the event_id may be deleted due to program schedule changes 2 20 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 11 4 Timer reservation A user may want to reserve a replacement program that will be aired if sports coverage is canceled because of rain A timer reservation function may be used to realize this reservation 4 12 Conditional access services See 4 Required specifications for a receiver in Selection 5 of Part 1 of this document The following functions are examples of conditional access services e Viewing function of a free program that requires contents protection e Reservation function of a free program that requires contents protection e Viewing function of a program that requires fees e Reservation function of a program that requires fees e Power control including EMM filtering specified by NIT e Error notification which responds to an IC card e Automatic display message e Mail e Parental lock age limit for viewing e Display of IC card information e Operations when no IC cards are inserted 4 13 User setting function A receiver must be implemented with windows in which a user can specify the following settings All of these settings must be memor
190. e same time and language identification shall be performed by caption management data in ES Bitmap data Bitmap data can be used in superimposed text Available display modes For subtitles available display modes shall be Auto display when receiving and selective display when recording playing and Selective display when receiving and selective display when recording playing only For superimposed text available display modes shall be Auto display when receiving and auto display when recording playing Auto display when receiving and selective display when 3 74 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 recording playing and Selective display when receiving and selective display when recording playing only For transmission of multiple languages the display mode for them shall be the same For transmission contrary to the above the receiver s operation shall depend on its implementation but in principle auto display mode takes precedence 9 Using warning sounds and additional sounds Regarding warning sounds for subtitles and superimposed text only the receiver s preinstalled sounds can be used Additional sounds shall not be used for subtitles or superimposed text 10 Specifying target areas To specify a target area control shall be performed by using the target area descriptor in PMT Note that subtitles shall not be used by specifying their target area independently Whereas superimposed text can be used by specifying its target ar
191. e used in superimposed text However usable colors shall be 128 fixed colors that are common across receivers 7 8 3 Using warning sounds Possible to use warning sounds for both subtitles and superimposed text They shall be limited to preinstalled sounds only 7 8 4 Using additional sounds Shall not be used in subtitles or superimposed text 3 104 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 9 Preferred receiver s action e Number of events that can be simultaneously displayed for subtitles and superimposed text shall be one for subtitles and one for superimposed text i e 2 in total Presentation of subtitles and presentation of superimposed text shall be controlled independently on the receiver e In principle the display areas for subtitles and superimposed text shall not overlap each other However if overlapping occurs superimposed text shall take precedence and shall be displayed over subtitles In subtitles and superimposed text each if bitmap data and text or bitmap data and other bitmap data overlap each other data or text appearing later shall take precedence e In data broadcasting programs subtitles and superimposed text shall be displayed with the display size and display position adjusted in relation to the full screen area Based on whether or not caption management data is received the receiver shall judge whether or not caption data is transmitted For display of a mark notifying the viewer of caption text r
192. ea Data contents descriptor pf EIT Mandatory sch EIT Optional 7 shall not be written for superimposed text 7 2 8 5 Data encoding method descriptor The data encoding method descriptor data_component_id shall be 0x0008 for both subtitles and superimposed text Table 7 9 shows parameters to be set for additional information identification Table 7 9 Setting parameters for additional information identification in the data encoding method descriptor Field DMF 0011 Timing Subtitles 01 program synchronization Superimposed text 00 no synchronization or 10 time synchronization 7 2 8 6 Target area descriptor Shall be compliant with Chapter 5 Data Transmission Specification Usage or PMT region descriptor 7 2 8 7 Data contents descriptor Table 7 10 and 7 11 show parameters that can be set for the data contents descriptor and its selector area Note that if there is inconsistency between these setting parameters and the data encoding method descriptor and caption management data in PMT the data encoding method descriptor and caption management data shall take precedence 3 80 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 7 10 Data contents descriptor setting parameters for subtitles data_component_id 0x0008 entry component component tag value of the relevant subtitle ES num of component ref Shall be specified as 0 component ref
193. ea independently In such a case superimposed text targeted at different areas shall be transmitted by using different time intervals 11 Data contents descriptor Because superimposed text has nothing to do with events EIT s data contents descriptor shall not be added For subtitles one descriptor shall be added per ES If their parameters do not correspond to the settings for PMT s data encoding descriptor and caption management data regarding the parameters such as display mode number of languages and language code the receiver shall operate based on the settings for PMT s data encoding descriptor and caption management data 12 Caption management data transmission frequency Because caption management data contains information required to display subtitles and superimposed text it is not possible to display caption text before reception of that data Considering the moment of channel selection caption management data shall be therefore transmitted at the following time intervals for normal transmission of subtitles and superimposed text Maximum transmission frequency once per 0 3 seconds Minimum transmission frequency once per 5 0 seconds Note that transmission may be interrupted due to commercial messages 7 2 2 PES transmission specification used for subtitles The synchronous PES transmission specification shall be applied so that timing synchronization can be realized by using PTS Table 7 1 shows parameters to be set for PES pa
194. each item 6 1 3 Interval for resending each table Repetition interval Table 6 5 shows the maximum intervals for resending each table within a partial TS 2 31 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 5 Maximum intervals for outputting each table Repetition interval Table_id Table Recommended maximum interval for insertion 0x00 PAT 120ms 0x02 PMT 120ms Ox7E DIT This table should be inserted when it is necessary Ox7F SIT 3 68 Each table should be inserted to the same position where the existing table is inserted replacing the existing table For example a new PAT should replace the existing PAT that has been sent as a part of a program A new PMT should replace the existing PMT that has been sent as a part of a program The insertion interval for a SIT should be the same as that for the EIT p f which is sent as a part of a program The above maximum intervals actually indicate 110 of the maximum intervals specified by general rules for broadcasting because some margins may be necessary Generally an SIT is used as a replacement for an NIT However the maximum interval for an SIT is the same as that for an EIT p f that is more frequently transmitted than NIT because an SIT additionally contains service information For details on table outputs within a partial TS see 11 1 Section placement rules for TS packets and 11 2 Transmission of TS packets in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document 6 2 Table opera
195. eception or display and erasure of caption text operation shall be performed based on the relevant data Considering interruption of transmission of the relevant data such as interruption due to commercial messages it is preferable to start timeout processing if caption management data is not received for 3 minutes or more Display control such as EIT data working in conjunction with other data shall depend on the receiver 7 9 1 Start and end of subtitling display The receiver s action at the start and end of subtitling display shall be as shown in Table 7 21 Note that the start means starting the subtitling display specified for subtitle text and that the end means erasing the subtitles Table 7 21 Use of DMF in caption management data DMF Start End When reception is complete the relevant subtitles When reception is finished the Auto display at shall be displayed immediately relevant subtitles shall be erased reception Erasure not permitted before completion of immediately reception No auto display Nothing shall be done Nothing shall be done at reception When reception is complete it is preferable to When reception is finished if the Selective present some information indicating the existence relevant subtitles are displayed display at of subtitles and superimposed text they shall be erased immediately reception Display or erasure permitted according to the If they are not displayed nothing vie
196. ect ratio stipulated in document_resolution In the event of a discrepancy for instance in a news flash video the combined display of the video and the datacasting service should continue as before However the display format is receiver dependent 5 1 12 6 Receiver operation at station selection Table 5 6 lists receiver operations at station selection The datacasting program is deemed viewable based on the BML version region designation and restricted reception status E Chapter 9 provides more information about receiver operations on receivers compatible with pre stored linked data programs Table 5 6 Receiver operations at station selection Selection Selection Receiver operation method operation Remote Data enriched If auto_start_flag 1 the receiver starts displaying the startup control television document for the entry component of the relevant event If channel program auto_start_flag 0 the receiver waits for the data button to be pressed selection selected before displaying the startup document Independent The selected independent data program is activated data program The program is not activated if the PMT on demand viewing selected permission information precludes real time viewing A notification message is displayed for the prescribed period Selection Program The specified content is activated from EPG selection by When displaying the content title a minimum of 40 bytes must be current spec
197. ed future use 4 bslbf transmission info loop length 12 uimsbf for i 0 i lt N i descriptor for i 0 i lt N i service_id 16 uimsbf reserved_future_use 1 bslbf running status 3 bslbf service_loop_length 12 uimsbf for j 0 j lt M j descriptor CRC 32 32 rpchof Meaning of each field The meaning of each field is defined by 9 1 8 2 in Chapter 9 of ARIB STD B21 and 7 1 2 of ETS 300 468 Output operation rule e An SIT must be always output to a partial TS at the interval specified in Section 6 1 3 This SIT must provide stream information of the partial TS and service information of the services that have been inserted to the stream Table 6 15 shows the output operation rule for each field of an SIT Table 6 15 Output operation rules for an SIT Output operation rule for each field table_id The value 0x7F should be assigned to this field section syntax indicator The value 1 should be assigned to this field section_length The section length of the SIT should be assigned to this field The length of the entire section is 4096 bytes Therefore the maximum value for this field is 4093 version_number In a normal operation this field should be incremented by 1 when the SIT is updated current next indicator The value 1 should be assigned to this field section number The value 0x00 should be assigned to this field 2 48 ARIB TR B15 Versi
198. ed to the last portion of an HTTP response If the duration of the entire program content is less than 0 3 second this entire program content should be included in a single PCP If the duration of the program content contained in an HTTP response which is used when a receiver accesses the content to specify the range is less than 0 3 second the program content contained in the HTTP response should be included in a single PCP 8 1 2 Operation of partial TS output When a partial TS needs to be output through an IP interface the output operation must follow the specifications described in 6 1 Output operation specifications and 6 2 Table operation specifications in this document However if program content needs to be transmitted through HTTP no DITs should be inserted to the program at the points where the HTTP response is started and terminated For example when a receiver accesses the program content to specify the range the subsequent HTTP response may become discontinuous from the previous HTTP response In this case a new DIT should not be inserted 8 1 3 Operation rules for tuner description ABS digital receiver must insert the tuner container and channel item to the data transmitted through an IP interface following the rules specified in 9 2 3 Tuner description specifications in ARIB STD B21 9 2 3 For details on this operation see relevant sections in DLA Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines the DLNA guidelines
199. ed to this field Third field An MIME Type should be inserted The details are described later Fourth field See ARIB OR JP_PN MPEG_ TTS CP In the case of output using partial TS both ARIB OR JP_PN and DLNA ORG PN can be described Here when describing the stream format protected by DTCP IP in DLNA ORG PN the format specified in Volume 3 Link Protection Guideline of DLNA guidelines must be used In addition other parameters such as the ones defined by the DLNA guidelines and the ones defined by receiver manufacturers can be inserted to the fourth field If multiple parameters need to be inserted the insertion rule defined by the DLNA guidelines must be followed For the third field the MIME type that is recommended by DTCP VISE should be assigned to the MIME Type section of content transmitted under protection of DTCP IP The MIME type that supports a TS formatted stream with a time stamp should be assigned to the CONTENTFORMAT section The latter MIME type is defined in the MPEG 2 MIME Type Definition section of the DLNA guidelines The third field may be written as follows application x dtcp1 DTCP 1 HOST host DTCP 1 PORT port CONTENTFORMAT video vnd dIna mpeg tts In the above example host represents the address of the host that performs AKE Authentication Key Exchange port represents the port of the host that performs AKE 2 80 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 DTCP1HOST host and DTCP1PORT port
200. ed turns out to be DII with an empty carousel data event changeover shall be awaited Storage operation shall start when DII with a carousel that is not empty can be obtained If DII with a carousel that is not empty cannot be obtained after waiting 10 seconds a timeout error shall occur is updated has been performed e An update is performed when the latest storage fails so it is preferable to keep data of the previous version in storage and enable the previous version if storage fails e Whether or not the version is updated shall be judged by content_version of arib_bxml_infor in the data content descriptor e When an update is successful the previous version in storage can be deleted Processing when storage of a reserved linked pre stored data program fails 3 124 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Itis preferable to set automatic reservation for another linked pre stored data program that is linked from the same television program or data enriched television program 3 Receiver s action e The receiver shall not store content of the same version again e Itis not necessary for the receiver to be able to automatically store content of a new version 9 2 16 Preferable EPG display related to storage of linked pre stored data programs Table 9 7 shows the requirements for preferable EPG display related to linked pre stored data programs Table 9 7 Preferable EPG display related to linked pre stored
201. ee Terr ecrrer crear Ter cree rer cree 3 103 7 5 7 2 SCTOLING SPCC nuora iaae scares cavasdeseeasees seeustens soa teens voratesstenaeedavensveve teravessvorsteuvousies 3 103 7 5 8 Display function priority eveseseseseneneneneneeeeenenenenennnnnniinininini 3 103 T6 MSN DRES T eis Rea E E acca vee ace ae R E AS en aaa ek Seca ea eesti 3 103 Pil Usine initialization sneonen n ne e seen eee 3 104 7 7 1 Initialization through caption management eeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenennnennneniii 3 104 7 7 2 Initialization through caption texteeeeeeeeseseneeececeeenenenennninnninenii 3 104 7 7 3 Initialization through a text data unjteseeeesesenenenenenenreneneneneneninnn 3 104 7 7 4 Initialization through character control code eeeeseseseneneeeneceeenennnenenens 3 104 7 8 Mono media used in subtitles and superimposed text c ceccccesscessseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeenseeeeeaes 3 104 7 8 1 Using geometric s ssssssssiessiessieeeeeeieeeieeeeeeseeseeeseeaseesseesssesseesseeeseeaseessenssaessseasseaseesseessas 3 104 7 8 2 Using bitmap data sess eseseseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeessessessessesseasseasseasseasseasseasseaseeaseesias 3 104 7 8 3 Using warning sounds eeesesenencenenenenenenenenenenenenieneninisininisiiii 3 104 7 8 4 Using additional sounds eee ee eseseseseseeseeseeseeseeeeeseeeeeseeaeeseeseeeseaseeaeeaseesies 3 104 7 9 Preferred receiver s Act ON sssccceccceccestesbecacsces cevdesadecaduges cesdessdeuaducessculesulsuadassescutccsteasteseddcatossieevtens 3 105 7 9 1 Start
202. eeeseeeeseeessceeseseeeseeeseeesseeessneenes 3 42 5 3 Data carousel and event message transmission specification ccccccssceesseeesteeeseeceeseeesseeenseeeees 3 42 5 3 1 Data carousel transmission operation wou Sele Guid o s Gejd ole esse v dicie s adakah akanaka nu 6 deals Guid oleic kariaan iaaa cele daaa nk esse 3 42 5 3 1 1 Introduction of data events and local Content eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceseeaeeeeeseeeaeens 3 42 5 3 1 2 Data events Usare kets aclelas RAD a tate ied Sessa Sed Peas eh eae hed ak oad eA 3 42 5 39123 Local content activation and termination 0 eee eeeeseeseceecseceseeseeeenseeaeceseeaeeeseaeens 3 43 5 3 1 4 Introduction of return to entry flag oo ccc eeccccescceeseceeneeeeseeceseeessneceseeeseeeseeesseeessaeeesaes 3 43 5 3 1 5 Local content and data content AesCriptors cccccecssceeessceeseceeseeesneeeeseeesseeeseeeeeeeensaees 3 43 5 3 1 6 Emptycarousels USagecsse s dsccatt welder et ed nde deed hd nds eel ee A 3 45 5 3 1 7 Basic receiver operations during datacasting program display ceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 45 3 ii ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 3 2 DownloadInfolndication DID message usage vires ttetetreteteseteeeeeneeteeeeeteaeaeenenees 3 46 5 3 3 DownloadDataBlock DDB message usage sv irtteettteseetttestseeseieeeeseeneteeeenneneeeneananees 3 48 5 3 4 Event messages usage servrttesreseseseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeensneeeenceneseeeeeasasencnsasasersesaeececenentececananees 3 49 5 3
203. eeeteeteetreererrreernerernnreeree 1 18 Pek Uploading Cutdeli mes scx csc cseeceesscayscceeschs dogs ieesceeasehs eeceeestee ee E cas see A E E gies aE A 1 18 7 1 1 Provision of download software LEESI T EEIEIIE TIET TIETEIS T ITET ET IITTI TEETER TTET TI TATIE TTET TTT l 1 8 ce 1 2 Quality check ATITEA TITEI IEIET I ATI TETI ETIIT TERTIT TITTET ATIT Sein wise TIEATIEE I TE T E T sles dus scum Oeeeeee 1 2 1 8 7 1 3 Data common to all receivers AEII ESTIT EEIT TE LIIE ITET IETT TEIST IELI IETT TIELT Ou eiee seeae ees Noes l 1 8 7 1 4 Creation and delivery of notification information AE E AAP EELISTATE ETAL ETILSA TERAN l 1 9 715 Scope of responsibility seees teeters eee tteteeneeeeeeneceeeneateeneneneneeseeenteeeensnteeeesentes 1 19 7 1 6 Download COSS crrrreret tt eeeeet ete ecettetee eee eeee eens teeceetetensnsetaseneten eres eneeeensesaeaeees nee eneenaeeeeneneneeenes eee ens 1 19 71 7 Fee paying download services risers eee teeeereeneeenneneeeceesenenenseenenteeeecenty 1 19 7 1 8 Pre download test signal i 0 siaisis e s chia sie A vow diciu cise avie dass de Se deiais e Celene dele TA eiviee s clea sie TT 1 19 72 EMBINCSTING SELVICES o Aunen a ER RER R RAEE OEE 1 19 7 2 1 Definition AAE ETETE TTET AIET AT IN TESTAT L TE A A AAEL E LTA TNA 1 19 EDD Operation P NEA ATA TATTA TATTA TAA NA ATATA TIE ENAN A ETTE A ON 1 19 7 2 2 1 OD eChiVe E E A AE AAE omnia E A A ami AAT eaten 1 19 Taaa Mode uea a a a A A A A A 1 19 7 2 2 3 Engineering sl
204. ef may contain unconfirmed values so it is not referenced by the receiver e In schedule EIT num_of_carousel 0 may occur e Component information to be used at storage execution is as per p f EIT 5 1 9 p f EIT hyperlink descriptor usage The basic receiver unit does not need to interpret hyperlink descriptors E Receivers compatible with pre stored linked data programs can interpret hyper_linkage_type 0x80 combined_prior_data and 0x81 combined_posterior_stream hyperlink descriptors as described in Chapter 9 5 1 10 schedule EIT hyperlink descriptors usage Refer to the next section in this document 5 1 11 EIT unique to datacasting service usage e The data content descriptor contains information required for content selection and reservation Note that not all programs providing datacasting services have data content descriptors e Component information in data content descriptors is fixed for the duration of the event e For details of different EITs sent for all SI and specific SI refer to Section 4 5 1 12 Associated receiver operations 5 1 12 1 Datacasting engine startup e When a datacasting program is selected if auto_start_flag can be specified for data enriched television programs only of the data encoding method descriptor in the PMT entry component component_tag 0x40 is 0 the datacasting engine is not activated immediately Instead the datacasting engine startup process commences when the viewer presses the data but
205. egistered information protect secrets and clarify the scope of use for such information 4 Providers using authentication through B CAS card IDS shall clarify the procedure for taking over NVRAM data for replacement of B CAS cards 5 At the time of member registration an exemption clause shall be presented to users for their approval with respect to handling in case data such as points is lost e Itis preferable that content is provided with the function to present the details of NVRAM data private information etc stored in receivers 1 The menu item Check Contents Stored shall be provided in the Member Registration menu 2 User authentication e g authentication by using a password shall be performed for presentation of NVRAM data Preferably the items to be presented shall cover all the contents of NVRAM data private information etc Note that for items with higher confidentiality such as passwords and credit card numbers they shall not be presented specifically by numbers but presented by displaying asterisks or the message Already stored Guidelines on the function to erase NVRAM data by data broadcasting content In data broadcasting for operation of services that require private information to be stored into NVRAM in the receiver as data broadcasting content it is preferable for each broadcaster program or channel supply source to have the following erase function e Target to be erased Pa
206. eit teste tteteeteeneneneeesenenteeeeeneneeeeenenty 3 35 5 1 10 schedule EIT hyperlink descriptors usage vrei terete eeeeeneneeteneeeeneey 3 35 5 1 11 EIT unique to datacasting service usages steerer eee tee nets trt terr ertt trte rt teretes 3 35 5 1 12 Associated receiver operations aia E E E EE E E E A E E E stojeie s sislo s tesla sto 01a wiefe 3 35 5 1 12 1 Datacasting engine startup ccccccescceeseceessecescecesceeeeececsseeceesecesseeeseeesaeeseeeeeeeensaees 3 35 5 1 12 2 Receiver operation at start of datacasting program cccescceescesseeeeseeeesceeeeeeeeseeensaees 3 36 5 1 12 3 Receiver operations at PMT update cee eeecccesessseeceeseeesseeeeeneceeseeeseeesseeeseeeeseeeeseees 3 37 SLA Data Dutron sea oe Mecads a a esas aa ia cvs AAA ERE aE A aE NE Eao 3 38 5 1 12 5 Resolution and aspect control of datacasting programs ccccccscceessceeeereeeetseeeteeenseees 3 40 5 1 12 6 Receiver operation at station selection cccecesccesssceesseeeneeeeseeceeeeeeeceeseeeeseeeeseeensaees 3 40 5 1 12 7 Datacasting program reservation operations Guidelines ssssssessssssessssssessessesssees 3 40 5 1 12 8 Partial transport stream input output 20 2 eee ececccesteceeeeeeeeeeeecseeessreeseseeeeeeeneeensaeenes 3 41 5 1 12 9 Preferred EPG display format ccecccccssccsssecesneceeneeeeeeeseeesseeceeecsseeeesseeeseeesseeesseeenes 3 41 5 2 Independent PES transmission specification usage ccccceescessese
207. eivers 5 1 2 1 Receiver software update Schedule information can be displayed for the current day only both the current and next day or the next day only The maximum size of SDTT sections is 4 096 bytes Provided that this is not exceeded there are no restrictions on the number of schedule loops or superimposed download content descriptors the type of information in download content descriptors the text length or the number of modules The number of schedule loops is however subject to limitations associated with compilation The download_id is the same in all cases irrespective of the number of download content descriptors More than one content may be used for instance in order to use group_id to display a different message for each group however the schedule and download IDs must be the same Further maker_id must use the assigned ID numbered by ARIB In the case of downloads requested by the 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 manufacturer such as receiver software updates model id version id and group id are administered by the respective manufacturers and are not subject to any restrictions Multi sections are permitted in all sub tables for instance in order to use group_id to send different content for each group Table 5 1 Update IDs Bits maker_id 8 Specifies manufacturer model_id 8 Specifies receiver model group_id 4 Used to group downloads together version_id 12 System version S
208. elected and the startup document is obtained and displayed 3 The startup document is used to display multimedia content menus and other information and to begin the datacasting service 4 Subsequent processing is as per step 5 onwards in Example 1 above Example 3 To activate the datacasting engine immediately after station selection without displaying the datacasting service content on the screen 1 2 Set the value of auto_start_flag in the entry component data encoding method descriptor to 1 The datacasting engine is activated when a datacasting program is selected and the startup document is obtained and displayed In the default status of the startup document full size television audio and video is presented and the receiver waits for the data button to be pressed When the data button is pressed content control displays multimedia content menu and other information and starts displaying the datacasting service Subsequent processing is as per step 5 onwards in Example above 3 39 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 1 12 5 Resolution and aspect control of datacasting programs The receiver sets the resolution and aspect control based on the information provided by document_resolution in the BML document as opposed to document_resolution in the PMT data encoding method descriptor or the EIT data content descriptor In datacasting programs involving video the aspect ratio of the video is normally the same as the asp
209. en the following conditions are met 1 shall be assigned to the file storable flag of its data content descriptor and data encoding method descriptor each 1 The first DII of storage target local content shall be transmitted within 10 seconds after the start time of an event However a data event with an empty carousel may be transmitted within 5 seconds after the start time of an event refer to the next section in such a case a data event to be stored shall be transmitted immediately after the data event with an empty carousel 2 n principle transmission of DII for local content to be stored shall be completed before the end time of the relevant event In case transmission needs to extend beyond the end time of the relevant event it shall be completed within a maximum of one second e An empty carousel may be transmitted for prevention of improper storage operation at break points between events In such a case the transmission period of an empty carousel shall be a maximum of 5 seconds after the start time of an event 9 2 11 Use of the multimedia encoding method related to linked pre stored data programs 9 2 11 1 Operations related to name spaces e During playback of a linked pre stored data program stored the es_ref setting a shortened form of setting component setting not specifying event_id in EventMessageFired interrupt events shall be interpreted as a component of a television program or data enriched television program Oth
210. eneneene 3 55 5 4 Datacasting service fee Structures 0 eeccesceseceseceeceeceseceseceseeeseceseceseceseceaeeaeceaeceaeseseceaeeeaeeeeaeees 3 55 5 4 1 Fee StrUCtUresS ttettereerererrerrerererrerrerersereeresrereerereerereererserereereerereereesereerereererrereerereerereesereeereereeee 3 55 5 4 2 Receiver requirements tteeetteettettertteertertt ertt ert tettette rtettetttertenreenrenrtenrterntrte errenten reent 3 55 5 5 Low layer transmission of datacasting Services sssesssessseseeseeesseesreesressrtssressesseessresseesseesseese 3 55 5 6 Multi view operation and datacasting services cccccecssccsssecsereceeeeeseeceeecsseseeeeseecsseeensaeensneeeeaes 3 56 5 7 Provisional channels and datacasting SCrviCeS ccsccecssscessecseneeeeeceeneecescecsseeeseeeeeeeeseeesseeensaees 3 57 5 8 Interactive transmission protocols in datacasting services ccccecssceessecesceeeseeseeceeeeeeeseeensneeeaes 3 57 6 Operating Mono media Encoding ceeceesccsssecessecsenecesseeesseeesseeeceseeesseecsseecseeeeseseeesseeeeeeessaeensseeesaes 3 58 Gil Vid o encod G43 cccdecseesescbkecedeesteiedigsk cesiiacdecediuas cesdieveecedigch east eseecste gan veutlessecaeeseidesstecstaeseieadesuteeviess 3 58 6 1 1 MPEG 1 Video r sin oreieje E EPEA AE EP E A EAA ET T EATE A ALEL ATLETALA velo ere sis sieceime s 3 58 6 1 1 1 Constraints on encoding parameters escien iera are n E E Ee EEEE 3 58 6 1 1 2 Playback in synchronization with sound MPEG 2 AAC sss
211. ent as soon as possible after the ignition time specified in the general purpose event message for time mode 0x00 the event message reception time The immediate ignition and NPT setting should both be around 100 milliseconds 3 51 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 If there are several general purpose event messages with time mode 0 immediate ignition ignition is performed in the order in which the messages were received with no restrictions on the processing timing The receiver can queue up to 8 general purposes event messages awaiting ignition Where the acquisition target is several general purpose event messages with immediate ignition specified transmitted in the same DSMCC section ignition is performed in the order of the descriptors in DSMCC section Where the designated NPT time has already expired at the time of reception it is treated as immediate ignition The subscribe validity period in a general purpose event message is the period stated in the document that specifies the subscribe NPT reference messages Where the BML document contains an interrupt event with NPTReferred type attribute DSMCC_ section that sends NPT reference messages is subject to filtering in accordance with the following conditions component tag specified in es_ref attribute event msg_group_id 0xFFF data_event_id OxF This interrupt event is generated only when the NPT reference message is first acquired Interrupt events are no
212. ent version Type bml major version bml minor version 8 5 Using lockModuleOnMemory SetCachePriority e The receiver shall always secure 1MB free space to obtain modules from carousels if IMB memory space cannot be secured when lockModuleOnMemory executes this function shall not process module locking e Even if the versions of modules locked on memory are updated the receiver shall not automatically re obtain such modules Procedures for detecting modules releasing the lock and re locking modules on memory shall be written in a BML document 3 112 8 6 8 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Transporting DRCS pattern data loadDRCS shall used to set DRCS pattern data used both in BML documentation and in 8 unit code to be referenced externally DRCS patterns with multiple fonts and multiple sizes may be transmitted against 1 CharacerCode The maximum size of DRCS pattern data used in BML documentation simultaneously shall be 64KB The relationship between fontIDs specified in DRCS pattern data and fonts shall be as shown in Table 8 8 And fontID 0 shall not be used Table 8 8 DRCS fontlD font correspondence Font Not used Maru Gothic Kaku Gothic Futo Maru Gothic Using name spaces Reference to another service shall be made possible only by using the following broadcasting use extended functions epgTune epgIsReserved epgReserve epgCancelReservation epgRecIsReserved epgRe
213. ents 1 Component DII containing the module being viewed 2 Entry component DII The entry component DII is monitored in order to determine the timing for a forced return to the entry carousel in conjunction with local content switching for the entry component e Receiver response to data event switching on the component being viewed The datacasting engine generates the DataEventChanged data event message for the document currently on display It then discards the document and obtains and displays a startup document contained in the module with moduleId 0 If data event switching results in an empty carousel then after the document currently on display has been discarded the relevant component DII update is monitored and if the empty carousel is removed by subsequent data event switching a startup document is obtained and displayed All synchronous and asynchronous interrupt events that occur after DataEventChanged are discarded except for unload interrupt events Where the epgTune launchDocument reloadActiveDocument function is employed within the DataEventChanged event handler the startup document is not obtained and the processing is in accordance with the function specification 3 45 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Ifdata_event_id of the entry component being monitored is updated while viewing any data component the following processing occurs Ifreturn_to_entry_flag 1 in entry component DII returns to the entry component
214. ents of a temporary service are unintentionally recorded because of an event relay redirection of a TV program from one channel to another because of extension of the program duration 2 16 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 7 4 Reception of an event relay See 7 5 Event relay in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document 1 2 3 4 Service overview A program or an event such as game coverage of the high school baseball in Japan starts in one service ID and continues broadcasting in another service ID Some live programs cannot end broadcasting at the scheduled end time and continue broadcasting in another temporary service ID to deliver the remaining portion of the program When such redirection occurs a receiver can use the SI to notify a viewer of redirection of a program from one service to another or appropriately record an event by changing the recording target service Determination of a service A receiver can determine whether an event will be redirected to another service by examining whether event_group descriptor is assigned to the current event s EIT p f and whether the event_type of event_group_descriptor represents a relay event type The receiver should monitor EIT p f of the relay destination event that is described in event_group_descriptor A current event and relay destination event may belong to two different TSs In this case the receiver should monitor EIT p f other instead _ Notific
215. ents_flag in the selector area of the Data Contents Descriptor the value 1 should be assigned to this property Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned arib multi ViewInfo boolean This property indicates whether Multi View TV MVTV is being used As a general rule if the component_group_type of the Component Group Descriptor in the EIT is 000 the value 1 should be assigned to this property Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned to this property 2 78 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 This property indicates whether subtitles or captions are being used As a general tule the value 1 should be assigned to this property if the data_component_id is 0008 or a subtitle ES exists within a program Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned If one service_id contains multiple subtitle ESs multiple instances of this property can be set for the accumulated contents The property instance that corresponds to the default ES must be placed first arib captionInfo O boolean This property indicates whether multiple video ESs or audio ESs are present in a program As a general rule if multiple Component Descriptors or Audio arib multiESInfo O boolean Component Descriptors are placed in the EIT the value 1 should be assigned to this property If only one descriptor is placed in the EIT the value 0 should be assigned This property indicates whether the program is
216. er component settings shall be interpreted as data carousels of the relevant linked pre stored data program in storage e In linked pre stored data programs AV streams shall be transmitted with the default setting 1 only e Stored modules resources shall be saved so that they become accessible via the name space indicated in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 9 2 12 i e arib original_network_id transport_stream_id service_id content_id component_tag moduleld resourceName e For reference to modules that are on the air or that are stored from BML documents contained in stored modules regardless of specifications in 8 7 modules that have been transported by other services and stored shall be made referable too 9 2 12 Use of event messages related to storage of linked pre stored data programs e Event messages or NPT shall not be transmitted in linked pre stored data programs e A linked pre stored data program may reference a general purpose event message and NPT reference message transported on a linked television program or data enriched television program e Although it is just a television program a television program linked to a linked pre stored data program may transmit event messages e Ifan event message is transported on a television program or data enriched television program for which a 3 120 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 linked pre stored data program is stored the data broadcasting engine should receive when needed the
217. er to 7 5 6 Character style Preinstalled sound Define external character substitute code string O Usable A Usable with conditions x Not usable Note 1 Possible to set only a combination of a character font specified in Chapter 4 and font size 3 71 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 4 1 2 Character set used in data broadcasts Table 6 12 Character set used in data broadcasts 8 unit code for external Subtitles and Character set PME T reference from a BML superimposed document 2 text 3 Alphanumeric set specified in ARIB O O O STD B24 single byte code Hiragana set specified in ARIB y O O STD B24 single byte code Katakana set specified in ARIB O O STD B24 single byte code Kanji set specified in ARIB STD B24 O O O double byte code rows 1 94 7 DRCS set specified in ARIB O STD B24 single byte code 7 DRCS set specified in ARIB y F STD B24 double byte code ae aa ci Macro set specified in ARIB a z STD B24 single byte code Oe os JIS compatible kanji single plane set specified in ARIB STD B24 i x x JIS compatible kanji double plane set specified in ARIB STD B24 T x x Supplemental symbol set specified in ARIB STD B24 7 i xI 12 3 4 5 6 7 EUC JP is used as specified in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Appendix 2 4 1 Character encoding Use a code structure extension method call control control over code instructions a
218. er would see the background OSD of the EPG for these pixels e Semi invisible colors These colors can be processed as visible colors That is the alpha values of pixels for which semi invisible colors are assigned alpha value 128 can be increased to 255 7 Ifa receiver is designed to accumulate all channel SI the EPG window may display old information regarding programs when the current time and the reception time of all channel SI are different Manufacturers should describe this phenomenon in product manuals For example a product manual 2 10 8 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 may contain a statement such as Some programs may change without prior notice The display contents of the EPG may be different from the actual program contents or schedules If the selected service sends captions during EPG window display based on SI that captions should be promptly displayed If the text_char field of the component descriptor or audio component descriptor is omitted the default value should be inserted The default value should be Video for the component descriptor or Audio for the audio descriptor Note however that the default value should be Primary Audio CR ine feed Secondary Audio if the dual mono mode is selected 4 4 2 Program list 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 wm A receiver must be capable of extracting information from SI and displaying all programs offered by all broad
219. eral category table in Appendix A of Section 4 The Content Descriptor is contained the event loop of the EIT Multiple genres can be assigned to upnp genre If the content_nibble_level_1 is either 0xC 0xD or OxE the character string Undefined should be assigned to this property If the content_nibble_level_1 is unknown the character string Unknown should be assigned to this property upnp genre string This property indicates the service name member channel name As a general rule the char contained in the second loop of the Service Descriptor should be assigned upnp channelName string to this property The Service Descriptor is contained in the service loop of the SDT If the char is unknown the previously set member channel name should be assigned to this property 2 74 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 upnp channelINr integer This property indicates the channel number The channel number can be defined by the following formula upnp channelNr One touch channel selection number x10000 3 digit number x10 One touch channel selection number The value assigned for a service member channel in the receiver should be used for this number If no one touch channel selection number is assigned to the service the value 0 should be used for this number 3 digit number As a general rule the service_id of the Service List Descriptor should be used for this nu
220. erate in the conditions shown in Table 8 3 X_BPA writePersitentArrayWithAccessCheck X_BPA_readPersitentArray WithAccessCheck execute according to access right information held by the receiver Reading writing shall be permitted only when access right information which is held by the receiver and which specifies wide band CS digital broadcasters allowed to access the relevant part of the BS digital broadcaster specific area matches a set of original_network_id and broadcaster_id for the broadcasters of services transmitting content that requests such access Table 8 3 Actions of broadcasting use extended functions for the BS broadcaster specific area Broadcasting use extended function Access permitted or denied Access from local content writePersitentArray readPersitentArray O Accessible regardless of the access right for other broadcasters set in X_BPA_setAccsesInfoOfPersistentArray ForAnotherProvider X_BPA_writePersitentArrayForAnotherP roviderWithAccessCheck X_BPA_readPersitentArrayForAnotherPr oviderWithAccessCheck x Access from another station content writePersitentArray readPersitentArray x X_BPA_writePersitentArrayForAnotherP roviderWithAccessCheck X_BPA_readPersitentArrayForAnotherPr oviderWithAccessCheck O Accessible only by wide band CS digital broadcasters given access permission 3 110 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 2 4
221. ere the partial TS is originally created Structure Table 6 19 shows the structure of the Network Identification Descriptor Table 6 19 Structure of the Network Identification Descriptor Data structure Bit Identifier network_identification_descriptor descriptor_tag 8 uimsbf descriptor_length 8 uimsbf country_code 24 bslbf media_type 16 bslbf network_id 16 uimsbf for i 0 i lt N i private_data 8 bslbf 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Meaning of each field The meaning of each Output operation rule field is defined by 9 1 8 3 in ARIB STD B21 e This descriptor must be inserted into an SIT Table 6 20 shows the output operation rule for each field Table 6 20 Output operation rules for the Network Identification Descriptor Output operation rule for each field descriptor_tag The value 0xC2 should be assigned to this field descriptor length The length of the descriptor should be assigned to this field country_code field media_type field network_id identification number should be obtained from the NIT private data This field should remain unused 3 Partial TS Time Descriptor Purpose A country code associated with the location of the distribution system where the partial TS is created should be assigned to this field If the location is Japan the code 0x4A504E should be assigned to this
222. erenced from the content simultaneously Data event The period over which a BML document or group of BML documents for a given component is being transmitted Data events are different to SI events Data events are switched with every update of data_event_id in DII sent in the component Local content The data carousel sent in the data event for a given component 3 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Content A general abstraction for the collection of local content that is sent over the period of a given component event which is identified by the EIT data content descriptor Entry component entry carousel A component with a component tag value of 0x40 in PMT gra loop is called an entry component The data carousel sent via this component is called the entry carousel Startup module A module with moduleld 0 Startup document The first BML document in the data carousel to be reproduced by default Located in the startup module Data broadcasting engine Receiver software that obtains and interprets multimedia data BML documents and renders it on the display screen Data event message Interrupt event generated by the data broadcasting engine against the BML document currently being displayed in response to changes in transmitted data signal such as data event switching Stream format identification Identification of the stream format as per ISO IEC 13818 1
223. ers and make an application to Dpa Both Logo and Other than Logo of services common to all receivers are collectively controlled with the association as the window For Other than Logo of services common to all receivers users and related institutions shall determine the update content after consultation and the representative shall make an application to Dpa 3 Creation of download content Content for the individual receivers is created by the respective users Dpa creates the content common to all receivers based on the submitted materials 4 Acceptance check for download content Dpa performs acceptance check i e whether the content has been created according to specifications If the check results show that there are errors with the content Dpa will make a request for recreation and 5 Security of download content Encryption in view of confidentiality or other purposes of download content relating to receiver software update shall be dependent to implementation of the receiver and its manufacturer There are no particular considerations for security of download content relating to data common to all receivers 6 Usage fee and payment Users shall pay registration fees download service usage fees and other fees to the association according to the Dpa rate schedule specified elsewhere 7 Confidentiality Dpa will not leak or disclose the information related to user download service usage to the third pa
224. ers can decide whether Permitted or Not permitted should be set as the default setting Note that the data common to the entire receiver should be updated through data downloading regardless of this setting 4 13 8 Caption display selection The caption modes include the Display selection at reception Display selection at a record replay mode See 7 Subtitle and caption encoding in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document In this mode captions do not automatically start when the main video audio or data starts Therefore a user should be able to specify Display or Not display at the initial setting The default mode should be Display 4 13 9 Personal data clear function A receiver must be implemented with an initialization function by which a user can delete the personal data stored in NVRAM during program reception or user settings This function is necessary for protection of privacy when the digital satellite broadcasting receiver is either given to another user or needs to be scrapped e Information in the broadcasting company specific region and common region that are used during data broadcasting For details see 8 2 Usage of NVRAM that is shared by MM services in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document e Personal data related to Conditional access such as an EMM mail For details see 4 3 Memory in Section 5 of Part 1 of this document e User setting information such as the interactive connection setting information e Per
225. ersion 4 6 E1 Table 6 25 shows the output operation rules for each field of this descriptor Table 6 25 Output operation rules for the Broadcast ID Descriptor Output operation rule for each field descriptor tag The value 0x85 should be assigned to this field descriptor length The length of the descriptor should be assigned to this field original network_id The service that needs to be output to a partial TS belongs to a network The ID of this network should be assigned to this field transport_stream_id The service that needs to be output to a partial TS belongs to a transport stream The ID of this transport stream should be assigned to this field event_id The ID of the event that needs to be output to a partial TS should be assigned to this field broadcaster_id The service that needs to be output to a partial TS belongs to a broadcaster The ID of this broadcaster should be assigned to this field Remarks e A multimedia data service may use original network_id transport_stream_id service_id and event_id in the following way to identify data transmission modules and video audio components arib lt original_network_id gt lt transport_stream_id gt lt service_id gt lt event_id gt component_tag e A multimedia data service may have a function for reserving a space in the receiver s NVRAM so that the information regarding the program s broadcas
226. ertical pixels The entry must be made with half width characters and the format is shown below The number of horizontal pixels x The number of vertical pixels Example 1920x1080 This property represents the parental rating As a general rule a converted form of the rating field of the Parental Rate Descriptor should be assigned to this property The rating must be upnp rating O string converted to a hexadecimal number 0xXX For example if the value of rating is 10 0x10 should be inserted This property only shows how high the parental rate is and is not necessarily used for other purposes URI This property represents the URL to the logo of the service member channel This property represents the size of the logo of the service member channel The format for this property must be the same for the res resolution property The size of a logo must be one of the size patterns shown in Table 4 1 Size patterns of transmitted logos in 4 3 Logo data update in Part 1 of this document The number of horizontal dots and vertical dots must also be taken from the table mentioned above The number of horizontal dots x The number of vertical dots Example 64x36 arib O longDescription O pattern res resolution itn upnp icon O upnp O pattern icon arib resolution string 2 70 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 arib videoComponentType unsigned integer This propert
227. ervices 5 1 1 1 Data programs versus television programs Data programs are distinguished from television programs as follows Television program A program where the first component of the PMT oe loop does not contain a data encoding method descriptor in this chapter this also includes radio programs Data program A program where the first component of the PMT zea loop contains a data encoding method descriptor Television programs are classified into those with additional data data enriched television programs and those without standard television programs In this document television program means a standard television program Data programs are classified into those designed for viewing in isolation independent data programs and those designed for viewing in conjunction with standard or data enriched television programs linked data programs 5 1 1 2 Types of datacasting service programs Table 5 1 describes the different types of datacasting service programs 3 24 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 5 1 Types of datacasting service programs Program type Definition Data enriched television program A television program with a data encoding method descriptor located in a component other than the head of the PMT oe loop E May use hyperlink to link to a pre stored data program Independent data program A program that is transmitted by a data service service_type 0xC0 and contains a data encoding
228. es a user to switch from a regular service to a concurrent service and vice versa Both the regular service and concurrent service are provided by the same broadcasting company and contained within the same TS Each service has a unique service ID 2 Switching to a temporary service This function enables a user to switch between a regular service to a temporary service and vice versa Both the regular service and temporary service are concurrently provided by the same broadcasting company and contained within the same TS 2 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 3 Switching between the main and sub windows in a multi view TV This function enables a user to switch between components of a component group that is defined by component group descriptors if the TV supports the multi view service 4 Switching to another video component This function enables a user to switch between video components of a current service if no component groups are defined or when hierarchical modulation is used Example of a remote Example of a remote If a TV is connected to a digital tuner In case of a digital tuner build in TV Figure 4 1 Example of a remote 2 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 3 Time management A receiver should be capable of obtaining the current Japan Standard Time JST Coordinated Universal Time UTC 9 from TOT However 1 second error may occur and is acceptable A receiver can support daylight savin
229. es not mean that the dial type setting PB or DP has been correctly set up In an a pseudo tone does not mean that the line is correctly connected Figure 5 1 shows the range of line connection test ISDN connection a pseudo tone may be returned from the analog port of TA Therefore reception of Collection Receiver network Center Range of telephone line connection test Public switched telephone network etc Figure 5 1 The range of line connection test 2 Line connection and settings Line connection and settings must be set for a PSTN line 1 Connect a PSTN line to a receiver 2 Confirm the following initial setting have been set e Postal code e Line type for priority usage e dentification number for a communication company 2 32 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Cancellation number for a fixed priority connection e Caller ID notification e Optional external phone number e Dial type 3 Line connection test 1 Connect to the center via an actual service or other services 2 Confirm that the connection has been established normally by referring to the screen display 3 Ifan error message is displayed follow the description in the message to take corrective actions 5 14 Accumulation function Manufacturers can decide whether to implement an accumulation function to a receiver If a receiver needs to be implemented with an accumulation function the receiver must follow the rules specif
230. es storage of the specified program with an event Syntax Number X_BSP_preStorageReserve input String event_ref input Date startTime Arguments event_ref Specifies an event startTime Start time of an event Return value 1 Success NaN Unsuccessful Description Reserves with an event storage of the program which is scheduled to start at the time specified by startTime and which is specified by event_ref and responds with a return value regarding success or failure How to write event_ref shall follow the specifications for name spaces in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Chapter 9 X BSP preStorageCancelReservation Cancels with an event programmed storage of the specified program Syntax Number X_BSP_preStorageCancelReservation input String event_ref Arguments event_ref Specifies an event Return value 1 Success NaN Unsuccessful Description Cancels with an event programmed storage of the program specified by event_ref and responds with a return value regarding success or failure How to write event_ref shall follow the specifications for name spaces in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Chapter 9 X BSP preStoragelsReservedByContent Checks whether or not storage of the specified content has been reserved Syntax Number X_BSP_preStoageIsReservedByContent input String event_ref Number content_id input Date startTime 3 129 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Arguments event_ref Specifies an event conten
231. escriptors and download content Download content Name descriptor Remarks Genre code table GENRE See Table 5 4 Program characteristics code table FEATURE See Table 5 5 Keywords list KEYWORD See Table 5 6 Channel logo LOGO XX See Tables 5 3 and 5 6 XX denotes logo _type 1 10 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 5 3 Name descriptors and download content for logo data Logo type Name descriptor HD large LOGO 05 HD small LOGO 02 SD4 3 large LOGO 03 SD4 3 small LOGO 00 SD16 9 large LOGO 04 SD16 9 small LOGO 01 5 2 7 DDB DownloadDataBlock 5 2 7 1 Receiver software update No stipulations 5 2 7 2 Data common to all receivers Tables 5 4 and 5 6 show the data formats for the genre code table program characteristics code table keywords list and logo data Table 5 4 Syntax of genre code table and program characteristics code table Data structure Bytes CommonTableDataModule number_of loop 1 for i 0 i lt number_of loop i table_code 1 level_1_name_length 1 for j 0 j lt level_1_name_length j name_char level_2 name length 1 for j 0 j lt level 2_ name length j name_char 1 1 l1l ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 number_of_loop the number of code loops repetitions of code information loops following table_code code newly specified content code For the genre code table it is 1 byte of data including level 1 and 2 genre classification
232. evant service is transmitted as a combination of multiple hierarchical layers Output operation rule e Output of this descriptor is optional during partial TS output 3 Data Component Descriptor Purpose This descriptor indicates the coding method for a relevant ES Output operation rule e This descriptor is always sent when a program is broadcasted if the program contain data components including subtitles and captions If the data contents need to be inserted to a partial TS and then the partial TS needs to be output this descriptor must be inserted in a SIT 4 Target Area Descriptor Purpose This descriptor indicates the area where the ES should provide service Output operation rules e This descriptor is always placed in a PMT when the stream_type of the ES is a data broadcast service and the target area of the ES needs to be specified Output of this descriptor is optional during partial TS output e If this descriptor needs to be inserted in both the 1st_loop and 2nd_loop of a PMT the target area specified for the 2nd_loop must indicate a location that is a part of the area specified for the Ist_loop 5 Digital Copy Control Descriptor See Digital Copy Control Descriptor in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document Purpose This descriptor should be placed into a PMT when digital copy control information needs to be indicated or the maximum transmission rate needs to be described for the target ES This des
233. evious location may not exist Toggles show hide multimedia datacasting Blue red green and yellow Selects operation execute color keys Buttons are arranged Blue Red Green then Yellow from left to right on the remote control unit The names of the colors should also be printed on the buttons for easy identification 4 3 2 Key mask Multimedia content can mask keys as per ARIB STD B24 Station selector keys one touch selector button channel up down keys and video key are not masked by content except during online communication 3 21 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 4 TS decoder Table 4 8 lists transport decoder requirements Table 4 8 Transport decoder Item Requirements Number of TS that can be received 1 simultaneously Number of filters required 32 18 pf Section 32018 18 Designed for receivers with 32 PID filters and 32 Section filters that are capable of receiving and displaying datacasting content including SI PSI reception at the same time 4 5 Memory requirements Both minimum and recommended memory requirements are stipulated for the basic receiver unit in order to promote receiver usage The minimum specifications enable the receiver to receive and display all forms of datacasting content without failure The recommended specifications enable a practical response to future services that were envisaged in 2000 Memory deployment in receivers and associated definitions can be found
234. field program_map PID The PID of the PMT of the relevant service should be assigned to this field 2 39 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 2 2 PMT 6 2 2 1 Structure and operation of a PMT Purpose This table contains the PIDs of TS packets that transmit coded signals that constitute a program that will be output as a partial TS Structure Table 6 8 shows the structure of a PMT Table 6 8 Structure of a PMT Program Map Table Data structure Bit Identifier program map section table_id 8 uimsbf section_syntax_indicator 1 bslbf 0 1 bslbf Reserved 2 bslbf section_length 12 uimsbf program_number 16 uimsbf Reserved 2 bslbf version number 5 uimsbf current _next_ indicator 1 bslbf section_number 8 uimsbf last_section_number 8 uimsbf Reserved 3 bslbf PCR_PID 13 uimsbf Reserved 4 bslbf program_info_ length 12 uimsbf for i 0 i lt N it descriptor for i 0 i lt N it stream_type 8 uimsbf Reserved 3 bslbf elementary_PID 13 uimsbf Reserved 4 bslbf ES _ info length 12 uimsbf for G 0 j lt Myjt Descriptor CRC_32 32 rpchof Meaning of each field Meaning of each field is defined by Section 5 2 3 of Part 2 of ARIB STD B10 and Section 2 4 4 of ISO IEC13818 1 2 40 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Output operation rules e The PMT must be output when a partial TS includes a stream The PMT must be relevant to the services described in the PAT and must b
235. figured in such a way that it is not readily understood by the viewer 6 3 Common data reception guidelines 6 3 1 Cross media standardization of genre codes program characteristics codes and keywords As noted in Section 4 tables for genre codes program characteristics codes and keywords are standardized for both terrestrial and digital satellite broadcasting However the codes themselves may be used separately l 17 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 by different broadcast media Codes that are used by only one transmission medium must appear as undefined in other media and cannot be used for other purposes 6 3 2 Receiver tracking of version number of common data Common data is downloaded via both terrestrial and digital satellite transmission routes when adding common codes used by both in order to accommodate dedicated receiver units If codes are added from either BS or CS digital only the download is performed via the corresponding transmission route only For digital satellite broadcasts the version number applies to the common data in its entirety including the logo genre code table program characteristics code table and keywords For terrestrial broadcasts the version number applies to common data for the genre code table program characteristics code table and keywords list only This means that version numbers can differ between terrestrial and digital satellite broadcasting Dedicated BS digital receivers are allowed
236. function See Chapter 6 Guidelines for a receiver about download reception in Section 1 of Part 1 of this document 5 12 Reception service at shipment Manufacturers can decide what should be the transponder TS and service ID of the default service that will be received when a user sets up the receiver in the user s home 5 13 System test 5 13 1 IC card test See 4 20 1 IC card test in Section 5 of Part 1 of this document 2 31 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 13 2 Telephone line connection test 5 13 2 1 Thelephone line connection test e This function is for line connection confirmation with the public line and it will be launched when the user selects this function at the test menu screen e After it is launched the receiver detects the dial tone after offhook If the dial tone cannot be detected for 30 seconds or longer after offhook the line shall be disconnected unconditionally In addition as soon as the dial tone is detected the line can be disconnected The detection results of the dial tone shall be displayed on the screen notifying the connection confirmation results 5 13 2 2 Telephone line connection test for an interactive data broadcasting service 1 Range of telephone line connection test At the time of receiver setting a connection test should be performed between the receiver and a center Even if a receiver receives a dial tone a signal indicating that a dial up is possible in a PSTN connection it do
237. g Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical _ Font size 36 36 36 36 Character spacing 4 12 4 8 Line spacing 24 24 16 24 Display block W x H 40x60 60x48 40x52 60x44 Note that bordering characters row 8 shall be displayed over the entire display block only when values for character spacing and line spacing in horizontal writing in Table 7 16 are selected The function to display borderings over the entire display block if values for character spacing and line spacing other than listed in Table 7 16 are set shall be optional Table 7 16 Display block where bordering characters boxes and underlines can be displayed correctly a 960x540 Horizontal 960x540 Vertical Plololololojojojo 00 Ni on 4 0o 00 Po po 1 1 2S gt NIO 720x480 Horizontal 720x480 Vertical ol olo oiojlolololo O Nj 01 AIAIOIOININ Oo Note that bordering characters shall apply in horizontal writing only Reference The above values for character spacing and line spacing are obtained from the following formulas Character spacing ratio initial character spacing value initial font size Character spacing value character spacing ratio x font size Character spacing value 2 character spacing ratio 2 x font size Line spacing ratio initial line spacing value initial font size Line spacing value line spacing ratio x font siz
238. g of each field is defined in 9 1 8 3 in ARIB STD B21 Output operation rule e This descriptor must be placed in the Ist loop of an SIT Table 6 18 shows the output operation rule for each field of this descriptor Table 6 18 Output operation rules for the Partial Transport Stream Descriptor Output operation rule for each field descriptor tag The value 0x63 should be assigned to this field descriptor_length The length of the descriptor should be assigned to this field peak_rate The peak packet rate of the partial TS should be assigned to this field This field should specify the maximum peak packet rate of the partial TS This 22 bit field will be coded into a positive integer at a ratio of 400 bits second minimum overall smoothin The minimum overall smoothing buffer leak rate among all partial g rate transport packets should be assigned to this field This 22 bit field will be coded into a positive integer at a ratio of 400 bits second The value 0x3FFFFEF undefined should be assigned to this field maximum overall smoothin The maximum smoothing buffer size among all partial transport g_ buffer packets should be assigned to this field This 14 bits field will be coded into a positive integer with a unit of bytes The value 0x3 FFF undefined should be assigned to this field 2 Network Identification Descriptor Purpose This descriptor clarifies the information regarding the network wh
239. g that sends out data common to all receivers network id 0x0004 service id 929CH and notice broadcasting that predicts and notifies the time information of download broadcast using all TSes SDTT Software Download Trigger Table Instead of targeting viewers like the general data broadcasting this broadcasting service targets the receivers that have BS digital broadcasting and broadband CS digital broadcasting functions 3 Types of Download Service Download service has the following types Service Type User Application Recievers Manufacturers of recevers Upar BL a e pet wii receiver Consigned broadcasting Common to all receivers Logo operators Update of the logo data Platform i Consigned broadcasting Common to all receivers Other Update of genre code table program operators than Logo Platform code table and reserve words 4 Operation of download service 1 Operation of download service Per a user usage application Dpa provides download service except for cases such as broadcasting equipment failure maintenance and other unavoidable circumstances 1 23 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 2 Application of download service Users that use receiver services submit the specified Download Application Form within the specified date to Dpa Users that use the services common to all receivers attach the raw material data such as logo data to Application form of Data for All Receiv
240. g time summer time by adding the current time and the offset value that can be obtained from Local_Time_Offset_Descriptor of TOT The offset time should be displayed for programs whose schedules are affected by daylight saving time summer time Every information item in TOT other than Local Time Offset_Descriptor is based on the Japan Standard Time 4 4 EPG Manufacturers can freely decide how to implement EPS functions for example program list display program search and reserved recording and EPG user interface that utilize SI However this document provides the following rules and guidelines for EPG functions because EPG functions are highly useful for users and also affect the design of SI 4 4 1 Common rules 1 The program selection operation of a receiver must not be affected by an error in SI table transmission Even if SI has not been sent successfully a user should be able to select and display a desired channel by using PSI 2 When auser moves from a program of one media type TV radio or data broadcasting to a program of another media type the receiver must display a sign indicating the media type 3 Ifan EPG is displayed with 8 bit CLUT index colors which are also used for data display for its characters and figures the EPG must use 32 receiver dependent colors and 128 common fixed colors See 4 2 1 Resolutions and Restrictions on Planes That Constitute Display Windows in Section 3 of Part of this document for
241. hall be called only when the processing 3 138 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 capability is available O 2 Mandatory functions newly defined in Terrestrial Broadcasting Operation Standard But they are not implemented in conventional type BS receivers For use in content therefore the processing capability of the relevant function on the receiver shall be examined by specifying APIGroup for functionname and a value specified in B24 Section 2 Appendix 1 for additionalinfo in the getBrowserSupport function so that the relevant function shall be called only when the processing capability is available Or examination can be made by specifying BMLversion for functionname and 3 0 for additionalinfo respectively O 3 Functions that are optional in BS Level 2 Standard but that become mandatory in Terrestrial Broadcasting Operation Standard For use in content therefore although examination is possible by specifying either APIGroup or BMLversion in the getBrowserSupport function considering Level 2 supported receivers it is preferable to use APIGroup for examination O 4 Optional functions newly defined after the start of operation For use in content the processing capability of the relevant function on the receiver shall be examined by specifying BPA for sProvider APIGroup for functionname and Persistent Media Support Ext for additionalinfo in the getBrowserSupport function so that the relevant function shall be calle
242. hannel Channel used to connect a receiver to a central device via a modem or equivalent Partial transport stream The bit stream which results when transport packets unrelated to the selected program s are removed from the MPEG transport packets Font Typeface size etc of a character set Font size Same as design limits Basic procedures Basic data transmission control procedures between host and terminals including Code Independent procedures designed to minimize data transmission errors Mode Multi section Two or more sections embedded within a TS packet for transmission Data enriched television program A television program where the video and audio content is complemented by data broadcast as part of the event May also contain hyperlink descriptors designating linked data programs Programs that are primarily audio in content are also considered to be television program for the purpose of this definition Television program Ordinary video and audio programming content without additional data May contain hyperlink descriptors designating linked data programs Independent data Datacast programs that mainly consist of multimedia data These programs do not program contain hyperlinks to any television programs or data enriched television programs Linked data program A program in which the multimedia data is stored at a different time to a data enriched program or program designed for vie
243. he broadcasting use extended function getIRDIDQ CA_system_id shall be specified for type as specified in ARIB STD B24 A return value shall be a string expressed in hexadecimal notation 0x not put at its top The function shall not be used that obtains receiverID as hardware and obtains MakerID and ModelID used for downloading e Support for the series recording reservation related API broadcasting use extended functions seriesReserve seriesRecReserve etc shall be optional for the basic receiver unit Whether or not receivers support the above API shall be identified by calling getBrowserSupport BSP EPGFunction seriesReservation and only the receivers that returns to that call can use that API e lt series_scope_ref gt used for identification of series shall be lt network_id gt lt broadcater_id gt lt media_type gt Where lt network_id gt Network ID 4 digits in hexadecimal notation lt broadcaster_id gt Broadcaster ID 2 digits in hexadecimal notation lt media type gt Media type 1 Television media type 2 Audio media type 3 Data media type For IDs specified in hexadecimal numbers 0x shall not be put at the beginning of a number string and h shall not be put at the end of a number string 8 10 Use of getPrefixNumber e getPrefixNumber which was added in ARIB STD B24 Ver3 0 shall be applicable to receivers sold after publication of the version 2 2 revision of this document and shall be applic
244. he p f EIT s data content descriptor in independent pre stored data program 3 126 9 3 8 Use of DII related to storage of independent pre stored data program vvevevesesenenen 3 126 9 3 9 Use of carousels related to storage of independent pre stored data program iveveveseses 3 126 9 3 10 Use of the multimedia encoding method related to independent pre stored data program 3 126 9 3 11 Use of event messages related to storage of independent pre stored data program 3 126 9 3 12 idelines on the receiver s actions related to independent pre stored data program at Channel Selection serrrrrrrrrrere reeset teste et ee eee eee ects etee ease ects eeeee eens eens nereeeeneeseeeecenee eens eeeeeeeeeen ens 3 126 9 3 12 1 Receiver s actions related to independent pre stored data program when a data broadcasting program Starts ised t a a A A A a aa aaa 3 127 9 3 13 Processing for programmed storage of an independent pre stored data programieeeee s 3 127 9 3 13 1 Processing for programmed Storage cceeeesceseceseceeeeeeeseeeseceseceseeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeteeesees 3 127 9 3 13 2 How to calculate the size of content 0 eee eeeeeseeseceeceseesecseeeceseesecsecsaseseeseeeeeseegs 3 127 9 3 14 Guidelines on storage operation processing related to independent pre stored data program 3 127 9 3 14 1 Information to be stored when storage is performed ccccccccesseceeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeenaes 3 127 9 3 14 2 General rules on processing when storage is
245. his tag not by entry_point_flag in the data encoding method descriptor The entry component sends the entry module moduleId 0 and the entry module must contain a startup document Multi view programs sometimes have entry components for each sub channel Entry components are identified as follows e The main channel component group 0 entry component always has a tag value of 0x40 e Sub channels other than the main channel component group other than 0 have entry component tag values in the range 0x41 0x4F The entry component for a given sub channel may not be used as the non entry component for another sub channel in other words a sub channel may not have more than one component with a tag value in the range 0x40 Ox4F e Thus sub channel entry components have the lowest tag values among data components in the corresponding component group Entry components in hierarchical transmission are identified as follows e Either the main and sub entry components or the corresponding components in the hierarchical transmission identifier are selected in accordance with the hierarchy during transmission 5 1 2 5 ES constraints In light of constraints on receiver hardware resources the maximum number of ES per service per PMT is 12ES For example one video two audio one subtitles and one for superimposed text brings the total to seven for multimedia data components For multi view operation this constraint applies
246. ible without restrictions Copy is possible for one generation and Copy is prohibited Macrovision This is a copy control technology developed by Macrovision Corporation If a receiver is connected to a display normal output is possible If a receiver is connected to a recorder normal recording becomes impossible extremely low quality images are output This technology uses both false synchronization pulses and color stripes VESA An acronym for Video Electronics Standards Association This organization defines and promotes the standards for displays and display interfaces DVI An acronym for Digital Visual Interface An interface standard defined by DDWG DDWG An acronym for Digital Display Working Group This industry organization promotes standardization of digital display interfaces HDCP An acronym for High bandwidth Digital Content Protection System This standard protects the contents of digital video signals and digital video audio signals transmitted through DVI or HDMI HDMI An acronym for High Definition Multimedia Interface This digital interface standard is defined by HDMI founders This standard and related licences are managed by HDMI Licensing LLC Limited Liability Company DTCP An acronym for Digital Transmission Content Protection This standard controls the content transmission and recording by using authentication and encryption in a digital interface
247. ied in Section 8 of Part 1 of this document It is also recommended that the receiver follow the rules specified in 7 3 Assurance of the uniqueness of a broadcasting program and its contents 5 15 Others 5 15 1 Priory for various kinds of display Appropriate priority should be given to each display element according to the order shown below when two or more elements superimpose on each other in the same screen region 1 Error message See 4 14 in this document 2 Automatic display message 3 Text captions 4 Subtitles 5 15 2 Priority for power standby processing Appropriate priority should be given to each power standby process according to the order shown below 1 Various reservation operations specified by a viewer For example program reservation 2 Manufacturers can decide which of the three processes need to acquire priority Electric currency control EMM reception control that is controlled by the CA_EMM_TS descriptor or downloading Electric currency control and EMM reception control that is controlled by the CA_EMM_TS descriptor must acquire priority if the data common to the entire receiver has already been downloaded As described above a digital satellite broadcasting receiver uses the electric currency control to perform many processes during power standby The receiver s user manual should contain some description about this system or some other methods of notifying a user should be devised 2 33 ARIB TR B15
248. ier 0x0D includes EUC JP Bulpoo wesbeip 1x9 8 It is also possible to transmit the intraframe only and generate a pseudo still picture display in which case the constraints are as per video encoding Accordingly simultaneous decoding of other video MPEG 1 and 2 is not possible A video decoding control descriptor refer to Section 4 is required for intraframe transmission 9 Streamed packets sized in accordance with MPEG 2 TS multiplexed PES packets 10 In this document the physical pixels in individual planes have been defined as resolutions Where the mono media screen size is different the following principles apply to mapping to the plane 3 14 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 MPEG resolution is defined in terms of the Vertical size Horizontal size and Aspect ratio contained in the Sequence Header of MPEG encoded data The MPEG resolution of video data that can be displayed in the respective video plane resolutions is described below ___ Wideo plane resolution 1920x1080 720x480 720x480 MPEG video MPEG resolution 16 9 16 9 4 3 HD video data 1920x1080 16 9 Cee eee Be I 1440x1080 16 9 O x 1280x720 16 9 O x x SD video data 720x480 16 9 Jaaa Xaaa oe eee X MPEG2 video 544x480 16 9 of x Os Ua X 480x480 16 9 ad Qr 4123 Kia 352x240 16 9 x O x 120x480 4 3 Jaa ad S OR 544x480 4 3 x x O 480x480 4 3 Mootle Oe a 352x240 4 3 x x O 352x240 16 9
249. iewing of linked pre stored data programs rrrrrrrrrrtttettte ttre eter ttt 3 116 9 2 2 service_type of channels that operate linked pre stored data programs vveeeveseseness 3 116 9 2 3 Schedule patterns of linked pre stored data programs and operation restrictions 1117 3 116 9 2 4 Use of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor in linked pre stored data programs 3 117 9 2 4 1 Use of auto_start_flag in linked pre stored data programs eccceeseeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 117 9 2 5 Use of the PMT s target area descriptor in linked pre stored data programs vevevesesese 3 117 9 2 6 Use of the PMT s digital copy control descriptor in linked pre stored data programs 3 118 9 2 7 Use of the p f EIT s data content descriptor in linked pre stored data programs et ese 3 118 9 2 8 Use of the p f EIT s hyperlink descriptors in linked pre stored data programs vevevesess 3 118 9 2 8 1 Types of hyperlink to be Used oo eee eeeesceseceseeeseeeeeeseceseeeseeeseceseeeseeeaeceeeeeeeneeeteeeaees 3 118 9 2 8 2 Hyperlink descriptor operation rules 20 0 eeceeceeseesceeseeeseceesceeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 3 119 9 2 8 3 Program types and transmission of hyperlink descriptors ce eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 119 9 2 8 4 Operation when multiple hyperlink descriptors are pUt ccccecsceesseceeteeeeteeeeteeeseees 3 119 9 2 9 Use of DII related to storage of linked pre stored data programs vevevesesesreneneness 3 119 9 2 10 Use of carousel
250. ifying shown broadcast content The content is not selected if the EIT on demand viewing permission program information precludes real time viewing and a notification message to this effect is displayed Viewing As for channel selection reservation 5 1 12 7 Datacasting program reservation operations Guidelines e Setting a viewing reservation As with ordinary programs that do not involve datacasting services the event viewing start time and other details are reserved Where the schedule EIT at the reservation time contains a data content descriptor the following functionality can be provided to the viewer 1 Content selection This setting ensures that the selected content is displayed first when the reservation is executed rather than the PMT entry component 3 40 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Video recording reservation The required event bit rates for recording media mode selection and bandwidth allocation are determined as described in 5 1 2 7 All other considerations are as per a viewing reservation e Execution of viewing or recording reservation The datacasting display and video recording based on PMT commence at the start time of the reserved event If content is not specified in the viewing reservation then the entry component startup document is displayed if content has been specified then the startup document for the specified content is displayed 5 1 12 8 Partial transport stream input output e
251. igned because captions are often used for prompt reports 4 11 Program reservation B 4 12 Conditional access services A 4 13 User setting function 4 13 1 Password A 4 13 2 Parental level A 4 13 3 Antenna setting A B Manual settings A C N display B 4 13 4 The aspect ratio of the connected TV A 4 13 5 Settings for a telephone line A 4 13 6 Setting for the viewer location A 4 13 7 Download permission setting A 4 13 8 Caption display selection B 4 13 9 Personal data clear function A 4 14 Error messages A 5 Hardware and Software Requirements 5 1 Tuner A 5 2 TS decoder A 5 3 Video decoding and outputting A 5 4 Audio decoding and outputting A Digital audio outputting B 5 5 Memory A 5 5 1 RAM A 5 5 2 NVRAM A 5 6 Character fonts A 5 6 1 Data broadcasting services A 5 6 2 EPG A 5 7 Receiver preinstalled sound A 5 8 High speed digital interfaces B 5 9 CA module interfaces A See Section 5 of Part 1 of this document 5 10 Copy control 5 10 1 Analog video output A 5 10 2 Digital audio output A If a receiver supports digital audio output the priority A is assigned to this function 5 10 3 Hi speed digital interface output A If a receiver is equipped with a hi speed digital interface the priority A is assigned to this function 5 10 4 Digital video output A If a receiver supports digital video output the priority A is assigned to this function 5 10 5 Digital video and audio output A If a receiver sup
252. in 4 1 2 Receiver reference model 4 5 1 RAM Receiver units contain various forms of memory as illustrated in the reference model This section describes Bcontents and XfrBA which are envisaged as RAM based memory Table 4 9 shows the RAM sizes For details refer to 4 1 2 Receiver reference model Table 4 9 RAM Item Memory specifications Minimum Recommended At least 2MB At least 8MB XfrBA 256KB Buffer sizes for subtitles and superimposed text are described in Chapter 7 3 22 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 5 2 NVRAM The main types of non volatile receiver memory used for datacasting are BproNV for individual user information and broadcaster specific information and BcontentsNV for MM content as shown in the reference model BproNV is described in 8 2 1 and 8 2 2 The broadcaster specific area broadcaster specific information can read and write only from MM content including stored MM content that has been obtained from broadcasts by the receiver The user cannot read or write to the broadcaster specific area by using other receiver functions or connecting an external device to the receiver In order to satisfy these constraints the broadcaster specific area should ideally be located in an internal memory device such as NVRAM Since the storage function is optional for BcontentsNV implementation and the capacity are receiver dependent For details refer to 4 1 2 Receiver reference model NVRAM in the receiver
253. in the entry component of the relevant linked pre stored data program If the setting is 0 does not launch the data broadcasting engine and waits until the Data button is pressed by the viewer When a linked pre stored data program is not stored If 1 is set to auto_start_flag in the data encoding method descriptor of a data enriched television program launches the data broadcasting engine and starts presenting a startup document in the entry component of the relevant event If the setting is 0 does not launch the data broadcasting engine and waits until the Data button is pressed by the viewer Selecting a television program When a linked pre stored data program is stored If 1 is set to auto_start_flag in a linked pre stored data program launches the data broadcasting engine and starts presenting a startup document in the entry component of the relevant linked data program If the setting is 0 does not launch the data broadcasting engine and waits until the Data button is pressed by the viewer Selecting a linked pre stored data program Does not play data because for linked pre stored data programs real time viewing is prohibited in the PMT s on demand viewing permission information Displays a message for a certain time interval Operation when the Data button on the remote control is pressed When viewing a data enriched television program and when data content is inactive When a linked pre stored data
254. in the vertical direction and 480x480 544 480 352 gt 720 in the horizontal direction g P 180x120 360x240 352x240 Magor T ee 0480 ee 4 pixel side panels added to the left and right ends to produce e a a 360x240 display area ee annaa fo erent Lol 90x60 180x120 176x120 720x480 ere 2 pixel side panels added to the left and right ends to produce 180x120 display area Data transmission uses origin position for video display of the top left hand comer of the plane 3 17 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Example 3 Scaling of SD video data 4 3 Display in video plane for Display in video plane for datacasting resolution of datacasting resolution of 720x480 4 3 720x480 4 3 Video data and MPEG resolution scaling ratio 128 128 scaling ratio 64 128 4 3 720x480 720x480 720x480 544x480 Mapped to 480 in the vertical 480x480 direction and 544 480 352 gt 720 in the RRA PEPER ERE EEIT EEEREN horizontal direction 2 fee 360x240 352x240 Fee ee eee eeee ee ee eee eeee eee eeen neat 720x480 720x480 4 pixel side panels added to the left and right ends to produce 360x240 display area 0 o ol etait 180x120 90x60 176x120 Tanne eens eee enna eee eee eeee eee eee 720x480 720x480 2 pixel side panels added to the left and right ends to produce 180x120 display 12 256 128 scaling is used only for images sent in 960x540 resolution and expanded by 2
255. ines for Datacasting ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Contents Lo TWMtrOCUCtlon as a N a O A A E E a ENE ER EE Sp 3 1 kl BSstandard leyel nana ar E e ENE OEE Ea NE e i 3 1 1 2 BS Level 2 nren n a r R a E N E E E E Eaa e iE 3 1 2 Related Documents is ninine a rE A a NE Aa ESE SSIR 3 1 37 Definition of Terms ii a aa hap E E naa E OA E EA Nepi 3 2 4 Basic Receiver Unit Functionality for Reception of Data Broadcasts 0 eseesseeseescenseeneeeteeeneeenneesees 3 5 401 Receiver configuration Asiaa eo ee Pe A ete SA Gh ee et S 3 5 4 1 g 1 Hardware configuration E a A E ENT 3 5 4 1 2 Receiver reference model eee alae w ele s e oid e s e ois 0 s e s a o s vinle G s s s ele s sle c s eid e c e ed e c e 6 dleisic E A AT eis e c e od dleisigs sleieiee s 3 6 4 2 Pr sentation function Si soseer epeen eE Er E per a EE Er Reopens eee eats 3 7 4 2 1 Resolution of planes in display screen and associated restrictions rrr 3 8 4 2 2 Eligible plane combinations and associated restrictions w siaie E ANE EEEE O TEE SA 3 10 4 2 3 Mono media encoding and presentation planes ettetttetteetterttertrrterttt rrtt rt tettet rettent eene 3 13 4 2 4 Audio reproduction function E E O T E A T A E T E E E T sieie e sToiete 3 1 9 4 2 5 Fonts TANPE IETA TECTITI TLETT T IEIET TENTIT Su eiays suis aS oiele bd o Ge wibje use veisieis ot dou TETEE TIIT ITTI vibe us TI EISTE TEOLT TETTI ITT 3 20 Ad Remote controla a a a a aa e R a E E aaa 3 21 4 3 1 Datacasting key
256. ing Operational guidelines for transmission Volume 8 Content protection regulations for joint BS and CS satellite digital receivers This technical document has been produced for the benefit of manufacturers of radio equipment and devices broadcasters and end users ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table of Contents Part 1 Operational Guidelines for BS Digital Satellite Broadcasting Volume 1 Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 4 Volume 5 Volume 6 Volume 7 Volume 8 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for downloading Fascicle 1 Function specifications for BS digital satellite receivers eevevevenenenerereeee Fascicle 1 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for datacasting Fascicle 1 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for PSI SI eevevenene Fascicle 2 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines and reception specifications for Conditional Access System CAS Sie Soio e e eo ovsleje w ele oie TOE EATE T TA TIL PET TEETE eiv e e eieis e 8 0 0 Fascicle 3 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for interactive systems Fascicle 3 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for transmission Fascicle 3 BS digital satellite broadcasting Content protection regulations s Fascicle 3 Part 2 Operational guidelines for CS satellite digital broadcasting and function specifications for joi
257. inition of CGMS A and recording method to a recording media are as follows CGMS A Definition Recording method 0 0 The signals can be copied without CGMS on the recording media needs to remain 0 0 restrictions when the signals are recorded 0 1 Undefined 1 0 Only the first generation can be CGMS on the recording media needs to be changed to 1 copied 1 when the signals are recorded 1 1 The signals cannot be copied The signals must not be recorded 7 2 2 CGMS A transmission method The copy generation management information should be transmitted through one line of a vertical blanking interval in the brightness signals A reference signal 70 of the peak level of white and 20 bit digital signal wave width 70 or 0 should be placed to the valid video portion of this one line This 20 bit digital signal should be used to carry the copy generation management information and other video related information 7 2 2 1 480i composite analog output CGMS A transmission in 4801 composite analog signals must follow the specifications for the identification signal waveform that is described in the following document e JEITA EIAJ CPR 1204 Video ID signal transmission using VBI 525 line system 2 62 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 2 2 2 480i component analog output Multi lines CGMS A should be inserted on the 20 line and 283 line of a vertical blanking interval in the brightness signals Mul
258. initions The MPEG 2 TS is split into individual ES units using a PID filter Next the video and audio elementary streams sent by PES travel are stored in the main buffer Bn via the TBn transport buffer The elementary stream for MM content sent by the data carousel is subject to PID filtering and then Section filtering then stored in Bcontents via TBn In this way the received MM content data is activated via an end user operation The MM engine reads Bcontents data and executes MM content using Bwork as execution memory in accordance with the activation command Meanwhile mono media content sent by the data carousel is transferred from Bcontents to the respective decoders while streamed mono media content is transferred from Bn to the respective decoders Audio mono media content is decoded and then presented via the speaker Video mono media content is decoded into video still picture text diagrams and subtitles then temporarily buffered in respective plane display memory areas then recombined and presented on the monitor Model plane combinations are shown in the following figure Thus still picture and video are converted to effective pixels by area The text diagrams plane is imposed with a transmission coefficient on the combined still picture and video then the text diagrams plane is imposed on the result with the same transmission coefficient to produce the final presentation screen 3 6 BProNv S4 UONI S
259. ion 4 6 E1 Field Details need to reference this field in the schedule EIT for a video viewing or recording reservation The p f EIT value is used for execution E Chapter 9 details the operation for a storage reservation ISO_639_ language code Fixed at jpn Japanese text_length Maximum value is 80 bytes A minimum of 40 bytes is displayed by the receiver as the content title text_char States the title of the content displayed on EPG arib_bxml_info transmission format 00 data carousel and or event message transmission specification auto_start_flag EIT auto start flag is not used Value is always 0 document_resolution Indicates the content resolution and aspect ratio Uses the following three parameters only 0011 960x540 0100 720x480 16 9 0101 720x480 4 3 For details of the datacasting program resolution and aspect ratio control refer to 5 1 12 5 use_xml Value is 0 XML using application dependent tags not sent default_version_flag bml major version bml minor version can be omitted when this flag is 1 using default value for version number This will be interpreted as bml major version 1 bml_minor_version 0 receivable in the basic receiver unit configuration independent_flag As per the specifications Value is 1 if the content transmitted in the event can be viewed independently or 0 otherwise A basic receiver unit without s
260. is also called STB or IRD CA switching service This service displays the broadcasting company s Guidance Channel when an unsubscribed user selects a scramble channel PSI An acronym for Program Specific Information This information is necessary for selecting a specific program and consists of four tables PAT PMT NIT and CAT The MPEG standard and an order from Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications define this information SI An acronym for Service Information This information contains the programs sequence and simplifies program selection An order from Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications defines this information and the ARIB standard defines the contents of this information In addition to extended information defined by the ARIB standard this information contains PSI in the MPEG 2 format EPG An acronym for Electronic Program Guide A receiver uses SI sent from broadcasting companies to construct a program guide from which a user can select a program ES An acronym for Elementary Stream An elementary stream is essentially a collection of encrypted video audio or data within a PES packet An elementary stream is transmitted from a PES packet that has the same stream ID Direct channel selection One of the methods by which a user can select a channel in a receiver A user presses a number key on a remote controller to directly specify the service ID Up and down ch
261. ision of related data at the start of a television program data enriched television program program If multiple television information to be hyperlinked service_id programs data enriched television programs event_id start_time duration etc are linked their information needs to be held all Modules e Components that configure the relevant content written in component_tag e Components written in the p f EIT s component ref 9 2 15 2 General rules on processing when storage is performed 1 All modules that exist in the contents of a linked pre stored data program shall be stored just once Even if 2 3 9 2 15 3 Content updates when a linked pre stored data program is broadcast multiple times 1 2 operation to update carousels is performed in the middle of processing the receiver shall only need to keep one of such modules in storage Carousels shall only need to be stored in sequence component by component A linked pre stored data program shall be broadcast long enough to allow all carousels to be stored in sequence component by component The following is an example of the receiver s storage start operation based on the operation of carousel transmission specified in 9 2 10 Processing when content is updated in another event after storage the version of content with the same ID Acquisition of DII of the entry component shall start 2 seconds after the start time of an event If DII first obtain
262. ission using VBI 750p 11251 system 2 63 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 2 3 Allocation of an identification signal An identification signal consists of 20 bits of information This 20 bit data is divided into WORDO WORD1 WORD2 and CRCC Each division reserves 2 bits 4 bits 8 bits and 6bits respectively See the following diagram for more detail The value 0 unused should be assigned to a bit for which no information is specified Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 i Data WORDO WORD 1 WORD 2 CRCC 2 bits 4 bits 8 bits 6 bits 1 WORDO Information about the aspect ratio WORD 0 Description bitl bit2 0 0 The aspect ratio is 4 3 0 1 The aspect ratio is 4 3 The signal is a letterbox signal 1 0 The aspect ratio is 16 9 2 WORD 1 The header that describes the information stored in WORD2 WORD 1 Description of the information stored in WORD2 bit3 bit4 bits bit6 0 0 0 0 CGMS A information 1 1 1 1 No information is stored in WORD2 Other combinations Undefined 3 WORD2 bit 7 8 9 and 10 If WORD 1 bit 3 to 6 is 0000 the CGMS A information should be stored in bit 7 and 8 of WORD 2 The Analog Protection System value should be stored in bit 9 and 10 of WORD2 b7 b8 CGMS A 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 B9 bl0 Analog Protection System value 0 0 The signal can be c
263. ital copying It must obtain information on APS Control information for analog output copying which is sent as a video ID signal from APS control data Analog video output 1 Macrovision 2 Video ID signal 3 480i composite False synchronization CGMS A pluses Color strips APS 480i component False synchronization CGMS A pluses APS 480p component CGMS A APS 720p component CGMS A APS 10801 component CGMS A APS RGB analog output 4 The same rule applies to analog video output whose format has been converted from the format of the received video signal in the receiver 2 To use the Macrovision pulses and strips a broadcasting company must have a contract with Macrovision No parameters should be transmitted 3 A video ID signal consists of CGMS A information APS information and other information It uses the identification signals superimposed in VBI and transmitted to a receiver See 7 2 3 Allocation of an identification signal in this section 4 For information on RGB analog output see 5 15 4 in this section For information on operation of RGB analog output See Section 6 of Part 1 of this document 2 29 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 10 2 Digital audio output Manufacturers decide whether a receiver should support digital audio output If a receiver needs to support digital audio output it must obtain information from service_type Identification
264. ition to the DSM CC table Carrousel are set out in ARIB STD B21 12 2 2 Transmission Scheme of the Content For information on DII module Info refer to ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 3 1 4 DII Module Info Multi section transmission is permitted for download content 5 2 1 Transmission route For the time being service_id for download content transmission shall be limited to 929 5 2 2 Transmission speed Content may be transmitted at 0 5 slots TS rate 0 5434375 Mbps or two slots TS rate 2 17375 Mbps 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 2 3 Download time period and cycle Download content is sent as a single piece of content using multiple frames where one frame is defined as ten seconds 5 2 3 1 Receiver software updated Figure 5 2 shows the download content transmission schedule The receiver manufacturer supplies the download broadcaster with information about the desired download period number of transmissions and duration in multiples of 10 seconds The download period varies in accordance with the number of units performing downloads The download broadcaster draws up a schedule in consultation with the receiver manufacturers The Carrousel cycle is the maximum number of cycles as an integer that can be sent within the duration specified by the receiver manufacturer in multiples of 10 seconds After content equivalent to the maximum number of cycles has been sent a dummy either null packets or a
265. itmap display and display action or appearance of control code Possible to specify only 16x16 20x20 24x24 30x30 and 36x36 dots Raster color control Action position coordinate setting System data format display dot pattern setting Display position setting a e pattern setting a forward i roe backward i o aea setting ame e setting setting control Character font setting The colored areas shall be full display areas only Possible to use only without ornaments and with boundry highlighting For boundry highlighting usage refer to 7 5 6 Character ornaments setting 3 99 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Character Control function Use Limitations and supplemental remarks x Use MDF Character style E setting PRA Preinstalled sound E playback Define external character substitute code Possible to use the single line word direction scroll with rollout without rollout only and for one location one line only Note that there are limitations on control code combinations Refer to 7 5 7 O Usable A Usable with conditions x Not usable 3 100 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 5 2 Using flashing Flashing for 8 bit unit code strings shall be performed as follows at intervals of approximately one second text shall flash with the foreground color including a halftone color for a 4 step gradation font and background color changing on and off at intervals of 0 5 seco
266. ized in NVRAM 4 13 1 Password A password consists of 4 decimal numbers and is used when a user sets the parental level and unlocks the parental lock At the initial setting a user can freely set a password If the user wants to change the existing password the user should be required to enter the previous password In order to resolve a situation where a user forgets the password the receiver should be implemented with an EMM command password clear command The execution of this command recovers the initial settings For more information see 4 15 3 Password in Section 5 of Part 1 of this document 2 21 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 13 2 Parental level The age range specifiable for the parental level is 4 to 20 As a rule the children s age is entered for the parental level The receiver must not show any programs whose parental rating values exceed the set parental level However once the correct password is entered these prohibited programs must be shown For more information see 4 15 2 Parental level age limit for viewing in Section 5 of Part 1 of this document 4 13 3 Antenna setting The local oscillation frequency of a converter must be 10 678GHz The specification of the initial transmission source that is used during antenna adjustment should follow the description in Section 5 12 of Chapter 5 The receiver should display the antenna level value so that the user can easily install an antenna For example the a
267. language related to linked pre stored independent pre stored data programs e Receivers supporting linked pre stored data programs shall return 1 in response to getBrowserSupport BSP PreStorage combined_prior_data e Receivers supporting independent pre stored data program shall return 1 in response to getBrowserSupport BSP PreStorage basic e Receivers to support either linked pre stored data programs or independent pre stored data program shall support the programmed storage related API in the procedural scripting language that will be specified in the following section as a broadcaster extended API 9 4 1 Programmed storage related function X BSP preStoragelsReserved Checks whether or not storage of the specified program has been reserved with an event Syntax Number X_BSP_preStoageIsReserved input String event_ref input Date startTime Arguments event_ref Specifies an event startTime Start time of an event Return value 1 Storage already programmed 0 Not programmed NaN Unsuccessful Description Checks whether or not with an event storage reservation is operative for the program which is scheduled to start at the time specified by startTime and which is specified by event_ref and responds with a return value How to write event_ref shall follow the specifications for name spaces in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Chapter 9 3 128 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 X BSP preStorageReserve Reserv
268. lay Value of Memory bytes bits bits aspect ratio format logo_type required per logo HD large 36 64 Square pixel 9 16 0x05 1152 HD small 27 48 Square pixel 9 16 0x02 972 SD4 3 large 36 72 1 118 1 9 16 0x03 1296 SD4 3 small 24 48 1 118 1 9 16 0x00 864 SD16 9 large 36 54 1 118 1 333 9 16 0x04 972 SD16 9 small 24 36 1 118 1 333 9 16 0x01 648 The design and color must be the same within the service irrespective of size pattern differences Logo data designs may only use the 128 common fixed colors No other colors may be used Prior to compression the logo data must use 8 bit color per dot The color palette of common fixed colors is used to convert between dot color values and the actual colors to be displayed The color palette and the common fixed colors are stipulated in Common Fixed Colors and Conversion Table Ed 3 PNG is used to compress logos PNG employs the following format as per W3C Recommendations 1996 10 01 Version 1 0 1 Only IHDR IDAT and IEND chunks may be used 2 THDR description consists of the following information Width 4 bytes Height 4 bytes Color depth 1 byte Color type 1 byte Compression 1 byte Filtering 1 byte Interlace 1 byte 3 All other parameters are as per Ed 3 Number of horizontal dots in logo Number of vertical dots 8 As per Ed 3 The logo ID reference service ID and logo data associated with a logo are all sent in th
269. lay when receiving and selective display when recording playing 3 78 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 ISO_639_language_code Language code to be used format 1000 960x540 horizontal writing 1001 960x540 vertical writing 1010 720x480 horizontal writing 1011 720x480 vertical writing TCS 00 8 unit code data_unit_loop length As per the specifications However 1 PES packet shall not exceed 32KB in size data_unit Stores a data unit text and DRCS 7 2 6 Using caption text data It is possible to put multiple data units of the same or different data unit parameters into the same caption text data When multiple data units exist in the same caption text data they shall be processed in order of appearance Table 7 6 shows parameters that can be set for caption text data Table 7 6 Caption text data parameters Field TMD 00 free O1 real time Superimposed text only However set the same value as caption management data holds in the same program STM As per the specifications Shall be enabled only when the PMT s data encoding descriptor timing 10 time synchronization data_unit_loop_length As per the specifications However 1 PES packet shall not exceed 32KB in size data_unit Stores a data unit text DRCS and bitmap data 7 2 7 Using data units Table 7 7 shows parameters that can be set for data units Table 7 7 Data unit
270. laying a system menu Menu button Data broadcasting service For details see 4 3 Remote in Section 3 of Part of this document The following buttons are used in data broadcasting Data button Arrow buttons OK button Ten key Color button Return button Color buttons must be positioned in the following sequence from the left side Blue Red Green and Yellow The color of each color button must also be distinguishable with attached letters Therefore the letters Blue Red Green and Yellow must be placed near appropriate buttons Others A button for displaying related video Video button 2 Buttons for switching to an audio ES and switching the language Audio button Buttons for switching subtitle availability and the language of the subtitle Subtitle button One touch buttons Manufacturers may decide to preset one touch buttons so that their numbers correspond to the numbers in some program charts in newspaper or magazines This document does not specifically define any recommended appearance and design of these buttons Instead only a recommended example Button A to L is provided Note that users should be able to change the numbers that are set for these buttons after they purchase a receiver Video button A video button must be implemented with all of the following switching functions Manufacturers can freely decide how to implement these functions 1 Switching between multiple TV services This function enabl
271. ll be the upper left corner of the display area in horizontal writing and the upper right corner of the display area in vertical writing And the action direction shall be to the right in horizontal writing and down in vertical writing Action direction Display block Action direction a In horizontal writing b In vertical writing Figure 7 2 Initial action position and action direction 7 4 Characters used in subtitles and superimposed text 7 4 1 Character code The character encoding method used for subtitles and superimposed text shall be 8 unit code For code sets used refer to Chapter 6 Mono media 7 4 2 Character font Maru Gothic is preferable as a character font used in subtitles and superimposed text 3 82 7 4 3 Font size ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Five font sizes shall be made available that can be displayed in subtitles and superimposed text 16 dots 20 dots 24 dots 30 dots and 36 dots For the font size for transmission specify any of the above In addition standard medium and small can be used for each size The following shows the definitions of standard medium and small Standard Characters whose size is specified by the control code SSM Medium Half width characters in relation to standard characters Small Half size width and height characters in relation to standard characters Table 7 14 shows limitations on character display Table 7 14 Range of code sets usable
272. ll icon or equivalent on the screen The user then accesses the menu to display the selected content Thus content is not displayed without direct user intervention This procedure is designed to cause minimal disturbance to program enjoyment For more information about required functions refer to ARIB STD B21 Section 12 3 1 Necessary Functions For examples of when downloads are performed and how the outcomes are evaluated see ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 5 1 4 Download Determinations and Outcomes 6 2 2 Reception function This function receives download software sent via DSM CC data Carrousel on the basis of notification information and stores it in non volatile memory 1 Downloaded software is subject to validity and conformance checks then stored in non volatile memory in accordance with notification information 2 Downloads are performed in accordance with notification information Where schedule information exists downloads may also be performed in standby mode in accordance with schedule information If no schedule information exists the download may be performed when the power is switched off provided that the software downloading process does not impact on program viewing including reservation viewing Once writing to non volatile memory begins receiver operations can be barred until writing is finished Operational scenarios are described in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 5 1 1 Receiver Download Ope
273. load content for receiver software updates and data common to all receivers in accordance with these operational guidelines 7 2 2 2 Model TS multiplexed with other services should be configured as stipulated in Sections 4 and 7 Additional operations associated with engineering services are subject to the following e service_type for NIT service list descriptors is OxA4 engineering service 1 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e SDTT Table cycle for BIT NO 1 loop SI transmission parameters descriptor is not used e data_component_id in PMT data encoding format descriptor is 0x9 ARIB Data Download Format Additional_data_component_info is not sent e PMT always contains the nine PID and Component tag values described in Section 5 2 4 The Component_tag value for data common to all receivers is 0x79 and for receiver software is a sequentially allocated value between 0x71 and 0x78 e PCR is not always sent for engineering services In order to provide sufficient transmission capacity with download content for future needs one solution is to use engineering slots for independent TS transmission in accordance with the following guidelines Whichever approach is adopted the selection will be made automatically and the update performed when the power is turned off after viewing another TS service The following statement will be displayed if the viewer directly specifies using the service id a service whose service ty
274. lowing the flowchart in Figure 13 1 Identification flow of broadcasting non broadcasting in ARIB STD B21 This operation is possible through analysis of the system management descriptor contained in PSI 4 2 Remote controller Main functions of a receiver should be accessible from a remote controller hereafter abbreviated as a remote A remote should be implemented with all buttons described in ARIB STD B21 4 4 16 Remote controller and channel access 1 Necessary buttons and some additional buttons that enable a user to access the following functions The following example shows a recommended design of a remote but does not restrict further addition of other buttons 1 Basic operations A power button for turning on or off standby the power of a receiver Buttons for moving a cursor vertically and horizontally Arrow buttons These buttons may be substituted with a joystick A button for executing an action associated with the selection item where the cursor is positioned OK button 2 6 2 3 4 5 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Channel selection Number buttons for entering a channel number and selecting a channel Ten key Up and down buttons for switching channels One touch buttons for directly selecting a channel whose service ID can be preset 1 For example 12 buttons from A to L Operation of EPG and others A button for displaying a program list EPG button A button for disp
275. ls by video or sound The above includes not identifiable information when used alone that can be easily associated with other information to eventually ascertain the identity of the relevant individual In addition from the viewpoint of protection of viewers benefits data such as points used as substitutes for prizes games gifts requires much care in handling and shall be thus treated as private information in the present guidelines 3 How to identify viewers Presentation of private information data erasure and data restoration by data broadcasting content are assumed to be performed based on viewers approval As a mechanism for identification of viewers e Identifying individuals by passwords e Identifying receivers through B CAS card IDs e Identifying households by caller ID notifications can be considered 3 150 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Guidelines on the function to present private information handling rules by data broadcasting content e Itis preferable that the following is mentioned in Membership rules FAQ and Help 1 Registered information is stored in the receiver 2 Private information stored in the receiver shall be managed on the responsibility of the user of the service member and needs to be erased by the user of the service member by him herself in the event of transfer of the receiver s ownership or for disposal of the receiver 3 The provider of the relevant service shall manage r
276. m 9 3 14 1 Information to be stored when storage is performed The following shows information to be stored into media when an independent pre stored data program is stored Table 9 11 Information to be stored when an independent pre stored data program is stored Remarks BIT broadcaster_id Required for access to the NVRAM broadcaster specific area PMT independent_flag Digital copy control descriptor DI Module information descriptors Type Expire CompressionType Control EIT Content name content_id Modules Components that configure the relevant content written in component_tag Components written in the p f EIT s component ref 9 3 14 2 General rules on processing when storage is performed Shall be the same as specifications related to linked pre stored data programs Refer to 9 2 15 2 3 127 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 3 15 Preferable EPG display related to independent pre stored data program Table 5 12 shows the requirements for preferable EPG display related to independent pre stored data program Table 9 12 Preferable EPG display related to independent pre stored data program Display indicating Display when an Displays the title of the relevant independent presence of stored independent pre stored data pre stored data program in the pane assigned to data program is already stored already stored data programs 9 4 Extension of BML procedural scripting
277. m list Program selection should be available from a program list that can be displayed from a currently watched program 4 6 Video audio and subtitle switching All the functions described in this section are required in a receiver unit However manufacturers can freely decide how to implement these functions 4 6 1 Default ES When a user selects a service and there is no specific ES that needs to be decoded first the default ES a receiver need to decide which ES should be decoded first from multiple ESs For more information on how to decide the default ES see 5 1 3 Default ES in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document 4 6 2 Video ES selection Multiple video ESs may be sent from a single service A user should be able to select all ESs When a user first moves to a channel the default ES should be selected A user should be able to use the video button of a remote to switch from one ES to another in a circular manner Manufacturers can freely decide how to implement a function for decoding and displaying multiple ESs at the same time If a manufacturer decides to implement a function for decoding multiple ESs at the same time a receiver must provide an interface by which a user can decide whether to display a single ES or multiple ESs at the same time If a receiver is implemented with the multi view TV function the receiver must switch from one ES to another as a user moves from one view to another These ESs are grouped together by
278. mated transmission speeds below The SDTT is not sent if no download schedule exists If the SDTT has not been received after waiting for at least 10 minutes the receiver may assume there to be no SDTT for the current day Note however that the 1 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 absence of SDTT transmission for a given TS may in fact be due to an equipment fault e Estimated transmission speeds o Assumptions used in calculation e Maximum length of individual SDTT sections 4 096 bytes e Maximum number of sections 180 e No multi section transmission for TS packets e Sent once every ten minutes o The number of TS packets required for each section is 4096 183 23 TS packets o The number of TS packets required for the entire table is 23 x 180 4140 TS packets o The average TS rate based on one sent every 10 minutes is 4140 x 188 x 8 600 10 38 kbps 5 1 3 1 Receiver software updates The SDTT schedule information frequency may be reduced in line with the maximum sub table size and transmission cycle and speed 5 1 3 2 Data common to all receivers The number of schedule information loops is 0 The SDTT is sent simultaneously with the Carrousel that transmits the download content but not at any other time 5 1 4 SDTT updates The SDTT is normally updated once per day at 0 00 a m From time to time it is also updated on an ad hoc basis as necessary 5 1 5 TS packet conversion of SDTT and associated transmis
279. mber The Service List Descriptor is contained in the second loop TS loop of the NIT For example if the service_id is 101 0x0065 the 3 digit number should be 101 If no information can be obtained from the NIT the previously set 3 digit number should be used de date string res duration 1 string This property represents the time when a receiver started to accumulate the contents The format for this property must be the same for the upnp scheduledStartTime property of a channel item For example if a receiver started to accumulate the program contents at 7 am on Jun 17 2005 the formatted value for this property should be 2005 06 17T07 00 00 This property represents the duration of accumulation for the contents upnp scheduledStartTime O string This property indicates the start time of an event As a general rule the converted form of the start_time that represents the start time of the event should be assigned to this property The start_time must be converted from the format MJD BCD to the following format specified in the DLNA guidelines The latter format is the same format for dc date The start_time is contained in the event loop of the EIT If the TOT does not exist the following format should be applied CCYY MM DDTHH MM SS If the summer time offset value is set in the TOT due to the introduction of summer time the time offset HHH MM should be attached to the
280. message such as Reception has been switched to the lower layer video e Detection of layers 1 2 3 A receiver must evaluate the error rate of 8PSK within a single carrier or other equivalent information detected during demodulation in order to determine which layer should be used The receiver does not need to evaluate the error rates of QPSK and BPSK A receiver must determine whether hierarchical modulation signals exist by examining the above information and the Hierarchical Transmission Descriptor in the PMT and obtain an ESPID for each layer The sender of a service can only use the PMT to indicate whether the current service uses the hierarchical modulation The PMT does not contain any other information A receiver must allow a user to use the multiple ES selection function to deliberately choose the lower layer signals 2 14 4 7 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Transmission of static images A receiver must be capable of displaying a static image that has been sent as a MPEG2 I picture through the MPEG TS The following conditions must be met for a static image to be sent through the MPEG TS e The sequence header and end code must be attached to the I picture e A video control descriptor must be included in the PMT The static image flag field of this descriptor must be 1 Reception of signals sent through Emergency Warning System EWS See 6 3 Emergency Warning System EWS in Section 7 of P
281. mmed storage shall be performed on all the components referenced by component_ref in a data content descriptor 4 Programmed storage of events shall be permitted only when all the contents have the file storable flag set to 1 9 2 14 2 How to calculate the size of content The size of content shall be judged by a total of component_size values of content referenced by entry_component and component_ref in the data content descriptor 9 2 14 3 Autodetect of a stored program If multiple linked pre stored data programs are linked to a television program or data enriched television program to be reserved if there are multiple hyperlink descriptors with the hyperlink type set as combined_prior_data how to select a stored program shall depend on the receiver However selection based on the following criteria is preferable 1 Based on the content size calculated of all the events judged as storable on the receiver an event with the greatest size shall be selected If there are multiple events with the same size which is the greatest one of them shall be selected 2 Ofall the hyperlink descriptors to be put in the EIT of a television program or data enriched television program a one to be written first shall take precedence By using the above criteria an attempt shall be made to store any one of events Processing when a storage attempt fails shall depend on implementation but it is preferable to try again as much as possible In addition
282. multaneously use a maximum of 188 DRCS characters for subtitles and superimposed text each If patternData of multiple sizes are arranged into a 1CharacterCode each piece of data shall be counted as 1 patternData shall transmit design frame 4 step graduation data Table 7 20 DRCS pattern setting parameters Field Usage NumberOfCode _ As per the specifications CharacterCode As per the specifications NumberOfFont As per the specifications fontld Only 0 can be specified A value other than 0 shall be interpreted as 0 mode Only 0001 can be specified depth Only 2 can be specified width As per the specifications 1 height As per the specifications 1 patternData As per the specifications 1 Specify a size defined in 7 4 3 Font size 3 103 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 7 Using initialization The receiver shall behave according to the timing and items of initialization defined as follows as well as the details described in ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 3 Chapter 8 Initialization When channel selection is performed all the items to be initialized relating to captioning shall be initialized 7 7 1 Initialization through caption management When the data group of the received caption management data changes from Group A to Group B or from Group B to Group A the receiver shall perform initialization for the caption management at the time of updating defined in ARIB STD B24
283. n a basic receiver unit with no storage function a flag value of 1 means viewable and any other value means it is not viewable 3 33 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Field Details file_storable_flag Indicates whether the content is storable 0 Not storable content 1 Storable content A flag value of 0 indicates that the content is not storable Such as local content that can change during an event or content that the commissioning broadcaster does not want stored A basic receiver unit without storage function does not need to reference this flag arib_carousel_info num of carousels When num_of_carousels 0 this means that all subsequent carousel information is undefined and p f EIT will contain confirmed information num_of_carousels is not 0 This value is not referenced for viewing and recording reservations E Where num_of_carousels 0 is used in schedule EIT storage reservation is not permitted component_tag As per the specifications Where content is selected from EPG or equivalent the startup document is obtained presented from the component specified in this tag value event section flag Always 1 component_size_flag default_transaction_id_ flag As per the specifications Where the component_size field is not used for instance due to lack of confirmation the value is 0 Flag value is 0 transaction_id not encoded Thus transaction_id is not used in this descriptor
284. n a hexadecimal number string in the format of xxxx Possible to set only the network ID 0006 or 0007 of a wide band CS digital broadcaster described in ARIB TR B15 Part 2 Section 7 Note that if the string 1 is set to both 2nd and 3rd elements the right to access the part of the NVRAM area with the relevant blockNumber for other broadcasters shall be set to not accessible Third element Broadcaster ID broadcaster__id expressed in a hexadecimal number string in the format of xx Possible to set only the broadcaster IDs of wide band CS digital broadcasters described in ARIB TR B15 Part 2 Section 7 Note that if the string 1 is set to both 2nd and 3rd elements the right to access the part of the NVRAM area with the relevant blockNumber for other broadcasters shall be set to not accessible Fourth element Service ID service_id expressed in a hexadecimal number string in the format of xxxx Possible to set only the service ID of wide band CS digital broadcasters described in ARIB TR B15 Part 2 Section 7 Note that if the 4th element is omitted the right to access the part of the NVRAM area with the relevant blockNumber for all the services of all the broadcasters specified in the 3rd element shall be set to accessible e Array of access right information The date the access right in X_BPA_setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider which sets access right information changed shall
285. n of Radio Industries and Businesses General Notes to the English translation of ARIB Standards and Technical Reports 1 The copyright of this document is ascribed to the Association of Radio Industries and Businesses ARIB 2 All rights reserved No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of ARIB 3 The ARIB Standards and ARIB Technical Reports are usually written in Japanese and approved by the ARIB Standard Assembly This document is a translation into English of the approved document for the purpose of convenience of users If there are any discrepancies in the content expressions etc between the Japanese original and this translated document the Japanese original shall prevail 4 The establishment revision and abolishment of ARIB Standards and Technical Reports are approved at the ARIB Standard Assembly which meets several times a year Approved ARIB Standards and Technical Reports in their original language are made publicly available in hard copy CDs or through web posting generally in about one month after the date of approval The original document of this translation may have been further revised and therefore users are encouraged to check the latest version at an appropriate page under the following URL http www arib or jp english index html ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Preface The Association of Radio
286. n_number should be incremented by 1 However it is not mandatory the value for version_number does not need to be consecutive If a partial TS time descriptor has been inserted to the first loop of an SIT JST_time can be used to indicate the time when the stream is output Every time a table that updates the value of JST_time is inserted to the SIT the version number of the SIT must be incremented However the SIT must indicate that the other descriptors in the SIT have not been updated or modified To do so the value 0 must be assigned to the other_descriptor_status bit of the partial transport time descriptor 6 2 4 2 Descriptors that can be inserted to an SIT Table 6 16 shows the descriptors that can be used to an SIT Table 6 16 Descriptors that can be used in an SIT Tag Descriptor Insertion Loop Pees eee 0x48 Service Descriptor O BP Ox4E Extended Event Descriptor Oi 0x54 Content Descriptor 2 0x55 Parental Rate Descriptor 2 0xC4 Audio Component Descriptor OxC5 HyperLink Descriptor O P OxC7 Data Contents Descriptor _ _ _ p 2 49 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Ox42__ Stuffing Descriptor P p me R Transport Stream Descriptor 0xD6 Event Group Descriptor Must be inserted to the appropriate descriptor field within a table O Can be inserted to the appropriate descriptor field within a table Required to be inserted to
287. nates the control code SDP specifies from the upper left corner of the caption plane refer to Figure 7 1 The origin 0 0 of coordinates in the display area shall be the upper left corner of Caption plane regardless of whether the format is based on vertical or horizontal writing For subtitles and superimposed text it shall be made possible to set one display area each at the same time In addition the display area is valid for bitmap data too Priorities among the values for the display area shall be 1 Values specified by SDF and SDP in the text of caption text data 2 Values specified by SDF and SDP in the text of updated caption management data 3 Initial values based on the display format specified by the header of updated caption management data In the above case the initial values for the display area display dot pattern shall be as shown in Table 7 13 Note that the values for font size character spacing and line spacing shall be set as shown in Table 7 15 3 81 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Specified by SDP Caption plane Display area Specified by SDF Figure 7 1 Caption plane and display area Table 7 13 Display area and display position initial values Display format 960x540 960x540 0 0 720x480 720x480 0 0 7 3 3 Initial action position The initial action position shall be the first position of the first line based on the font size in the initial state The first position of the first line sha
288. nce message As with BS Level 1 in BS Level 3 if STC circles back to 0 during transmission of a NPT reference message the receiver shall be surely notified through the STCmax reference message that NPT will become unstable For details refer to section 5 3 4 4 10 4 4 Route certificate transmission In BS Level 3 broadcasters providing interactive services through TLS or SSL shall always transmit route certificates by using the module_id 0xFFFF module in the entry component of a data broadcasting service For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 2 3 1 8 3 135 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 10 5 Guidelines on use of content In BS Level 3 content using the functionality defined in terrestrial digital broadcasting can be used in BS digital broadcasting too The following shows the guidelines 10 5 1 Identification of terrestrial and satellite common use receivers For BML1 0 content its BML3 0 support can be identified by specifying BML version for functionname and 3 0 for additionalinfo respectively in getBrowserSupport To specify a name space for other media whether or not the receiver supports the target media shall be checked through isSupportedMedia Identification of a receiver as a terrestrial and satellite common use one shall not be made by judgment on whether or not it supports BML3 0 Checking of BML3 0 support and identification as a terrestrial and satellite receiver shall be performed separately 10 5
289. nd end code for each code set in accordance with the specifications in ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 2 section 7 1 However character sets such as single plane and double plane JIS compatible kanji supplemental symbols and DRCS shall be excluded For the specifications of display formats etc refer to Table 7 14 Use a code structure extension method call control control over code instructions and end code for each code set in accordance with the specifications in ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 2 section 7 1 However character sets such as single plane and double plane JIS compatible kanji and supplemental symbols shall be excluded For the specifications for display formats etc refer to Table 7 14 The rows 87 88 of the kanji set are used as DRCS areas in accordance with the specifications in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Appendix 2 4 1 Character encoding Used as specified in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Appendix 2 4 1 Character encoding For 8 unit character code referenced by a BML document internally and externally the rows 87 88 in the kanji set shall be shared as DRCS areas Only default macros is used Row 90 and row 91 shall not be used 3 72 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 4 1 3 Character code initialization operation For objects contained in a BML document that reference 8 unit code character code initialization object by object shall be performed when their presentation starts The initial v
290. nd satellite common use receivers as an optional function in BML1 0 and BML3 0 Functions and specifications related to the print function shall be compliant with ARIB STD B24 Section 2 7 6 17 Print related function and Section 2 Appendix 1 Guidelines on the Print Function 10 7 1 Extended API group The print function is an option in the implementation of the receiver for use in content therefore the processing capability of the relevant function on the receiver shall be examined by specifying APIGroup for functionname and a value specified in B24 Section 2 Appendix 1 for additionalinfo in the getBrowserSupport function so that the relevant function shall be called only when the processing capability is available The print related functions can be classified into the following two groups A Group of functions for printing by using printers e getPrinterStatus e printFile e printTemplate e printUri e printStaticScreen B A group of functions for storing data for print to memory cards e savelmageToMemoryCard e saveHttpServerImageToMemoryCard e saveStaticScreenToMemoryCard Receivers that support the print function shall be able to process either of or both the above A and B 3 145 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 10 7 2 Print data format For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 6 2 2 10 7 3 Supplementary items regarding API for print related functions Specifications for resolutions in da
291. nds each or bitmap data shall flash with the flashing color which is specified by the FLC header defined in ARIB STD B24 Bitmap Pattern Code Encoding and raster color if not specified a transparent color changing on and off at intervals of 0 5 seconds each The timing of starting flashing shall be when flashing specified text is first drawn or when a bitmap pattern is drawn after flashing colors are specified by bitmap data s FLC header The relevant text or pixels finish flashing when initialization is performed for the caption management at the time of updating or when display screen erasure is instructed by CS 7 5 2 1 Limitations e For the number of flashing colors besides 128 common fixed colors for non flashing text and bitmap data it shall be made possible to specify a total of 24 colors halftone colors for a 4 step gradation font included together for 8 unit code string flashing and to specify a total of 16 colors together for bitmap data flashing From the 128 common fixed colors it is possible to freely specify a total of 24 colors 24 colors for text together for subtitles and a total of 40 colors 24 colors for text 16 colors for bitmap data together for superimposed text e Only positive phase flashing is used It is prohibited to specify flashing and boundary highlighting together It is prohibited to specify flashing and scrolling together 7 5 3 Raster color control Boxing shall be performed on the entire di
292. ne Eligible 8 bit character code mono media Bitmap data code From any pixel to any other pixel for both x and y coordinates Any number of pixels for both x and y coordinates Subtitles and superimposed text should not normally coincide although this may occur on occasion For more details refer to 7 9 Switched Switching From any pixel in both x and y coordinates video still picture position plane Any number of pixels for both x and y coordinates Display switching Display switching is receiver dependent effect 1 Pixel is defined as per ARIB STD B24 2 Applications that require minimal or no changes in the layering order of still picture text and diagrams or redrawing after movement are recommended Redrawing should not cause failure of the receiver display Restrictions on layering of still picture generated in combination with video are described in 4 2 2 PN M code From any pixel to any other pixel for both x and y coordinates Text diagrams Eligible 8 bit character code including EUC JP Any number of pixels for both x and y coordinates 3 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 2 2 Eligible plane combinations and associated restrictions As shown in the reference model the presentation screen is a combination of the various planes Table 4 3 shows the rules for combining planes Table 4 3 Eligible plane combinations and restrictions Resolution Video still picture planes text diagrams pla
293. ned In addition when the viewer s place of residence information is not set 255 shall be returned for regiontype of prefecture 0 shall be returned for regiontpe of regioncode and an empty string shall be returned for regiontype of zipcode 8 3 Using remote control keys from MM services 8 3 1 Possible values for used key list attributes The following table shows correspondence between remote control keys and lt key group gt values that can be set to used key list of style attributes which control exclusive operations between the BML browser and the channel selection function to be processed by remote control keys lt key group gt Table 8 5 Meaning Possible key group values Basic Arrow keys t 4 gt lt Enter key Back key data button Color keys blue red green yellow numeric tuning Channel selection numeric keys 0 to 9 10 11 12 etc other tuning Channel selection related keys one touch select button channel up down key video key e Control over the Data button through used key list attributes shall be prohibited if the Data button is pressed while the BML browser is active processing should be handled by the BML browser e Ifa key with a channel selection function other than the ones shown above exists whether or not it is to be included in other tuning shall depend on the receiver 3 111 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 3 2 Correspondence bet
294. nents have region descriptors that do not include the receiver s region information the superimposed text is not displayed There is no need to inform the viewer In all cases if region information has not been set for the receiver viewing restrictions do not apply In addition 5 1 12 9 describes the EPG display when region descriptors exist 5 1 7 p f EIT data content descriptors usage For details of the data content descriptors for subtitles and superimposed text refer to Chapter 7 There may be more than one data content descriptor per event Some multimedia datacasting service events have no data content descriptors Not all broadcast content has data content descriptors The maximum number of data content descriptors in an event is 32 Table 5 5 describes p f EIT data content descriptors while Figure 5 2 shows the content and ES structure Table 5 5 Usage of data content descriptors Field Details entry_component Specifies the component containing the startup module for the relevant local content num of component ref Not referenced since the receiver has no use for num of component ref for the schedule EIT component ref States the components used to transmit carousels other than the entry carousel the relevant audio and video streams and the component used to transmit the event message p f EIT is treated as containing the confirmed value The receiver does not 3 32 ARIB TR B15 Vers
295. neral purpose route certificate area shall be commonly shared among media For the NVRAM area spaces for media the settings for capacity and access from other media permitted or prohibited are as follows RW Both reading and writing permitted R Only reading permitted x Both reading and writing prohibited Functions that have been defined after the start of operation They shall be made optional and both reading and writing shall be permitted only when permitted by access right information set by a BS broadcaster s service For details refer to 8 2 3 Table 10 2 Terrestrial and satellite common use receiver s NVRAM and access from other media permitted or prohibited Area name Access from BS Access from Access from wide band CS terrestrial Broadcaster common area RW x Broadcaster specific area RW RW RW Broadcaster specific broadcasting x and communication common area Wide band CS Broadcaster common area Broadcaster specific area Broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common area Terrestrial Broadcaster common area a Broadcaster specific area Affiliate specific area Access permitted to BS broadcasters defined as affiliates by the extended broadcaster descriptor in terrestrial broadcasting 3 133 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common area Access from wide band CS Access from BS Access from terrestrial
296. nes and subtitle planes can only be combined when they are at the same resolution and same aspect ratio Note however that 960x540 for the text diagrams and subtitles planes are treated as 1920x1080 3 4 In the switched still picture video plane the 1 2x1 2 resolution of the switched still picture video planes is treated as the same resolution as the switched plane 5 Area for switched still A rectangle area must be designated for either video or still picture 6 picture video plane Maximum number of Where the rectangular area is for video the maximum number of areas is 1 areas for video and Where all rectangular areas are still picture the maximum number of areas is still picture 4 7 3 Where the video aspect suddenly changes for instance due to interruption by an emergency broadcast the combined television broadcast and datacast display is maintained even if this is different to datacast resolution The display operation in this situation is receiver dependent For more information about operational guidelines for receivers refer to Chapter 5 Data Transmission Specification Usage 4 Datacasting resolution refers to combinations with text diagrams subtitles and video and still picture planes that can be used simultaneously with datacasts It is defined as shown below 3 10 Datacasting resolution 960x540 16 9 720x480 16 9 720x480 4 3 plane resolution Text diagram
297. nize with the program As a general rule if the value 1 is assigned to both the arib dataProgramInfo and associated_contents flag in the selector area of the Data Contents Descriptor the value 1 should be assigned to this property Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned arib multiViewInfo boolean This property indicates whether Multi View TV MVTYV is being used As a general rule if the component_group_type of the Component Group Descriptor in the EIT is 000 the value 1 should be assigned to this property Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned to this property arib captionInfo boolean This property indicates whether subtitles or captions are being used As a general rule the value 1 should be assigned to this property if the data_component_id is 0008 or a subtitle ES exists within a program Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned If one service_id contains multiple subtitle ESs multiple instances of this property can be set for a channel item The property instance that corresponds to the default ES must be placed first Arib multiESInfo boolean This property indicates whether multiple video ESs or audio ESs are present in a program As a general rule if multiple Component Descriptors or Audio Component Descriptors are placed in the EIT the value 1 should be assigned to this property If only one descriptor is placed in the EIT the value 0 should be
298. nked pre stored data programs for the same television program or data enriched television program multiple hyperlink descriptors shall be put for the EIT of that television program or data enriched television program 3 Linkage may be specified from a linked pre stored data program to multiple television programs or data enriched television programs that provide different services at the same start time for the same duration In such a case multiple hyperlink descriptors shall be put for the EIT of that linked pre stored data program 4 Times of link source events and link destination events shall not layering each other 5 Hyperlinks across TSs may be used 9 2 8 3 Program types and transmission of hyperlink descriptors Table 9 4 Program types and transmission of hyperlink descriptors Program types Transmission details Television program May send a hyperlink descriptor hyper_linkage_type 0x80 If a linked pre stored data program exists Data enriched television May send a hyperlink descriptor hyper_linkage_type 0x80 If a linked program pre stored data program exists Linked pre stored data Always sends a hyperlink descriptor hyper_linkage_type 0x81 programs 9 2 8 4 Operation when multiple hyperlink descriptors are put The following describes operation when multiple hyperlink descriptors hyper_linkage_type 0x80 from a television program or data enriched television program to a linked pre stored data
299. nput String blockNumber input Array permissionData Arguments blockNumber Block number of the NVRAM area to which the right of access is set permissionData Access right information Return value 1 Success NaN Unsuccessful Description Sets the access right specified in permissionData to a block that has been specified by blockNumber for the local part of the broadcaster specific area A block number 0 15 for the 3 108 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 local part of the broadcaster specific NVRAM area shall be written to blockNumber To specify multiple blocks the setting should be made per block multiple times For the array specified as permissionData refer to Table 8 2 If X_BPA_setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider has never been executed for some part of the BS broadcaster specific area the state of that part shall be such that access permission for other broadcasters has never been granted In other words the above state is equal to the state of execution with a valid Update value set to the first element and 1 set to the second and third elements each in the permissionData of X_BPA setAccessInfoOfPersistentArrayForAnotherProvider Table 8 2 Array format for access right information setting permissionData description First element Update date access right information was updated YYYYMMDDHHMM 12 byte decimal number string Second element Network ID original_network_id expressed i
300. nsport packet header The value 1 should be assigned to the payload_unit_start_indicator Table 6 13 shows the output operation rules for each field of a DIT Table 6 13 Output operation rules for a DIT Output operation rule for each field table_id The value 0x7E should be assigned to this field section syntax indicator The value 0 should be assigned to this field section_length The section length of the DIT should be specified The fixed value 0x001 should be assigned to this field transition_flag For information on how to use the bits of this field see 9 1 8 2 in ARIB STD B21 6 2 4 SIT Selection Information Table 6 2 4 1 Structure and operation of an SIT Purpose This table provides summary of SI information that is necessary for providing stream information of a partial TS and service information of the services that are included in the stream Structure Table 6 14 shows the structure of an SIT 2 47 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 14 Structure of an SIT Selection Information Table Data structure Bit Identifier selection_information_section table_id 8 uimsbf section_syntax_indicator 1 bslbf reserved future use 1 bslbf ISO_reserved 2 bslbf section _length 12 uimsbf reserved_future_use 16 bslbf ISO_reserved 2 bslbf version_number 5 uimsbf current_next_indicator 1 bslbf section_number 8 uimsbf last_section_number 8 uimsbf reserv
301. nt BS and CS satellite digital broadcast receivers Volume 1 Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 4 Volume 5 Volume 6 Volume 7 Volume 8 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines for downloading Fascicle 4 Function specifications for joint BS and CS satellite digital broadcast receivers Fascicle 4 Operational guidelines for datacasting to joint BS and CS satellite digital broadcast receivers EE T b a ervis s sieiyio e sieivis e s ereleie s e ejcie e oieis ietoleie s eteia elaie a arela e e eisis ete sre s slejeis eie s e osis s elele e sisteieies Fsscicle 4 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines for PSI SI verre Fascicle 4 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines and receiver specifications for Conditional Access System CAS vrrstrsesteetiseteteitsntitenenteneneeceneneeneneeeeneneenenes Fascicle 4 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines for interactive systems Fascicle 4 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines for transmission Fascicle 4 Content protection regulations for joint BS and CS satellite digital receivers Fascicle 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Part 1 Operational Guidelines for BS Digital Satellite Broadcasting Volume 1 BS Digital Satellite Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Downloading nA A W N e ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Contents Introduction LEIAL ETTE ARR TIS ETTITA RER INEA
302. nt related function s behavior in communication content refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 14 6 16 For the behavior of the data broadcasting reception status refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 12 6 10 5 7 Using name spaces In addition to the previous specifications the following name spaces can be used in BS Level 3 10 5 7 1 Identification of the area shared among terrestrial digital television broadcasters Refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 2 2 However only reading shall be permitted 10 5 7 2 Identification of the area reserved for affiliates of terrestrial digital television broadcasters Refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 2 3 10 5 7 3 Identification of the area reserved for BS digital broadcasters commonly used in both broadcasting and communication To read write information from to the BS digital broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common use area from MM services readPersistentArray writePersistentArray shall execute by interpreting one fixed length block as one file Reading writing information from to the BS digital broadcaster specific broadcasting and communication common use area from MM services shall execute in units of fixed length blocks The URI shown below is used for identification of fixed length blocks nvram lt broadcaster_id gt local_web lt block number gt lt broadcaster_id gt is always omitted and the broadcaster_id of the stream that transported the currently playing
303. nt_start_time and JST_time 1 Offset time should be subtracted from the event_start_time and JST time other_descriptor_status One of the following values should be assigned to this field to indicate the statuses of other descriptors that are inserted to the SIT 0 Other descriptors have not been changed 1 Other descriptors have been changed JST_time_flag This field indicates whether the next field represents JST_time The value 1 should be assigned to this field if the next field represents JST time JST_time The time when the partial TS is output should be assigned to this field The value for this field should be obtained from the JST_time field of the TOT When JST time needs to be updated errors should be within 2 seconds This field should only be inserted to the partial TS time descriptor that is inserted to the 1 loop of the SIT Other notes If one service is inserted to a partial TS this descriptor should only be inserted to either one of the loops in the SIT If the JST_time needs to be described this descriptor should be inserted to the 1 st loop If the time information of the services needs to be described or both the JST_time and time information of the services need to be described this descriptor should be inserted to the hg loop of the SIT 2 58 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 If multiple services are inserted to a partial TS multiple partial
304. ntains the CompressionType descriptor and compression_type 0 Appendix 2 provides more details on compression formats The sum of the original module size and the compressed module size where compression is used must not exceed the maximum module size stated above Table 5 10 shows DDB downloadDataMessage usage Table 5 10 Usage of DDB downloadDataMessage Field Usage Remarks dsmccDownloadDataHeader protocolDiscriminator As per the specifications 0x11 dsmcType As per the specifications 0x03 messageld As per the specifications 0x1003 downloadId As per the specifications Stores same value as DII downloaded adaptationLength For multimedia services 0 dsmccAdaptationHeader is not used moduleld No rules regarding moduleld value moduleVersion Used There is no guarantee that updating will increase the value by 1 blockNumber As per the specifications Value determined by ModuleSize blockSize 3 48 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 3 4 Event messages usage 5 3 4 1 Purpose of event messages e An event message containing a general purpose event message descriptor hereafter general purpose event message can be used to generate an asynchronous or time designated multimedia content interrupt event and send the data associated with the event If NPT is used to designate the time in a general purpose event message or if NPT is used in the multimedia conten
305. ntenna level value may be assigned an approximated value that is twice as large as the C N value dB the 28 9MHz layer of the incoming carrier However manufacturers determine the absolute value of the antenna level In order to accommodate middle width antennas the receiver should be able to display approximately 20 dB Antenna level approximately 40 as the maximum C N value To prepare for an unexpected accident of the satellite the user should at least be able to manually change the frequency setting of the reception transponder which is preset by a manufacturer before shipment 4 13 4 The aspect ratio of the connected TV The aspect ratio should be either 4 3 or 16 9 wide For details on the operation specifications see 6 1 2 Video output signals in ARIB STD B21 4 13 5 Settings for a telephone line A receiver enables a user to set the dial type A user should be able to set both the dial mode DP10 DP20 or PB and optional external phone number For more information on the primary phone line type code numbers for communication companies fixed primary disconnection number and caller ID notification see 6 4 Recommended receiver functions in Section 6 of Part 1 of this document 4 13 6 Setting for the viewer location A receiver should enable a user to specify the following settings in order to identify the viewer location 1 Ward codes A ward code corresponds to a target region descriptor A receiver uses this inform
306. o 1 on the receive side For values such as vbv_buffer_size_value ones that are specified by ISO IEC 13818 2 for each level of Main Profile shall be adopted However regarding the bit_rate_value its maximum value for each level shall be adopted such as 4Mbps for MP LL 15Mbps for MP ML and the maximum transportable rate in BS digital broadcasting for MP H14L and MP HL 3 60 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 2 1 2 Other limitations Scaling shall not be performed MPEG I shall be transported through an image PES stream format identification 0x02 MPEG I and moving pictures MPEG 1 MPEG 2 shall not be presented simultaneously 6 2 2 JPEG Shall be compliant with the BaseLine method ISO IEC 10918 1 ITU T T 81 ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 1 7 2 Colorimetry shall be applied to JPEG colorimetry 6 2 2 1 Encoding parameters Encoding sequence The interleave method shall be applied Not loss free baseline method Sampling factor Shall be YCBCR 4 2 0 Even when receiving data in 4 2 2 format however sampling shall not fail Note that JPEG in 4 2 0 refers to JPEG data in which the values for SOFO marker information H1 V1 H2 V2 and H3 V3 are 2 2 1 1 and 1 1 respectively and also note that JPEG in 4 2 2 refers to only JPEG data in which the values H1 V1 H2 V2 and H3 V3 are 2 1 1 1 and 1 1 respectively 6 2 2 2 Scaling Only 128 128 shall be applied to scaling Note that 256 128 is used for s
307. o button is pressed The same applies to television video 3 When the datacasting engine finishes the default television audio and video is played If the datacasting content does not switch the audio and video by direct tag specification default specification only the audio and video component being played at this time will continue 5 1 3 Series reservation of datacasting services e For details of the series reservation from multimedia content refer to 8 9 5 1 4 PMT specific to datacasting service usage e For details of the receiver operations at station selection and PMT updating refer to 5 1 12 3 and 5 1 12 6 e There are only three types of components that can be stated in PMT without having an ES e Subtitle components e Superimposed text components e Components used to transmit only event messages 5 1 5 PMT data encoding method descriptors usage Data encoding method descriptors are used only in these components e Components used to transmit subtitles and or superimposed text e For more information about data encoding method descriptors used in subtitle and superimposed text components refer to Chapter 7 on subtitles and superimposed text e Components used to transmit data carousels e Data encoding method descriptors are not used in any other components Table 5 4 lists data encoding method descriptors 3 30 Table 5 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Usage of data encoding method descriptors Flag Details
308. o existing receivers or BS operations BS Level 2 is described in Part 2 Section 3 2 Related Documents This Section pertains to datacasting via BS digital broadcasting in accordance with the fog documents 1 ARIB STD B21 Receiver for BS Digital Broadcasting 2 ARIB STD B10 Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System 3 ARIB STD B20 BS Transmission and Operational Conditions in Digital Broadcasting 4 ARIB STD B24 Data Encoding and Transmission Specifications for Digital Broadcasting 5 ARIB STD B25 Conditional Access System Specifications for Digital Broadcasting 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 3 Definition of Terms The following terms are used in this document 16 9 Display aspect ratio with 16 units length versus 9 units height 4 3 Display aspect ratio with 4 units length versus 3 units height 8PSK 8 phase shift keying modulation format whereby eight transmitted values are aligned with eight phase changes Normally implemented as trellis coded eight phase TC8PSK 8 bit character encoding Encoding format that boosts text transmission efficiency by reducing text code switching overheads compared to 7 bit encoding ARIB The Association of Radio Industries and Businesses is a domestic industry based association which produces standard specifications and technical documents in conjunction with broadcasters manufacturers
309. ommon to all receivers is described in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Appendix A Download format for data common to all receivers 7 1 4 Creation and delivery of notification information The download broadcaster creates and delivers notification information on the basis of on the SDTT section data from the receiver manufacturer Creation and delivery of notifications is described in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 4 Upload format for receiver software 7 1 5 Scope of responsibility The download broadcaster guarantees transmission of the data supplied by the receiver manufacturer The receiver manufacturer guarantees operation of the receiver when the data is transmitted as stated 7 1 6 Download costs Refer to the guidelines set out in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 5 2 8 Apportionment of transmission costs 7 1 7 Fee paying download services Fee paying download services are beyond the scope of the operational regulations 7 1 8 Pre download test signal For test purposes receiver software updates may employ methods such as specifying the model_id and version_id of targets that are not yet on the market Similarly data common to all receivers may use Oxfffd for the maker_id and model_id 7 2 Engineering services 7 2 1 Definition Engineering services are defined as services with the primary objective of delivery of download content 7 2 2 Operation 7 2 2 1 Objective The primary objective is the delivery of down
310. on 4 6 E1 last section number The value 0x00 should be assigned to this field transmission_info_loop length The length of the 1 loop should be assigned to this field The maximum loop length should not exceed the value for section length service_id The service_id of the relevant program should be assigned to this field The value for service_id should remain the same since it was first transmitted running status The value 0x0 should be assigned to this field Service _loop_length The length of the 2 loop should be assigned to this field The maximum loop length should not exceed the value for section length 1 Running status The value Undefined 0x0 should be assigned to all the running statuses in an SIT 2 Table update This table provide information only on the currently output event among the services that constitute a partial TS The table must be updated or modified when this event has been changed If there are some changes to the SIT the version_number should be incremented Every time table information is updated or modified the version_number should be incremented by 1 If the version number reaches 0x1F the next incremented value should be 0x00 Any number can be assigned to the version number when the partial TS is initially output g oe p y If the change to the table information involves insertion of a DIT the versio
311. on when Video resolution the invisible attribute of the body element is set to invisible Presentation from the stage Not specified Discards the previous The display resolution of the 5 12 1 Appendix 10 of data event changeover to the stage of interpretation of the next document Action while viewing or when the entry component s PID changes Action in response to the change of auto_start_flag document immediately However nothing is described about a display resolution after discarding the document Many receivers are implemented such that the resolution of the previous content continues for display resolution Not specified No need to refer to the value of auto_start_flag except when selecting a channel previous content shall continue after data event changeover and unloading of the content until presentation of the next document Action equivalent to channel 2 1 10 3 re selection When the value changes 2 1 10 3 from 0 to 1 if the data broadcasting engine is not active it is preferable to execute operations in 6 and after of Receiver s basic actions at channel selection described in 5 1 12 2 3 134 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Function Conventional type Terrestrial and satellite References in receivers common use receivers TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 Remarks DII to be monitored DII of components In addition to the 2 3 1 7 including modules being components on the
312. onal guidelines for downloading Volume 2 Function specifications for BS digital satellite receivers Volume 3 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for datacasting Volume 4 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for PSI SI Volume 5 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines and reception specifications for Conditional Access System CAS Volume 6 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for interactive systems Volume 7 BS digital satellite broadcasting Operational guidelines for transmission Volume 8 BS digital satellite broadcasting Content protection regulations Part2 Operational guidelines for CS satellite digital broadcasting and function specifications for joint BS and CS satellite digital broadcast receivers Volume 1 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines for downloading Volume 2 Function specifications for joint BS and CS satellite digital broadcast receivers Volume 3 Operational guidelines for datacasting to joint BS and CS satellite digital broadcast receivers Volume 4 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines for PSI SI ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Volume 5 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines and receiver specifications for Conditional Access System CAS Volume 6 CS satellite digital broadcasting Operational guidelines for interactive systems Volume 7 CS satellite digital broadcast
313. onent switching Figure 5 3 Loss of component due to PMT update while viewing e Loss of entry component Since it is no longer a datacasting program the datacasting engine shuts down e There is no need to track updates to the data encoding method descriptor such as auto_start_flag 5 1 12 4 Data button The data button on the remote control has two uses as described below e Activate datacasting engine Used by the viewer to begin the datacasting service for a data enriched television program without automatic startup auto_start_flag 0 in the data encoding method descriptor for the entry component When such a program is selected the receiver waits for the user to press the data button before activating the datacasting engine e Content control after datacasting engine starts up Once the datacasting engine is activated a press of the data button is processed by the datacasting engine It can be obtained as an interrupt event with type attribute DataButtonPressed as required for the BML document The processing response when the data button is pressed is described in the form of multimedia content Note that the data button is normally used as an display on off toggle for the datacasting service associated with the television program being viewed which represents a content production restriction For these reasons it is not feasible to use the data button to force quit the datacasting engine This could be achieved by a receiver de
314. ontent_id 3 130 Arguments event_ref Specifies an event content_id Content ID Return value 1 Success NaN Unsuccessful Description ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Cancels programmed storage of the content specified by the content ID content_id to be transported in the program specified by event_ref and responds with a return value regarding success or failure How to write event_ref shall follow the specifications for name spaces in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Chapter 9 3 131 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 10 Specifications for Terrestrial BS and Wide Band CS Common Use Digital Receivers 10 1 Introduction Considering data broadcasting operation in terrestrial digital television broadcasting this chapter defines BS Level 3 in which application of data broadcasting functionality is extended to BS digital broadcasting BS Level 3 shall basically apply to terrestrial BS and wide band CS common use digital receivers hereafter terrestrial and satellite common use receivers defined in TR B14 Section 3 Part 5 In addition this chapter also clarifies the detailed specifications for the BS reception function of terrestrial and satellite common use receivers 10 2 Concept of operation levels and BML versions Table 10 1 shows operation levels and presentable BML versions in BS digital broadcasting Table 10 1 BS operation levels and BML versions level receiver Level 1 BS only receivers Level 2 BS and
315. ontrol Descriptor are used to manage control information 6 2 2 4 Descriptors that can be inserted to the second loop ES loop of a PMT For information on the structures meaning of each field and basic output operation rules of the following descriptors see Section 4 of Part 1 of this document 1 Stream Identifier Descriptor Purpose This descriptor attaches a label to a target ES This label can be used to obtain the information specified by the component descriptor in a SIT Output operation rule e Ifa SIT contains a component descriptor or audio component descriptor in its service loop Stream Identifier Descriptor creates a link between the component descriptor s component_tag and the target ES Table 6 11 shows the output operation rules for Stream Identifier Descriptor 2 43 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 11 Output operation rules for Stream Identifier Descriptor Output operation rule for each field descriptor_tag The value 0x52 should be assigned to this field descriptor_length The length of Stream Identifier Descriptor should be assigned to this field component_tag A component tag value that is unique within a program should be assigned to this field This value will be linked with the component tag value of a component descriptor in a SIT 2 Hierarchical Transmission Descriptor Purpose This descriptor is used to indicate the relationships between layered ESs when a rel
316. ontrol mode is copy_no_more Each set of information must be delimited by commas and should be represented as a character string The bit that indicates whether output is possible should be either 1 or 0 The value 1 indicates that output is prohibited and the value 0 indicates that output is permitted The bit that indicates the control mode is copy_no_more should be either 1 or 0 The value 1 indicates that the control mode is copy_no_more and the value 0 indicates that the control mode is not copy_no more This property only shows how much copy control has been set and is not necessarily used for other purposes arib dataProgramInfo boolean This property indicates whether any data contents exist in a program As a general tule the value 1 should be assigned to this property if both of the following conditions are met The data_component_id of the Data Contents Descriptor is 0007 The component_tag of the subtitle ES a value from 0x40 to 0x7F is assigned to the entery_component of the Data Contents Descriptor If the existence of data contents is confirmed by other methods the value 1 should be assigned Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned arib dataProgramInfo sync boolean This property indicates whether the data contents synchronize with the program As a general rule if the value 1 is assigned to both the arib dataProgramInfo and associated _cont
317. oop 2 for i 0 i lt number_of_loop i logo_id 2 number_of_services for j 0 j lt number_of_services j original network_id 2 transport_stream_id 2 service_id 2 data_size 2 for j 0 j lt data_size j data_byte 1 logo_type logo type shows logo type as per Table 4 1 number_of_loop the number of loops repetitions of logo information loops following logo_id logo ID value which enables the receiver to recognize the logo data The first 7 bits are reserved and the logo_id value is assigned to the last 9 bits TBD The reserved bits are all 1 number_of_services the number of service number of services using the following logo This enables the same logo to be shared among multiple services original_netowork_id the specification of original network specifies the original network using the logo data transport_stream_id the specification of transport stream specifies the transport stream using the logo data service_id the specification of service ID unique to the service data_size size of logo data number of bytes in logo data following data_byte data actual logo data encoded in PNG format 5 3 Transmission timing of notification information and download content 5 3 1 Receiver software update The start time for transmission of download content is specified in the SDTT as start_time It is important that power control processes for the purpose of schedule confirmation via
318. opied without restriction 0 1 Insertion of false synchronization pulses 1 0 Insertion of false synchronization pulses and addition of 2 line color stripes 1 1 Insertion of false synchronization pulses and addition of 4 line color stripes 2 64 4 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 WORD2 bit 11 to 14 These bits are undefined The logical value 0 should be assigned to these bits CRCC bit 15 to 20 A CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is an error directing code Polynomial G x G x X X 1 The value 1 is preset for every bit in the following figure The first 14 bits of the data should be input while SW1 is closed and SW2 is connected to a The remaining bits after the bit 15 CRCC code should be output while SW1 is opened and SW2 is connected to b 7 3 Figure 7 9 CRCC Assurance of the uniqueness of a broadcasting program and its contents A receiver should fulfill the following requirements in order to assure the uniqueness of a broadcasting program and its overall contents A receiver should also fulfill the following requirements if the receiver has an accumulation function or the receiver has a function for controlling an external recorder A receiver must not use the program signals or descriptors and data included in the signals to automatically cut or skip program notification or advertisement This type of function must not be implemented to the accumulation function and automatic control fun
319. or equivalent presents the viewer with content candidates on the basis of the EIT data content descriptor The on demand viewing permission information in the data content descriptor is used to determine whether the datacasting program can be viewed on the receiver If it cannot be viewed a message to this effect is displayed and the program is not made available for selection For a program currently being broadcast viewing begins with the component specified in entry_component for the content selected by the viewer as the starting component Thus the receiver assesses the BML version on demand viewing permission information region designation and restricted reception status for the component to determine whether it is viewable If it is the receiver obtains and displays the startup document To begin viewing a reserved program the two steps described above are executed from the start time of the program 5 1 12 3 Receiver operations at PMT update Receiver operation when PMT update occurs while viewing a datacasting program e Loss of component while viewing 3 37 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Currently displayed document is discarded and the startup document for the entry carousel or the entry carousel for the component group when viewing a non zero component group in a multi view program is displayed Select station PMT update Entry component Component being viewed Other component 10st Comp
320. orary video service data service temporary data service or bookmark list data service DTCP_descriptor must be inserted In addition to perform output with MPEG PS to an IP interface PCP UR must be inserted as UR Mode 10 and Content Type 00 For digital audio service and temporary sound service to use DTCP with MPEG _TS to perform output to an IP interface DTCP_audio_descriptor must be inserted In addition to perform output with MPEG PS to an IP interface PCP UR must be inserted as UR Mode 10 and Content Type 01 See related information in Section 8 of Part 1 of this document If a receiver needs to output only the audio stream through a separate high speed digital interface that follows the specifications for a serial interface the following requirements must be fulfilled A receiver must follow the IEC60958 conformant format including IEC61937 conformant format of IEC61883 6 The receiver must use information in digital recording _control_data of the digital copy control descriptor to set a value for Channel status that is embodied in the IEC60958 conformant format of IEC61883 6 2 30 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e The receiver must obtain information from copy_control_type and digital recording control_data to perform copy control e See Digital copy control descriptor in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document e The receiver must use DTCP to protect the copyrights of programs whose protection is spe
321. ore for both one language and two languages Other than the above 16KB is required for DRCS refer to 7 6 3 76 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 7 2 PES packet setting parameters for superimposed text Field Stream_id OxBF private_stream_2 PES_packet_length Byte size in the subsequent PES packets 1 data_identifier 0x81 private_stream_id OxFF PES _data_packet_header_length Shows the field length of PES_data_private_data_byte Normally 0x00 shall be entered 2 PES data_private_data_byte This field can be skipped 2 Asynchronized_PES_ data_byte Stores the data of a caption data group Usage by entering 0 into this value without specifying the PES packet length shall be prohibited 2 When using PES data private _data_byte be sure to specify the correct length of PES data private _data_byte to PES data _packet_header_length For PES packet transmission the following limitations shall be imposed e Use of bitmap data units shall become possible only when TMD is free e For the time interval at which a caption text data group s PES packets are transmitted a time interval between a n PES packet and a n 1 PES packet in order of transmission shall be greater than the Td of n data Where Td is a time period between completion of reception and completion of presentation and it shall be approximately 0 5 seconds for text only and approximately 3 seconds for bitmap data of
322. ormation should be updated as the original EIT is updated If the event_name_char is unknown a receiver should insert the same event name assigned to upnp channelName as described in the DLNA guidelines 2 67 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 upnp genre string This property indicates the genre to which the event indicated by the dc title belongs As a general rule a converted character string that corresponds to the value of the content_nibble_level_1 general category in the Content Descriptor should be assigned to this property The conversion must be in accordance with the general category table in Appendix A of Section 4 The Content Descriptor is contained the event loop of the EIT Multiple genres can be assigned to upnp genre If the content_nibble_level_1 is either 0xC 0xD or OxE the character string Undefined should be assigned to this property If the content_nibble_level_1 is unknown the character string Unknown should be assigned to this property upnp channelIName string This property indicates the service name member channel name As a general rule the char contained in the second loop of the Service Descriptor should be assigned to this property The Service Descriptor is contained in the service loop of the SDT If the char is unknown the previously set member channel name should be assigned to this property upnp channelNr
323. orrespondence between remote control keys key codes and access keys veveeeeeenes 3 112 8 3 3 Guidelines for content that uses selection by color keys r tr tsrtrttrrrettetrecetettee cette tttteettees 3 112 8 4 Use of BME Versions misne eose rioen AE Np a SE E EES r TIERE 3 112 8 5 Using lockModuleOnMemory SetCachePriority cescesceseeseeeseeeseceeseeeseeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeenees 3 112 8 6 Transporting DRCS pattern data oo ec ccccccscccesscessseesseeeseneeeeseceeseecsseecnsneeseaeeseaeeenseessneeessseenenees 3 113 8 7 Using mame spac s sier cides eit daveb tecegeceea anes Gidea E EEE A E TE A EE EEE a NRE ORE i 3 113 8 8 Using BML element extension modules interrupt event ce eecesscceereeeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeeeneeeaes 3 114 8 9 Using procedural scripting languages ccccccescceesseeeseeeeeeeeeeceeseeesseecseceessseeesseeesseeensaeensaeeesaes 3 114 8 10 Usetoft setPrenxNumber ions hie iee ieee hae ies ree Sk ee 3 114 8 11 Using encrypted communication in the interactive communication feature ce eeeeereeeneees 3 115 Operations of Data Broadcasting Services Based on Storage Functionality ccccceesseeeesteeeereeees 3 116 9 1 Operations related to storable program ccccccesscsessceeseceeseeesseeeesceeeeseeeesuaeceeseceeseeeeseeenseeeneaeenes 3 116 9 2 Operation related to linked pre stored data programs cccccssccesssceeseeeeseceeeseeeeeceeeeesseeessneenes 3 116 9 2 1 Controlling the v
324. ot required for modules where resources are stored in entity format 3 47 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Field Usage Remarks Name descriptor Not used Info descriptor Not used Module_Link descriptor Not used CRC descriptor Not used Estimated download time descriptor Occasionally used Specifies the maximum transmission cycle of the corresponding module where used Implementation is optional on a basic receiver unit Used Receiver operations when this descriptor is specified are detailed in 5 3 6 2 Expire descriptor ActivationTime descriptor Not used CompressionType descriptor Module may be compressed for transmission If so this descriptor will be included otherwise it is not used For details of module compression refer to 5 3 3 Use of compression_type 0 modules compressed in zlib format Not used In order to accommodate older receivers this descriptor is not used for non BML1 0 content Control descriptor 5 3 3 DownloadDataBlock DDB message usage DSMCC section sending DDB message is as per the specifications Modules used to transmit DDB messages can be up to 1MB in size Strictly speaking the module can have up to 256 DSMCC section sending DDB The maximum module size is 4066x256 1040896 bytes Modules may be compressed for transmission in zlib format in which case the corresponding DII module information area co
325. ot transmission signal cccsccesssceesseeesceceeeeeeseeeseeceseeesececeeseeeeeeenseees 1 20 7 2 2 4 Engineering slot transmission guidelines ccccccsssceeseceesseesscecesceceeaeeeeeeeeseeensneseeaes 1 21 7225 Engineering slot reception guidelines ee ceeceseesseeseeeseceseeeeceseeeeceseceseeeeeeteeeeeesees 1 21 Appendix 1 Operational rules for download service v ssesieieeeeteeeseeeseeseesesseeseeeieeeeeesseies 1 23 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 1 Introduction BS digital broadcast receiver data updating services are provided in accordance with ministerial ordinances and notifications from the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications as well as specifications and guidelines set out by the Association of Radio Industries and Businesses ARIB including specifications for Receiver for Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD B21 Data Coding and Transmission Specification for Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD B24 and Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System ARIB STD B10 The current document BS Digital Satellite Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Downloading was formulated in response to the need for detailed operational guidelines on the actual design of receiver units For details of operational matters see the Download Service Usage Agreement from The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting Dpa 2 Related documents 1 ARIB STD B21 Receiver for Digital Broadcasting 2 ARIB STD
326. ote as a car or a compact lightweight portable TV that is designed to be carried around the power supply may not be available at times Therefore the power standby processing may become too difficult to implement A catalog or the manual should fully explain the functional limitations and corrective actions so that a user can understand the limitations and what to do to correct them Note A portable TV is a receiver that is equipped with a display whose size is 14 inches or less This receiver uses DC direct current as its power supply with a help of an AC adaptor or another device 2 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 2 Related Documents This section is based on the document ARIB STD B21 Receiver for Digital Broadcasting and defines the requirements for user interfaces hardware and software 1 ARIB STD B21 Receiver for Digital Broadcasting 2 ARIB STD B10 Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System 3 ARIB STD B32 Video Coding Audio Coding and Multiplexing Specifications for Digital Broadcasting 4 ARIB STD B24 Data Coding and Transmission for Digital Broadcasting 5 ARIB STD B25 Conditional Access System Specifications for Digital Broadcasting 3 Definition of Terms Digital tuner This is a device that selects a reception channel from an IF signal demodulates the signal selects a desired program decode the signal and then display the decoded baseband signal This device
327. output control of a program As a general rule 4 different sets of information should be combined and assigned to this property The encryption_mode of the Content Descriptor the digital recording control data APS control data of the Digital Copy Control Descriptor and the bit that indicates whether output is possible Each set of information must be delimited by commas and should be represented as a character string The bit that indicates whether output is possible should be either 1 or 0 The value 1 indicates that output is prohibited and the value 0 indicates that output is permitted This property only shows how much copy control has been set and is not necessarily used for other purposes 2 71 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 arib dataProgramInfo boolean This property indicates whether any data contents exist in a program As a general rule the value 1 should be assigned to this property if both of the following conditions are met The data_component_id of the Data Contents Descriptor is 0007 The component_tag of the subtitle ES a value from 0x40 to 0x7F is assigned to the entery_component of the Data Contents Descriptor If the existence of data contents is confirmed by other methods the value 1 should be assigned Otherwise the value 0 should be assigned arib dataProgramInfo sync boolean This property indicates whether the data contents synchro
328. p document in the entry component or in a BML document that is automatically launched from that startup document so that unnecessary modules will not remain in the content memory 10 5 6 Communication content 10 5 6 1 BML version Communication content is presentable only in Level 3 supported receivers and can be shared with terrestrial broadcasting so its BML version shall be limited to BML3 0 only Some broadcasting content transitioning to communication content may be written in BML1 0 10 5 6 2 Security For the restrictions on the linked unlinked status of communication content and on use of functions refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 14 10 5 6 3 Browser specific display To display unlinked communication content from content other than content in terrestrial digital broadcasting follow the descriptions in TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 1 8 1 Browser specific display 10 5 6 4 Route certificate transmission To provide interactive services using TLS or SSL in BS wide band CS broadcasting route certificates should be transmitted Route certificates shall be operated in accordance with TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 5 14 14 and 2 3 1 8 Of all the route certificates general purpose route certificates need to be operated under the unified management of a certificate management organization that operates for terrestrial digital data broadcasting 3 143 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 10 5 6 5 Print related function For the pri
329. pe is engineering service 0xA4 This channel is a broadcast used to send data to the receiver Where the channel is selected via upload download it may be skipped Engineering services are not displayed by EPG 7 2 2 3 Engineering slot transmission signal 1 Transmitted PSI SI Table 7 1 shows PSI and tables sent by engineering slot TS Table 7 1 PIS and tables sent by engineering slot TS Table id Table Transmission level 0x00 PAT 0x02 PMT oD 0x40 NIT actual 0xC3 SDTT oD 0x73 TOT 1 If there is no download content whatsoever transmission of SDTT and download content is suspended Transmission of engineering service PMT continues however which means that PMT_PID may remain Transmission level always sent o sent only as required unchanged in PAT Since the engineering slot TS is the TS selected by the user in a non viewing period only the required all channel SIs as shown in Table 7 1 are sent rather than all of the all channel SIs Transmitted PSIs are used in accordance with the PSI SSI Operational Guidelines Download content is delivered using the data Carrousel in accordance with Operational Guidelines for Downloads 1 20 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 2 PSI and table descriptors Table 7 2 shows PSI and table descriptors sent via engineering slot TS Table 7 2 PSI and table descri
330. pendent means such as a different receiver function or a button on the remote control The following uses for the data button are envisaged 3 38 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Example 1 To begin displaying datacasting service content after the viewer pushes the data button instead of having content displayed automatically immediately after station selection 1 Set the value of auto_start_flag in the entry component data encoding method descriptor to 0 2 The datacasting engine is not activated immediately when a data enriched television program is selected 3 The receiver activates the datacasting engine when the data button is pressed The startup document is obtained and displayed when the datacasting engine starts up 4 The startup document is used to display multimedia content menus and other information and to begin the datacasting service 5 Apress of the data button during a datacasting service is relayed to the multimedia content Content control then is used to either delete all text and diagrams or switch to icon display or equivalent 6 Ifanother press of the data button is detected content control reverts to the datacasting service display prior to deletion Example 2 To display content directly after selecting a datacasting service 1 Set the value of auto_start_flag in the entry component data encoding method descriptor to 1 2 The datacasting engine is activated when a datacasting program is s
331. performed ccccscceesseeesteeesteeeeeeeenes 3 127 3 vili ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 3 15 Preferable EPG display related to independent pre stored data program sree 3 128 9 4 Extension of BML procedural scripting language related to linked pre stored independent Pre stored data PrOGrams ccccecscccessccesseceseseceesecesseecsseecsseecseseeeseeesseeeseeeseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeenes 3 128 9 4 1 Programmed storage related function sete tteteeeteteeeeettee ents tent teneeeneneneeeeeneneenentans 3 128 10 Specifications for Terrestrial BS and Wide Band CS Common Use Digital Receivers 3 132 TOL Introd cti nsss sis aer igi E e a N N EPa SE EANN t 3 132 10 2 Concept of operation levels and BML Versions ccccscccesseeesseeesseessneceseeeeseeenseecseeeseneeseaeeeaes 3 132 10 3 Functions demanded of terrestrial and satellite common use receivers eee eee ete eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 133 1 0 3 1 RAM P E A N a A E cre sleje e s eialele e s slo e vies e e s 0 3 1 3 3 10 3 2 NVRAM A E E N A A E A A ele 3 133 10 3 3 Actions different from the actions of conventional type receivers rte ttre 3 134 10 3 4 Identification of media received adie ate sia s stejeiaseidto E AE TE orele a faie s vis A E E E 3 135 L04 Transmission or seieren r r r eee as a vp eee eee Ee 3 135 10 4 1 Use of DownloadInfolndication DII messages severities tee teeters reter tette 3 135 10 4 2 Event messages that do no
332. ponsible for the following cases Reception trouble arising from natural disaster rainfall attenuation and other weather reasons Failure arising from devices such as receiver Failure of devices such as receiver arising from content Ps et Broadcasting stop due to failure or maintenance of broadcasting equipment and related equipment and download interruption due to system switching etc 1 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 lt Intentionally blank gt 1 26 Volume 2 Function Specifications for Digital Satellite Broadcasting Receivers BR WwW N ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Contents Tritt CUCt OD sin a A E A aA Sa NSARE 2 1 Related Document n eio ar ea E A A aE ASO ENES TNA E EE Neea Ea 2 4 Definition of Tersi aiii aE a aa EAS Na ENS S ENa ER 2 4 Requirements for User Interfaces cccceccecssccssseeesneceeeeeeeecscecssceeseseeesseeeeseeceseeesaeeseaeeesseeenseneene 2 6 4 1 PrevequiSite SYSteri ccescietecstecstcseaedetecanesstedescdetestesstosensdutecatecsteGeaegunedentesedesutadatessteseaedetadatesstesnasents 2 6 4 2 Remote controll eta cosces cas cucisciesdss a ees Wek aah en Gates eaten toes SEE NA S O heal ES NE 2 6 43 Time management hec sie ia E tc eee A he ee 2 9 BA EPG A E E E A E seek vouaueh veh wet suas oes coal aes resnesed toes ston ceeteuea tek E es veaveteeeeh cuales 2 9 4 4 1 Common rules A EN A E T E E T 2 9 4 4 2 Program list v1vesteeseeeeeeeerreeeeie
333. ports digital video and audio output the priority A is assigned to this function 5 11 Download function A 5 12 Reception service at shipment A 5 13 System test A 5 13 1 IC card test A 2 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 13 2 Telephone line connection test A 5 14 Accumulation function B 5 15 Others 5 15 1 Priory for various kinds of display A 5 15 2 Priority for power standby processing A 2 5 15 3 Reset button B 5 15 4 RGB analog terminal B 5 15 5 Digital video terminal B 5 15 6 Digital video and audio terminal B 5 15 7 Modem A 6 Operation specifications for PSI SI tables that can be A If a receiver is equipped with a inserted into partial TS outputs hi speed digital interface the priority A is assigned to this function 1 If this function will be implemented in a receiver that is equipped in a means of transportation such note as a car or a compact lightweight portable TV that is designed to be carried around the priority B is given to the function Any functional limitations should be explained fully in a catalog or the manual so that the user can understand the limitations Moreover a receiver should display a message indicating that current broadcast contents are not supported when a user attempts to access unsupported broadcast contents 2 If this function will be implemented to a receiver that is equipped to a means of transportation such n
334. program are put 1 Multiple hyperlink descriptors with the same hyper_linkage_type can be put for a single event 2 Maximum number of hyperlink descriptors in a single event Total number of hyperlink descriptors in a single event shall be maximum 16 3 Rule on order of appearance for multiple hyperlink descriptors Hyperlink descriptors with the same hyper_linkage_type shall be inserted in order of event start time 4 Storage when multiple hyperlink descriptors are inserted For selection criteria of programs to be stored among multiple linked pre stored data programs refer to 9 2 14 3 9 2 9 Use of DII related to storage of linked pre stored data programs In principle DII version updates shall not occur during an event in linked pre stored data programs So basically transaction_id does not change during an event 3 119 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 2 10 Use of carousels related to storage of linked pre stored data programs e In principle module updates shall not occur during an event in linked pre stored data programs Once all modules have been completely stored the receiver can finish storage operation e In an event to be stored basically its event period and the start and end times of local content to be transported data event shall be consistent A data event whose start and end times are consistent with the event period refers to a data event operated by the transmit side under the following conditions and only wh
335. program viewing reServatiON cccccceesceeseceeneeeeseeesseeeesseeeeeeesseceeseeeetaes 3 123 9 2 15 Storage operation processing related to linked pre stored data programs vvevevesesesen 3 123 9 2 15 1 Information to be stored when storage is performed ccccscccseseeceeseeeeseeeseteeneeeeaes 3 123 9 2 15 2 General rules on processing when storage is performed ccecscceessceesteeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 124 9 2 15 3 Content updates when a linked pre stored data program is broadcast multiple times 3 124 9 2 16 Preferable EPG display related to storage of linked pre stored data programs vveveseses 3 125 9 3 Operations related to independent pre stored data program cccccscccssseeesseeeeeseeceseeesseeseeeenaes 3 125 9 3 1 Controlling the viewing of independent pre stored data programvevevevevenvenenenens 3 125 9 3 2 service_type of channels that operate independent pre stored data program iveveveseses 3 125 9 3 3 Schedule patterns of independent pre stored data program and operation restrictions 3 125 9 3 4 Use of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor in independent pre stored data PEOQTAM sssssesseesseeeseeeseeeseeseeseeseeeteeseeseceeeeeeseesseesseesseessaeasseasecasscaseeasseaseeaseeaseeaseeeseesias 3 126 9 3 5 Use of the PMT s target area descriptor in independent pre stored data program eseese 3 126 9 3 6 Use of the PMT s digital copy control descriptor in independent pre stored data program 3 126 9 3 7 Use of t
336. programs shall be stored together with information of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor and the stored information shown below is used for playback of data broadcasting programs that have been stored Table 9 2 Use of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor in linked pre stored data programs Field Usage auto_start_flag Either 0 or 1 is used For the interpretation of auto_start_flag refer to 9 2 4 1 ondemand retrieval flag Always 0 Real time viewing shall be prohibited independent_flag If this value is 0 and if playback with the video and sound of a linked television program or data enriched television program is not possible it shall be judged that viewing the relevant linked pre stored data program is not possible file storable flag Always 1 9 2 4 1 Use of auto_start_flag in linked pre stored data programs To view programs with hyperlinks set to linked pre stored data programs receivers that support linked pre stored data programs shall interpret the auto_start_flag of the PMT s entry component as follows 1 For the viewing of a television program or data enriched television program for which a linked pre stored data program is stored data content in that linked pre stored data program stored shall be presented based on the auto_start_flag of the entry component in the linked pre stored data program 2 Ifa linked pre stored data program linked to a data enriched television program i
337. ptor needs to be inserted to an SIT the original information transmitted with the broadcasted program must be inserted 11 Broadcaster Name Descriptor Purpose This descriptor is used to describe the name of the broadcaster Output operation rule e If this descriptor needs to be inserted to an SIT the original information transmitted with the broadcasted program must be inserted 2 56 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 12 Component Group Descriptor Purpose This descriptor defines and indicates combinations of components within an event This descriptor is used for Multi view TV MVTV and other functions Output operation rule e If this descriptor needs to be inserted to an SIT the original information transmitted with the broadcasted program must be inserted 13 Series Descriptor Purpose This descriptor is used to determine whether a program is a part of a series Output operation rule e If this descriptor needs to be inserted to an SIT the original information transmitted with the broadcasted program must be inserted 14 Partial TS Time Descriptor Purpose If this descriptor is inserted to the 2nd loop of an SIT this descriptor is used to describe the time information of an event that is inserted to the SIT Structure For details on the structure of the Partial TS Time Descriptor see Table 6 21 Meaning of each field The meaning of each field is defined in 9 1 8 3 in ARIB STD B21 Output operation rule
338. ptors Table id Table Descriptor Transmission level 0x02 PMT Ist_loop Conditional access system o Digital copy control x Emergency information x PMT 2nd _loop Conditional access system o Stream identifier Layer transmission o Digital copy control x Region x Video decoding control x Data encoding format 0x40 NIT actual 1st_loop Network name Staff o CA_EMM_TS o System administration NIT actual 2nd_loop Service list Staff o Satellite allocation system 0xC3 SDTT Download content 0x73 TOT Local time offset o Transmission level always included o included only when required x not included Multiple inclusions allowed 7 2 2 4 Engineering slot transmission guidelines The transmission guidelines are shown below For more detail refer to the Operational Guidelines for Downloads 1 SDTT Where download content exists SDTT is sent at least once every ten minutes at a transmission speed of no greater than 10 kbps 2 Download content May be transmitted at the fasted possible rate in the engineering slot TS 7 2 2 5 Engineering slot reception guidelines Where download content acquisition and a preset timer recording are set for the same time the timer recording takes precedence Where download content acquisition will interfere with the start time of a timer recording the download is not performed Where the download delivery schedule is for a time after completion of a
339. r the basic receiver unit are as described in Section 1 Part 1 of ARIB STD B24 Data Encoding and Transmission Specifications for Digital Broadcasting 3 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 2 1 Resolution of planes in display screen and associated restrictions Table 4 1 shows the required resolution of each plane in the display screen Table 4 1 Plane resolutions Item Requirement Video plane Resolution 1920x1080x16 YCbCr 4 2 2 16 9 720x 480x16 YCbCr 4 2 2 16 9 720x 480x16 YCbCr 4 2 2 4 3 Still picture Resolution 1920x1080x16 YCbCr 4 2 2 16 9 plane 720x 480x16 YCbCr 4 2 2 16 9 720x 480x16 YCbCr 4 2 2 4 3 Text diagrams Resolution 960x 540x8 16 9 plane Display size 1920x1080 2 x horizontal vertical pixel expansion 720x 480x8 16 9 720x 480x8 4 3 CLUT CLUT number 1 Common fixed colors 128 refer to Appendix 1 Receiver dependent colors 32 Broadcaster defined colors 96 Presentation CLUT 8 bit index value converted to YCbCr 4 2 2 and 4 bit a values 0 Subtitle plane Resolution 960x 540x8 16 9 Display size 1920x1080 2 x horizontal vertical pixel expansion 720x 480x8 16 9 720x 480x8 4 3 CLUT CLUT number 1 Common fixed colors 128 refer to Appendix 1 Receiver dependent colors 32 CLUT 8 bit index value converted to YCbCr 4 2 2 and 4 bit a values 0 Switched Resolution 960x 540x1 16 9 video still Size 1920x1080 2 x horizontal vertical pixel expansion picture
340. ransmitted the description may be an n 1 structure with multiple high layer components referencing one low layer component Low layer components of a multi view program do not belong to any component group Thus the receiver can switch to a lower layer component during viewing of any sub channel in the event of layer switching provided that the referencing structure is described in the layer transmission descriptor Component switching by the receiver in response to layer switching is normally based on the referencing structure stated in the layer transmission descriptor and the relevant startup document is displayed It is also possible to have an implementation where the previously viewed high layer component or document is displayed when reverting from a low to a high layer The relevant operations are receiver dependent including error processing if the component or document does not exist after reversion Component switching with reference to the layer transmission descriptor is performed in the following cases Whether or not BML documents for other components are referenced from the original BML document is receiver dependent 1 To identify the entry component including DII monitored component at station selection including epgTune 2 To activate content from EPG in accordance with the data content descriptor 3 To switch the viewing layer during content viewing 4 To perform an ES transition when the local ES is los
341. rational Scenarios 6 2 3 Consent function The consent function stores the user s consent information and allows the receiver to perform downloads by default For more information about required functions refer to ARIB STD B21 Section 12 3 1 Necessary Functions 6 2 4 Recovery from abnormal event function This function restores the receiver to normal operating status following an abnormal status event during reception of download software such as power off suspension of processing or data error detected gt Schedule information exists means the loop count for the schedule information in SDTT is not 0 and No schedule information exists means it is 0 1 16 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 1 Ifabnormal status is detected during download processing the download software data that has been written is rendered invalid and the download software is re acquired 2 Inthe twin bank memory structure two areas are provided for download overwriting during receiver software updates In the event of an abnormality the pre download program is executed In the single bank a memory structure a single download overwriting area is provided together with a dedicated non writeable program area In the event of an abnormality the dedicated program is executed thus guaranteeing a minimum level of functionality 3 In the event of an abnormality while downloading data common to all receivers the structure should at the very
342. ribed above need to be performed This descriptor should be inserted to a PMT as it was when it was first transmitted from a broadcaster Output operation rule e Ifthe relevant ES needs to be protected from digital copying and this descriptor is originally contained in a broadcasted program the original descriptor must be inserted into the PMT as it was when its was first transmitted 2 42 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 2 Emergency Information Descriptor Purpose This descriptor indicates that the relevant service is either an emergency warning broadcast or a test broadcast for emergency warning signals Output operation rule e Output of this descriptor is optional However it is recommended that this descriptor be deleted 3 Target Area Descriptor Purpose This descriptor indicates the area where all services should be provided Output operation rule e This descriptor is placed in a PMT during broadcast of a relevant service when the service_type of the service is 0xCO data service and the target area of the service needs to be indicated Output of this descriptor is optional during partial TS output 4 Content Availability Descriptor Purpose See Content Availability Descriptor in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document Output operation rule e This descriptor is placed in a PMT to specify control information for accumulation and output for all relevant services This descriptor and Digital Copy C
343. rmed this function shall not be executed e For receivers sold before the version 2 1 of this document some receivers support the number addition function while others do not support it In the former even when off is set to the network setting identification if the caller ID notification 186 184 is set number addition will be performed as a receiver function In the above case if prefix playback is performed in content a call cannot be sent correctly due to overlapping of prefixes Much attention shall be paid to this point at the time of content creation 8 11 Using encrypted communication in the interactive communication feature e The functions for encrypted communication in the interactive communication feature startCASEncryption endCASEncryption transmitWithCASEncryption shall not be used 3 115 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 Operations of Data Broadcasting Services Based on Storage Functionality 9 1 Operations related to storable program A component or content can be stored if 1 is specified to file storable flag in its PMT s data encoding method descriptor or its EIT s data content descriptor Linked pre stored data programs and Independent pre stored data program will be defined in the following as well as specifications for operations related to their storage but that will not restrict storage operations of other data broadcasting programs Note that the basic receiver unit shall support all described
344. rogram shall be broadcast in services with the service_type set to OxA8 9 3 3 Schedule patterns of independent pre stored data program and operation restrictions Hyperlink descriptors shall not be put into the EIT of an independent pre stored data program Table 9 8 shows restrictions on the operation of independent pre stored data program Table 9 8 Restrictions on the operation of independent pre stored data program Limitations Description structure Constraints on program Independent pre stored data program shall be composed of data only not transmitting video audio streams 3 125 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 3 4 Use of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor in independent pre stored data program Regarding storage independent pre stored data broadcasting programs shall be stored together with information of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor and the stored information shown below is used for playback of data broadcasting programs that have been stored Table 9 9 Use of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor in independent pre stored data program Field Usage auto_start_flag Always 1 like independent type data programs ondemand_retrieval_ flag Either 0 or 1 is used There are programs for which real time viewing is permitted and programs for which it is prohibited independent_flag Always 1 file_storable_flag Always 1 9 3 5 Use of the PMT
345. rograms shall interpret the hyperlink descriptors specified as follows 9 2 8 1 Types of hyperlink to be used For linked pre stored data programs combined_prior_data 0x80 and combined_posterior_stream 0x81 shall be newly defined as hyper_linkage_type for operation Table 9 3 Types of hyperlink to be used Hyper_linkage_type Details of use combined_prior_data 0x80 Used for specifying hyperlink from a television program or data enriched television program to a linked pre stored data program For Selector_bye write an event of a link destination linked pre stored data program Specify only link_to_event 0x02 for the link destination type link destination type combined_posterior_stream 0x81 Used for specifying hyperlink from a linked pre stored data program to a television program or data enriched television program For Selector_byte write an event of a link destination television program or data enriched television program Specify only link_to_event 0x02 for the link destination type link_destination_type 3 118 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 2 8 2 Hyperlink descriptor operation rules e Use of hyperlinks with the hyper_linkage_ type specified as combined_prior_data 0x80 or combined_posterior_stream 0x81 1 Hyperlinks shall be set both ways between television program or data enriched television program and linked pre stored data program 2 For transmission of multiple li
346. rt exclusively used by the relevant broadcaster in the NVRAM broadcaster specific area e User interface The following implementation is preferable for the purposes of greater ease of operation for users and prevention of operational error Refer to the operation window example The menu item Erase Contents Stored shall be provided in the Member Registration menu For erasure of the actual part of the NVRAM broadcaster specific area final confirmation of the viewer s intention shall be made Considering the possibility of NVRAM being accessed by a procedure other than the ones authorized for data broadcasting or receivers 0x00 or 0x20 shall be written all over the part to be erased Note that it is also possible to present content with the erase function only when a viewer instructs his her withdrawal from membership instead of always presenting it 3 151 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Example of how private information handling rules are indicated e We shall take responsibility for management of private information such as member IDs addresses names and credit card numbers e We shall not disclose a member s information to any third party without the member s consent e We shall secure protection of privacy for members e When data is transmitted by using the uplink From information currently entered and information already stored information such as OO OO example name address telephone number credit
347. rty without the prior consent from the user In addition users shall not leak or disclose information known through this service to the third party 8 Download related responsibilities and test as well as viewer support 1 Guaranty Dpa guarantees that receiver software submitted from the receiver manufacturers and data common to 1 24 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 all receivers submitted from the consigned broadcasting operator and platform should be correctly sent out Receiver manufacturers shall guarantee the receiver operations when data is correctly sent out Dpa accepts prior broadcasting for operation confirmation Users can perform test for receiver software update using methods such as specifying receivers that have not been shipped to the market by model id version id etc In addition in the case of data common to all receivers test can be made with maker id and model id as Oxfffd 2 Support for download related claims and inquiries Users handle the claims and inquiries relating to the download content while Dpa handles inquires relating to the download service itself 3 Troubleshooting Dpa is unambiguously responsible for download related broadcasting responsibilities and Dpa first performs support for viewers With their own expenses and responsibilities users shall provide support for viewers for troubles of receivers or other devices arising from the download results Disclaimer Dpa shall not be res
348. rved programs essseesseeesseeessesssnecssneessneessseeseeeneesnessneesses 2 20 4 11 3 Execution of reserved operations lt ssssssssssessssesssssesseseseesseesneessneessneessneesseesssseeneesnenssass 2 20 Aiia Timerr esemation aiai eaen re ie eae etree ee ier aes eae 2 21 4 12 Conditional access services iison raay Ee Ern eTe Ir Eea ESETE NEO TIPER eA 2 21 4 13 User setting functions ciscecssessccsscdetasesecstesescentesenesstosesodetacatecsnesenccntasotesstesenededacetesstesenesntauatedseasente 2 21 Aii Password is E n oe een EA EE e E ii EAE EE E A E tans 2 21 Fia Parental level n ere nce a E eet teen te ts nee e E 2 22 4 13 3 Antenna setting sss ssssessseessseesssessensessteeseeeseeessessnecssnecssseessseenseesnessucssneesseesssneennesneessies 2 22 4 13 4 The aspect ratio of the connected TV sssssssssessssessssssssssesseesssseeneesnessneessnsesseessseesnieesnenssies 2 22 4 13 5 Settings for a telephone line ssss sssesseeesseeesseeessseessneesseeesseeeseeeneesnessncssneesssessseeessnessenssies 2 22 4 13 6 Setting for the viewer location sssessessesssssesseeseseeeseeenteesneessnessnsessneesseeessneeneeesnenssies 2 22 4 13 7 Download permission setting s sssssssssesssseseseseeseeesseeessessnessnessnessnsesseeesseeesiseeseesnenssies 2 23 4 13 8 Caption display selection eee eee ttttetetttststetettststrtttrsrsretettttssettrt tester tresssetett 2 23 AD Perona data clefet one Sateen oe E tae eta deter a a SOE 2 23 4 14 Error me
349. rvice is not displayed and the viewer is notified via a suitable message The wording and display format of the message is receiver dependent Where the 2 loop ECM is specified in the entry component and charging is by flat fee with no contract the datacasting service is not displayed Where the datacasting service is deemed to be suitable for display based on steps 7 through 10 the datacasting engine is activated and the entry component startup document is obtained and displayed After the datacasting engine has started up if the entry component is found to be an empty carousel the following operation is required For details of empty carousels refer to 5 3 1 6 Ifauto_start_flag 0 the engine startup process halts at the point where the entry carousel is found to be an empty carousel and the receiver waits for the viewer to press the data button refer to step 5 above Ifauto_start_flag 1 the receiver continues to monitor data event switching for the entry component and obtains and displays the startup document at the point where data event switching occurs and the startup module appears Receiver operation for multi view program component group sub channel switching Guidelines l Component group switching does not change the datacasting display the document being displayed before switching is retained Receiver operation for content selection from EPG with viewing or viewing reservation Guidelines l EPG
350. s For the program characteristics code table it is 1 byte of data including level 1 and 2 characteristics level_1_name_length the length of level 1 name number of bytes in level 1 name following This value is 0 when there are only level 2 additions and the level 1 name is not encoded name_char the description of level 1 name series of text information fields describing level 1 names Text encoding follows SI text string encoding rules For more information about text encoding refer to SI EPG document level_2_name_length the length of level 2 name number of bytes in level 2 name following name_char the description of level 2 name series of text information fields describing level 2 names Text encoding follows SI text string encoding rules Table 5 5 Syntax of keywords list Data structure Bytes KeywordTableDataModule number_of loop 1 for i 0 i lt number_of_loop i name length 1 for j 0 j lt name_length j name_char 1 number_of_loop the number of loops repetitions of keyword information loops following name_length the length of keyword name number of bytes in keyword name following name_char the description of keyword name series of text information fields describing keywords Text encoding follows SI text string encoding rules 1 12 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 5 6 Syntax of logo data Data structure Bytes LogoDataModule logo_type 1 number_of l
351. s is second as per the specifications The constant minimum update interval for NPT reference messages is 5 seconds NPT step changes are notified via an NPT reference message sent up to 2 seconds prior Up to 2 seconds before the STC does 0 circuits the receiver is informed that NPT is undefined by means of an NPT reference message with STC_Reference 0x1FFFFFFFF and NPT_Reference lt NPT value at STC0 circuit gt hereafter STCmax reference message The undefined state is released by sending an NPT reference message other than the STCmax reference message immediately after the STCO circuit The STCmax reference message is required for datacasting transmission at STCO circuit and transmission of content that uses NPT functions in a data event local content at STCO circuit In the event of STC discontinuity including STC 0 circuit an NPT reference message for the new STC should be sent as soon as possible There is no need to set the NPT value to circulate or be discontinuous during a data event Where NPT is used within multimedia content for interrupt event ignition or getNPT NPT reference message monitoring is explicitly stated in the multimedia content The type attribute is described in the form of an NPTReferred interrupt event Figure 5 7 shows how NPT reference messages are transmitted 3 50 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 NPT reference message NPT NPTr NPT2 STCr STC2 Scale 0 1 At least 2 sec lt gt
352. s not stored data content in the data enriched television program shall be presented based on the auto_start_flag of the entry component in the data enriched television program 9 2 5 Use of the PMT s target area descriptor in linked pre stored data programs The target area descriptor shall not be used in linked pre stored data programs 3 117 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 2 6 Use of the PMT s digital copy control descriptor in linked pre stored data programs Content to be transported through a digital copy prohibited component shall be made viewable after storage too However digital output of the relevant component from the receiver shall be restricted by the setting of the relevant descriptor 9 2 7 Use of the p f EIT s data content descriptor in linked pre stored data programs e Information of components to be used before storage operation shall be based on the present EIT e Data content descriptors shall be put for all content that shall be pre stored and for all other content that shall be referenced by the component_ref of the content pre stored e A value for the component size of a data content descriptor shall be a total size of modules to be transported in the relevant content e It shall be ensured that content_id is put for content to be pre stored file_storable_flag is always 1 9 2 8 Use of the p f EIT s hyperlink descriptors in linked pre stored data programs Receivers that support linked pre stored data p
353. s of the following 4 fields lt protocol gt lt network gt lt contentFormat gt lt additionalInfo gt First field lt protocol gt The protocol through which the content is output Second field lt network gt The entry to this field depends on the output protocol If the ouput protocol 2 79 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 is HTTP an asterisk should be assinged for this field Third field lt contentFormat gt The entry to this field depends on the output protocol If the output protocol is HTTP the format of the content should be assigned to this field Fourth field lt additionalInfo gt Additional information is assigned here For example if the stream output protocol is HTTP and a TS formatted MPEG content with a time stamp which is in accordance with 8 1 1 Packet format needs to be transmitted under protection of DTCP TP it is represented using the following protocolInfo http get application x dtcp1 DTCP 1 HOST host DTCP 1 PORT port CONTENTFORMAT vid eo vnd diIna mpeg tts DLNA ORG_PN DTCP_ MPEG TS_JP_T DLNA ORG _ FLAGS 01110000000000000000000000000000 ARIB OR JP_PN MPEG_ TTS CP The following values need to be inserted to each field of protocolInfo The rules for protocolInfo are defined in the Media Management section of the DLNA guidelines First field http get should be inserted This entry represents the output protocol HTTP Second field An asterisk should be insert
354. s related to storage of linked pre stored data programs vveeeeeeseenenes 3 120 9 2 11 Use of the multimedia encoding method related to linked pre stored data programs 3 120 9 2 11 1 Operations related to name SPaceS eceescceesseceseceseeeceeeeeeecssnecseceeeeeeeseeeeseeeseaeenes 3 120 9 2 12 Use of event messages related to storage of linked pre stored data programs eeeeeeess 3 120 9 2 13 Guidelines on the receiver s actions related to linked pre stored data programs at channel selection Sia atSreidiePatere dieta aida aia eie a da Sia uietalere dielayaya siee A A a a siete ale siete o e s a e a a siete 3 121 9 2 13 1 Launching the data broadcasting engine ccececcceeseeeseceeseeeeseeeseeeceeseeesseeeseeensneeees 3 122 3 vii ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 9 2 13 2 Receiver s action related to linked pre stored data programs when a data broadcasting program Starts ccccccscesseceesseeeseecescecseseceeseeeeseeseeeceeneceeseeeseeeeeeenseeenes 3 122 9 2 14 Processing for programmed storage of a linked pre stored data program ovevesesesesen 3 123 9 2 14 1 Processing for programmed storage guidelines ccceessessseceeesseeeseeeeseeeeseeenseeeaes 3 123 9 2 14 2 How to calculate the size of content eee ceeeseeseceeceseesecseeseceseesecseseeseaesseeseeaeeas 3 123 9 2 14 3 Autodetect of a stored program cecccccssceescessseeeseeceeeseeesseeesececeeseeeeseeenseeenseeeneseeenaes 3 123 9 2 14 4 Television
355. scribes the required functionality of the basic receiver unit for reception of data broadcasts 4 1 Receiver configuration The basic receiver unit conforms to Class A as shown in the two sample receiver configurations given in ARIB STD B24 Data Encoding and Transmission Specifications for Digital Broadcasting Section 1 Part 1 Description In this document the basic receiver unit is defined in terms of the various sections of the hardware configuration and the internal resources associated with the reference decoder 4 1 1 Hardware configuration Figure 4 1 shows the hardware configuration for the basic receiver unit Digital broadcast signal input into the receiver is converted to a transport stream by the tuner and 8PSK demodulation The transport stream decoding process then splits the demodulated transport stream into video audio and other data The video steam is sent to the vide decoder and the audio stream to the audio decoder This enables the basic receiver unit to reproduce ordinary video and audio content During data broadcast reception the data is temporarily sent to the main memory or non volatile memory for CPU processing This arrangement enables data to be sent from the main memory to the video and audio decoders for simultaneous reproduction during text diagrams display as well as ordinary video and audio reproduction Upstream circuits can also be used to add interactive elements to conventional television viewing These hardwar
356. scseeeeeeneaeeencneeneecenensaeecessneesenneececsaseceesneasasencnsatecesentets 2 11 4 43 Program search sree eseeeeseeeseeeseeeceeseaeeessneeececenessecesassseecnseacescesetcesenenttececanees 2 12 4 4 4 Program information displayet ttttteettettetttttrtt ertt ertt ertett tertettenr ternet enre nrrt nter ten t 2 12 4 4 5 Reserved program display 0eeeeeeeteeeteeetteettttettttrttterettstteetteettteesteessteenntesstennseennteenneeen teens 2 12 4 5 Program selection cerier a eects eee E E a ee eee 2 12 4 5 1 Channel selection TPE ATIE OTTEIN TITISTE SEATI E TITEI EIET ENTITI ATETEA Gee US Supe as Sg e weeds wee deem a ser eee e ese saee weeess Ja 1 2 45 2 Program list s srsestesrees teeters re esneesnerestsnesceneeeneneeseneneeeacensneeneasanencanensanensasensnsenssesenees 2 13 4 6 Video audio and subtitle switching 0 00 cccecssccessecssseeseeeeeeeeeeeesseecseaeceeseeceseecnsaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeenes 2 13 4 6 1 Default ES ais 5 Sealab Us HE SUS bid 5G wR Ss wid Sew bin wi iw wid EITTIE ITIL EITTIE TIET TI ENTITETET ETIE EITI T TETI ITTEENI TETIT Neches 2 13 4 6 2 Video ES selection So Se eibielgie wile dinie wid dS was Se wie s Ss AEAEE he wise Mele wid dS ADAE bode Essie BS AEE sie Meee NADA Hodes NES eee Je 1 3 4 6 3 Audio ES selection E ALS LETELTE S ETE E E N ATETEA STE Je 1 3 4 6 4 Subtitle ES selection AE EPE EE EEE E ENE EA EEE E EE E EAAS ASETET ETETE De 1 3 4 7 Adaptation to various TV broadcasting methods cccccccecsseeescecesceeeeeceeeseee
357. sed on actual display Update keyword list Adds information only does not modify previously defined areas Maximum length of keywords is 8 characters 16 bytes this applies to updated data Keywords are item names encoded within SI extension format event descriptors rather than codes as such Logo data updates Updating may involve additions and or modification of previously defined information Logo data can be immediately transmitted after a logo ID 9 bit is assigned to it For more information on logo IDs see descriptions and lists related to logo IDs in 8 2 4 in Section 7 Logo data is compressed by the broadcaster Large logos should be compressed to no more than 50 of the original data size and small logos by no more than 75 A single piece of logo data may be shared among multiple service_id Based on the anticipated number of broadcasters and services during the BS 5 satellite phase receiver units must be designed to hold 1 000 services and 300 pieces of logo data in non volatile memory Logo data is administered within the receiver unit in accordance with the logo ID The logo ID is common to all six logo types Table 4 1 shows logo size patterns HD logo size patterns assume screen resolution of 960 x 540 pixels 720P format is the same as for HD 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 4 1 Size patterns logo types of transmission logos Type of logo Vertical Horizontal Expected Disp
358. seeeeetettettttttttrtteettertertett rtt rtt ertt stte trte rten tetr tenrenrstertsrntreentte rete trennten stan 3 21 4 3 2 Key mask AEEA AAA FAAA LANAA ARa vase aAA FAAA LANAN AAAA AAA AAA AANRAKEN AA a Aa 3 21 AAs VS decoders E ET T 3 22 4 5 Memory requirement ecccsccdisdecidiens fect sideeid R R A E SES OER EES Th A aia 3 22 4 5 1 RAM Hoje sie E E E E E E EPT E E EA E AE EE E E EEA ETE TASET ELEELEA 3 22 4 5 2 NVRAM E LANTE TLIETT E ES L SETEL EE ELELEE E AE LS 3 23 46 MOdeMh kcs3tuettendicstsesh a athaaeted ena a ATE bates ead N aa Laaa cess NE Eeh 3 23 5 Data Transmission Specification Usage eccescescssecssecssecsseceseceseceneccecececenecscecaecaecaesaeseeeseaeenaeenes 3 24 SL SIBSTANS RRS 3 24 5 1 1 Types of datacasting services srs eeteeeititteriteeeseeeteeeteneeencneneneeeenenteeeennenteeeeananees 3 24 5 1 1 1 Data programs versus television programs cccecsscesseceenseeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenseeenes 3 24 5 1 1 2 Types of datacasting service programs cccccecssceessceseecsenseeeeseeesseeeseseeeeseeesseeenseeeneneenes 3 24 5 1 1 3 Datacasting services and other program tyPeS ccccccesccsesceeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenseeeneneenes 3 25 5 1 1 4 service_type for datacasting program channels esceeseceseceececeeceeeceeecececeeeceeeeneeees 3 26 5 1 2 Content structure and components usage in datacasting services cvvvevevevenenenenene 3 26 5 1 2 1 Content versus local contentcs ts ionian tive eel e
359. serted to the partial TS If a DIT needs to be inserted to a partial TS two consecutive transporter packets with the specified format must be inserted to the partial TS No other transport packets should be inserted between 2 46 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 these two transporter packets If a change to the stream involves insertion of a DIT the stream information and table information before the insertion of the DIT must not exist in the stream after the insertion of the DIT Similarly the new stream information and table information after the insertion of the DIT must not exist in the stream before the insertion of the DIT This kind of configuration may cause confusion lt First packet gt The first transport packet should have the PID of 0x001E and adaptation field should be inserted to this packet The value 0 should be assigned to the payload_unit_start_indicator of the transport packet header The value 10 adaptation_field only no payload should be assigned to the adaptation_field_control The value 1 should be assigned to the discontinuity_indicator of the adaptation field and the value 0 should be assigned every other flag of the adaptation field The stuffing byte should be allocated for the remaining transport packet fields lt Second packet gt The DIT that is specified by this specification document should be inserted to the second packet The value 0x001E should be assigned to the PID of the tra
360. ses the Kana Kanji conversion function Content assuming the availability of 2MByte or more for BContents Content assuming the upper limit of 768 for the number of resources within BContents AAC LC sound with 32kHz sampling Content assuming the maximum length of 512K Byte for an AAC file Content requiring AAC file stop control Reference to partially received components Content that subscribes 9 or more and up to 16 event messages at the same time Content that simultaneously subscribes event messages to be transported by two different ESs Content that subscribes event messages with event_msg group id 1 Function to extract and reference ECMAScript or CSS as a separate file Content assuming the increase of constants in an ECMAScript operation environment Content assuming the increase of constants in a BinaryTable Content using an URI starting with arib 1 1 1 or arib de 1 1 1 Content that uses lockModuleOnMemoryEx Content that references and displays modules locked by the above TCP IP communication function Connection and disconnection function by using functions in broadcasting content TCP IP communication function Use of transmitTextDataOverIP in broadcasting content TCP IP communication function Transitioning from broadcasting communication content Communication content content to 3 137 BML3 0 References in TR B14 Section 3 Part Use 2 Remarks Version B24 1 1 or later 1 2 3 Appendix 4
361. sessssssssersssrssrssrssesssseseesees 3 58 6 1 1 3 Other limi tatOnsys s 2 ze e tithes e a e E E E sha cede tiles Cate tede tates E a 3 58 6 1 2 MPEG 2 Video AP T A Selene Slee sale Geie e Gs sigle Gaje s wie Me s soca eis Seles Sees ciele Cdeiee ee tele Sud T 3 58 6 1 2 1 Constraints on encoding parameters cesiones aiie nasterii a ii ia 3 59 6 1 2 2 Other iim tations lt 8 sannan E AE A EAA ONA ate sate 3 59 6 1 3 MPEG 4 Video oisislatsieisiete side s E EEE IN SEA A ATAATA T A AA A AAA TLLA 3 59 6 2 Still picture and bitmap pattern encoding e eee eessceeseeeeseeeeereceeseceeeeenscecescecsereeeneeenseeenseeeeenaes 3 60 6 2 1 MPEG 2 I frames A E TAA E A E E AE E E E A O A A E 3 60 3 iii ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 2 1 1 Constraints on encoding parameters cccccescceescceesseeeseeceseeeeseeceeeeeseeeneeeceeeeeeeeensaees 3 60 6 2 1 2 Other limitations iss rasni ianiai es sous cuedas geass ia a E EEEE does es 3 61 629 JPEG iain a es es ee te eens Maia eS 3 61 6 2 2 1 Encoding parameterS ccccsccesssccesscssnccsesceensesecseneeensceensuecsauecsneesuseesuacsesauecsenesseseeeans 3 61 6 2 2 2 Scalia Gy sees na a aE a E A E E T dele 3 61 6 2 2 3 Other limitations insa e a r A a aO r NEE N a aO t 3 61 6 2 2 4 Markers and marker segments to be US d ccccccsceceesseesseeeeseeeeeteeeeneeeseeeeseeessneeeseeeeaes 3 61 653 PNG RE eRe ia Caton on ileng E EE A A E E ones 3 62 6 2 3 1 Encoding parameters s
362. sion regulations As per ARIB TR B15 Ed 4 5 1 6 Version number 5 1 6 1 Receiver software update There are no restrictions on assignment and administration of version numbers 5 1 6 2 Data common to all receivers version_id uses the common version number contained in data common to all receivers which is administered by the broadcaster responsible for downloading said data Figure 5 1 shows the version numbering system 6 Reserved words ver1 0 HE eno ice Genre table ver1 0 HET eno Ceno Common data ver 1 0 ver 1 1 ver 1 2 ver 1 3 version number ver 1 1 download ver 1 2 download ver 1 3 download Contents of common data download Figure 5 1 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Version number applies to common data in its entirety Common data generationn Normally only the updated portions are transmitted although sometimes the revision history is sent instead Common data downloads and version numbering system The version id reverts to 0 after 4 095 To enable the version number to begin again at 0 version _id is split into two domains 0 to 2 047 and 2 048 to 4 095 If the current version number is between 2 048 and 4 095 and the downloaded common data version number is between 0 and 2 047 the downloaded version number is deemed to be higher than the current version number and the receiver proceeds with the download 5 2 Transmission of download content Regulations on add
363. sion upgrades are not generated during transmission of an empty carousel e Atstation selection with auto_start_flag 1 and when an empty carousel is detected during data event switching no error is generated but instead DII updating is monitored and display of the startup document begins when the startup document first appears For a data enriched television program with auto_start_flag 0 if the entry component is an empty carousel at the point when the user presses the data button to activate the datacasting engine the activation process is suspended and the device waits for the data button to be pressed again e Ifthe carousel containing the document currently being viewed during multimedia content display changes to an empty carousel a data event message DataEventChanged interrupt event identified via status 1 indicating the change to an empty carousel is generated for the BML document This operation is the same irrespective the value of auto_start_flag and whether or not it is an entry component e Where an empty carousel is referenced but not in connection with station selection or data event switching for instance via execution of a link between BML documents this results in an error equivalent to that which is generated when an ordinary carousel does not contain a reference module 5 3 1 7 Basic receiver operations during datacasting program display e The receiver continuously monitors the carousel DIIs of the following two compon
364. sired program the user should be required to enter a password during reservation registration If the desired program requires fees free CA _mode is 1 or the program is free but requires contents protection the receiver should ask the user whether the user wants to view the program during reservation registration 4 11 2 Confirmation of reserved programs 1 Areceiver must have an user interface for check reserved programs that have been registered 2 The user must be able to cancel reserved programs that have been registered 4 11 3 Execution of reserved operations 1 2 3 Reserved operations must follow EIT p f actual of TS that is send with the reserved program Program reservation registration must be automatically deleted after the reserved program ends Air time change of a registered reserved program The start time of the reserved program may be delayed Manufacturers can decide whether to delay the execution time of a reserved operation in a receiver to resolve the problem A receiver may be implemented with two different modes by which a user can decide whether to delay the execution time of a reserved operation The recommended maximum delay time is 3 hours because it is the standard delay time that is sufficient enough to cancel a delayed program If the reserved program is to be started earlier than the scheduled start time the registered reserved operation may be canceled The event_id should remain th
365. sition to terrestrial digital television broadcasting shall not be presented on it 3 144 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 10 5 9 Programmed recording and viewing reservation for other media If the receiver supports media other than BS digital broadcasting it is possible to execute programmed recording and viewing reservation epgIsReserved epgReserve epgCancelReservation epgReclIsReserved epgRecReserve or epgRecCancelReservation for services of such media Note that there is no guarantee that the receiver can obtain SI information of the target media and in case of no acquisition reservation will fail 10 6 Operation of new functionality for captioning 10 6 1 Captioning rollup mode This mode is provided as an option in Terrestrial Broadcasting Operation Standard and its compatibility with receivers not supporting it is considered too so it is usable also in BS broadcasting for terrestrial and satellite common use receivers For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 4 10 10 6 2 Out screen display function The out screen display function is an optional standard not related to operation of caption text transmission preferably this function can operate for reception of BS broadcasts too For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 4 11 10 7 Print function This function is provided as an option in Terrestrial Broadcasting Operation Standard and it is usable also in BS broadcasting for terrestrial a
366. size Line direction display block size Line spacing 2 Action position reference point Character spacing 4 Character spacing 4 gt Font size 2 Figure 7 4 Relationships among display block font size medium character spacing and line spacing in horizontal writing 3 85 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Word direction display block size Line spacing 4 Line direction display block size Font size 2 Action position reference point Character spacing 4 Character spacing 4 Font size 2 Figure 7 5 Relationships among display block font size small character spacing and line spacing in horizontal writing Word direction display block size Line spacing 2X3 Font sizex2 Line spacing 2 Action position reference point Character spacing 2 Fontsize Character spacing 2 Figure 7 6 Relationships among display block font size double height character spacing and line spacing in horizontal writing 3 86 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Word direction display block size Line spacing 2 y A Line direction display Font size block size y A Line spacing 2 Action gt position Character Font sizex2 Character reference Spacing spacing point Figure 7 7 Relationships among display block font size double width character spacing and line spacing in horizontal writing 3 87 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Word direction displa
367. sonal data that a user has set in the manufacturer specific region 2 23 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 The operation menu for this function should be located at a relatively deep menu layer in order to prevent a user from unintentionally deleting personal data 4 14 Error messages An error message must be shown on the display once an error is caused by one of the problems described in Table 4 1 Manufacturers can decide how to display an error message Table 4 1 shows some example error messages that correspond to programs for suggesting a user to identify the cause of the error and take a corrective action These examples are only recommendations Note that the receiver can also display the error codes shown in Table 4 1 with corresponding error messages For information on error messages related to IC cards see 4 18 in Section 5 of Part 1 of this document Table 4 1 List of error messages and error codes Cause of an error Example error message on Error code Corrective action the display A user selects a non broadcasting channel The reception level has been lowered because of rain or thunder There may be some bad contact with an antenna cable or connector The receiver cannot receive any signals because of rain or thunder There may be some disconnections with an antenna cable or connector Some incorrect settings have been specified A short circuit has occurred in the internal wires of the antenna cable
368. spec first byte pos last byte pos first byte pos 1 DIGIT last byte pos 1 DIGIT instance length 1 DIGIT The first byte pos indicates the location of the first byte of the pre encryption content and the last byte pos indicates the location of the last byte of the pre encryption content yte p y p The instance length indicates the size of the entire pre encryption content If the entire size is too difficult to calculate an asterisk may be used A sample description of Content Range dtcp com is shown below Content Range dtcp com bytes 1539686400 1541710655 9238118400 When a TS formatted content with a time stamp is accessed through Range dtcp com the requested range should match the size of the TS formatted packet with a time stamp one packet 192 bytes 2 84 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 1 4 5 Conversion rules for the expanded characters used in tuner description The character codes used in the tuner description in a digital satellite receiver must follow the rules specified in 9 2 3 Tuner description specifications in ARIB STD B21 However the additional 8 bit symbols defined by 7 1 of Part 2 of Vol 1 of ARIB STD B24 must follow the specifications shown in Table 7 19 of Part 2 of Vol 1 of ARIB STD B24 Blank sheet 2 85 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 lt Intentionally blank gt 2 86 Volume 3 BS Digital Satellite Broadcasting Operational Guidel
369. splay area An area on which raster color control is performed shall be a rectangle specified by SDF which specifies display dots and by SDP which specifies a display position To specify raster color control a CLUT s index value refer to Appendix 1 shall be specified in P11 P1i by using RCS raster color control 7 5 4 Using boxing Boxing controls addition of a frame composed of four outer sides in the display block The box line thickness shall be 1 dot A box is correctly drawn over the entire display block only in a display block specified in Table 7 16 The function to display a box over the entire display block even if character spacing or line spacing is changed freely shall be optional When boxing is specified in the word direction or line direction if a free character or line space of dot or more does not exist in the corresponding direction word or line it is not guaranteed that a box can be drawn correctly Note that the boxing gradation depends on the implementation of the receiver The implementation of 4 step box gradation into the receiver is not mandatory 3 101 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 5 5 Using underlining An underline shall be drawn with a single dot thickness on an outer side in the display block And it shall be added to a side of the next line when in horizontal writing while it shall be added to a side of the previous line when in vertical writing An underline is correctly drawn over the en
370. ssage is assumed to be stored in ascending order based on moduleld note that moduleId may not be a continuous series Table 5 9 describes userNetworkMessage usage Table 5 9 Usage of Dll userNetworkMessage Field Usage Remarks dsmecMessageHeader protocolDiscriminator As per the specifications 0x11 dsmccType As per the specifications 0x03 messageld As per the specifications 0x 1002 3 46 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Field Usage Remarks transaction_id As per the specifications Transaction Number the lower 30bits in transaction_id normally increments by 1 in the following cases e Data event switching occurs e One or more of the modules in the carousel is updated e The number of modules in the carousel changes including a change involving numberOfModules 0 A change in transaction_id does not necessarily cause contents_id in the EIT data content descriptor to be updated dsmcecA daptionHeader Not used downloadId As per the specifications Updated after data_event_id is used to each data event switching switch data events and bit31 28 data_event_id also to prevent reception bit27 0 alll of incorrect event Used for switching with local content messages for identifier and for matching event messages chronologically adjacent to local content local content blockSize Fixed at 4066 4066 windowSize As per the specifications
371. ssages seessseeseesseesseessresseesstesseesetesrtesetesrtesetsssesstesseesstesstesstessrestteseeestesseetessressreseeesreese 2 24 5 Hardware and Software Requirements c ccccsccssssceeseceeseeceseececesseecssceceeseeeeseeeseeesseeesseeeeseeenaes 2 26 Sel Wuner vias ait sat aieah tatiana ian Vaan eae ial a a ee ae 2 26 5 22 MS sdecodet iss ciel seat aa a a R a vs eck ie ic caveguevs E a E tsp allah akan E 2 26 5 3 Video decoding and outputting oe eee eeceeseeseeesreeseeesceeseeeseeesseecsceescecseecseecseesceseeseeseneeeneseneenes 2 26 5 4 Audio decoding and outputting eccccescssseceeseeeeneeeeeeesseecsececeseeesseeenseeeseeenaeeseeeenesenseaeenes 2 26 5 5 MEM Ory oniiir e EAE EAEE EE ETE SE NTE TEE TELTE EEs 2 26 SSE BAM e E ese E E R ee aie E 2 26 555 N RAM e a E R R aang ee ee ce nou 2 27 5 6 Char ter fonts niie ania ia a e aE e a E NEE AEREE E EE SETENE EEs 2 27 5 6 1 Data broadcasting services sree ieeesieesssecesseessneessieeesiecssieessessiieessseersiiss 2 27 SG EPO enen A a E EA wt EEA E T 2 27 S Recerver internal sound etsisi deire i heel a a aah a a a a 2 27 58 High speed disital mtertaces enota aa n a a 2 27 5 8 1 Output limit for partial TS sesssessseesseeeseesse esses sess eeesseeeseeeseesneessnessneessnecsneessseeennesneessneeesy 2 27 5 8 2 Operation specifications for a PSI SI table during output of partial TS ve 2 27 5 83 Contol commands foriEEE 30A n anna eit Ae Reese iia ne ce hie Does hoes
372. sseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesseeenes 2 14 4 7 1 Reception of signals sent through hierarchical modulation eeeeeeeeeeeeereereeerereeeteereeee 2 14 4 7 2 Reception of signals sent through Emergency Warning System EWS wrt treet 2 15 4 7 3 Reception of temporary services sree tte teteteteeeteeeeeeeceneneneeeenentneeensnteneananees 9 15 4 7 4 Reception of an event relay sieves eet ttetetneeeeeneneeeeneneneeceneneesensnetceceneteneneanens 2 17 4 7 5 Reception of multi view TV broadcasting RP T TT AT EP E ET Ja 1 8 4 7 6 Reception of CA switching seryjeerteeteeeeteteeterertttetttrttrtterteettettertterttetr terte nrte rtre rten ttnet 2 18 4 8 Reception of data broadcasting services 0 0 ccccccsssessseceeseceeseeeeeeceseecsscecesseeceseecseecseneeeeeeeeteeeenes 2 18 4 8 1 Requirements for a receivers ettettttttttttrttetttettertterttrt neaeeeeeneneeeneneeeeeeentteneeneneeeecanens 2 18 4 8 2 The start and termination operations of data broadcasting service processingvvvevevenes 2 19 4 9 Reception of interactive data broadcasting services ceeeecesceseceseeeeeeeseeeseceseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeesees 2 19 4 10 Reception of subtitles and Captions cccccccecssccssseesseeeeeceeneeesseecssceeseseeeeseeeeseeesseecseaeeseeesenseeenss 2 19 2 j ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 A 11 Program reservation ETRS TET A E E E 2 19 4 11 1 Reservation registration eee esssesseeeeesseesseeessnsesseecsseesseeeseesnessuessneesseeesssesninessenssies 2 19 4 11 2 Confirmation of rese
373. ssion Guidelines 5 7 2 Data common to all receivers Nothing in relation to security 6 Receiver guidelines for downloads 6 1 Memory 1 The memory buffer should be capable of keeping up with the transmission speeds of notifications and download software 2 The memory area allocation for common data should be 10 KB for the genre code table program characteristics code table and keyword list plus additional memory as required for logo data Of the six types of logo data sent the receiver implementation determines which will be acquired Table 6 1 shows 1 14 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 the memory requirements for each logo type For details of common data downloads see Section 6 3 Common Data Reception Guidelines 3 Protection against potential download errors during the receiver software update process is provided by either a two bank memory structure whereby two banks of non volatile memory enable full restoration to pre download status or a one bank a structure whereby one bank is overwritten by the download and a dedicated program is permanently stationed in memory 4 Memory areas used to store logo data for services that are no longer required may be overwritten with logo data for newly added services Table 6 1 Logo data size 300 logos 1 000 services HD large 354 KB HD small 300 KB SD4 3 large 397 KB SD4 3 small 267 KB SD16 9 large 300 KB SD16 9 small 202 KB
374. t Multi view operation and datacasting services Data enriched television programs can be transmitted when multi view is on Note that the same datacasting service applies to all component groups Combinations of audio video and data are described using the component groups descriptor All component groups must contain the same datacasting components the components used to transmit the data carousel or event message Thus when multi view is on all datacasting components must be present in all component groups Component group switching does not affect the datacasting display the document on display continues to be displayed after switching The maximum number of ES stipulated in 5 1 2 5 applies to each individual component group Low layer data like television audio and video does not belong to a component group The return to entry flag may be used during multi view refer to 5 3 1 7 In some cases the value of component tag may be restricted to 1 when referencing an AV stream from a BML document in a multi view program refer to 5 1 2 8 3 56 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 7 Provisional channels and datacasting services e Provisional channels can broadcast data enriched television programs e Datacasting services provided on provisional channels in accordance with the requirements for data enriched television programs 5 8 Interactive transmission protocols in datacasting services As per Section 6 3 57 ARI
375. t an event message containing an NPT reference descriptor hereafter NPT reference message is used to notify the receiver of the respective functions of NPT and STC Purpose of NPT Used to designate time in a way that does not need to be modified or re compiled in the event of a program time shift caused by for instance a baseball game running overtime or a news flash Not compatible with relative time from program start or MJD Used in the same way in the event of a change in CM duration during a repeat broadcast Not compatible with relative time from program start or MJD When timing accuracy of 0 1 second is required for instance in quiz programs This level of accuracy not provided in relative time from program start or MJD When time axis is required for stored content Not compatible with relative time from program start or MJD 5 3 4 2 Transmission of event messages A general purpose event message may be transmitted via the component that transmits the local content that uses the message or by another component NPT reference messages may be sent by multiple components for a single event NPT reference messages are not sent in the same component as a data carousel The event_section_flag in the PMT data encoding descriptor and EIT data content descriptor is not used The value is always 1 DSMCC section that transmits event messages contains either a general purpose event message descriptor or an NPT referen
376. t chronological relationship with the event is used as a means of allowing content switching at any time both within and between programs The content display is switched with each new data event Content transmitted within a single data event is known as local content refer to Figure 5 5 e Data events are identified from data_event_id in DII 5 3 1 2 Data events usage e data_event_id is updated when the local content switches This means that data_event_id will be different after a local content switch and may not necessarily increase by 1 Refer to Figure 5 4 e data_event_id is not always updated when ES stops i e when the component description from PMT is lost ES starting signifies that new local content has commenced There is no need for the receiver to store data_event_id prior to ES stopping Refer to Figure 5 4 e A separate data_event_id is administered and updated for each component The data_event_id value cannot be 15 OxF 3 42 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 K loc content loc content loc content data_event id lt 2 gt lt 4 S lt 1 gt Aloc content x lt 1 Figure 5 4 Local content and data_event_id 5 3 1 3 Local content activation and termination e An update in DII data_event_id is taken to indicate that local content has switched The document currently being displayed is discarded and a new local content startup document is obtained and displayed Refer to 5
377. t depend on data event Dstt rtrt 3 135 10 4 3 NPT reference MESSAGE rrerteerceettreeetetttseesttttseeetttteeeettttceeettttceectttcecenttacecentraresenteaeeseeseeeee snes 3 135 1 0 4 4 Route certificate transmission PAAIE BESS ANEKA BEGUN REKREA AEn AAEE NAA he eed due Bd Aue ed KEARE RAAE AA F AAAA 3 1 35 10 5 sGuidelines on Use OF content ern ean a a e ae aN a a E R EAEE E EES 3 136 10 5 1 Identification of terrestrial and satellite common use receiyersvvveveveneenenenenens 3 136 10 5 2 BML3 0 content placement PIPETTE TIETIES 6 wd Soe US Se ees es eset ees TEAT TEITL EIEII ERTAN TN TETT 3 136 10 5 3 Operation coverage of new functions vitesse itt eteteeeneeteeneneneeecenents 3 136 10 5 4 Operation coverage of browser pseudo objects teeters teeters ettr ttt 3 138 10 5 5 Notes on operation by mixing different BML versions together eeeveveverererenenene 3 143 1 0 5 6 Communication content eeeeereerereereerererrererrerereereesereereesereeresrereererrereerereerereereerererrerereseeeeeeee 3 1 43 10S 6 1 BME versionerne dati R a E S E N as 3 143 10 5 6 2 Sect yieee a n a E A E SA A E 3 143 10 5 6 3 Browser specific display isinen eere eet a e a eee 3 143 10 5 6 4 Route certificate transMiSsiOn cesses eeeceeceeeeeseceeceseeseseecescesesssecseseeseaeeaeeeenaseaes 3 143 10 5 6 5 Print related functioneer n tes ete eed taledes el bed aie es ected tae ted ete oad tae 3 144 10 5 7 Using name spaces lt srrtsieerisrereseeeteieserrneeseeeneesenene
378. t generated in response to subsequent version upgrades of the DSMCC _ section that sends NPT reference messages The receiver treats the NPT value as being undefined if an STCmax reference message is received When an NPT reference message other than an STCmax reference message is received the NPT undefined status is released If no STCmax reference message is sent processing does not need to take account of STC discontinuity including STC 0 circuits Ifsubscribing to NPT specified TimerFired interrupt events at the point when the NPT status becomes undefined i e when the STCmax reference message is received interrupt events with status 1 error are immediately generated for all Similarly if a new NPT specified TimerFired interrupt event is subscribed while NPT is undefined an interrupt event with status 1 is immediately generated If getNPT is executed while NPT is undefined NaN is returned In the case of event message ignition or interrupt event ignition with specified NPT time it is not necessary to take NPT step change and STC discontinuity into consideration Thus implementation can be by timer processing or equivalent The NPT value returned by getNPT corresponds to the NPT step change The receiver stores NPT_Reference NPTr STC_Reference STCr and scale for the last NPT reference message obtained These are stored together as a set When the NPT value is required the NPT value at that point in time NPTc is
379. t_id Content ID startTime Start time of an event Return value 1 Storage already programmed 0 Not programmed NaN Unsuccessful Description Checks whether or not storage reservation is operative for the content specified by the content ID content_id to be transported in the program which is scheduled to start at the time specified by startTime and which is specified by event_ref and responds with a return value How to write event_ref shall follow the specifications for name spaces in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Chapter 9 X BSP preStorageReserveByContent Reserves storage of the specified content Syntax Number X_BSP_preStorageReserveByContent input String event_ref Number content_id input Date startTime Arguments event_ref Specifies an event content_id Content ID startTime Start time of an event Return value 1 Success NaN Unsuccessful Description Reserves storage of the content specified by the content ID content_id to be transported in the program which is scheduled to start at the time specified by startTime and which is specified by event_ref and responds with a return value regarding success or failure How to write event _ref shall follow the specifications for name spaces in ARIB STD B24 Section 2 Chapter 9 X BSP preStorageCancelReservation Cancels programmed storage of the specified content Syntax Number X_BSP_preStorageCancelReservationByContent input String event_ref Number c
380. ta broadcasting when executing printStaticScreen and saveStaticScreenToMemoryCard These functions shall be made usable with resolutions of 960x540 and 720x480 in data broadcasting Note that with a resolution of 720x480 in data broadcasting the aspect ratio of print outputs can become improper and that requires consideration when in operation Alpha a composition between planes is not mandatory And the video plane shall not be composed For details of other specifications refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 6 2 3 10 7 4 Presentation by the receiver For details refer to TR B14 Section 3 Part 2 6 2 4 3 146 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Appendix 1 CLUT Common Fixed Colors CLUT common fixed colors are shown in Table Appendix 1 They are based on 64 colors including half transparent colors and one transparent color They are created based on the following principles 1 The first 16 colors shall correspond to 8 unit code palette colors One of them shall be transparent 2 The remaining colors shall be evenly distributed to color spaces 3 Alpha a values shall be evenly distributed too 4 Because the number of colors based on the above becomes 129 colors with R GB a 255 255 170 128 are deleted 5 Gamma correction is assumed to be imposed e RGB color assignment level With four values of RGB 0 85 170 and 255 64 colors e Alpha a value assignment level With three values of a 0 128 and 255 Note that although
381. tal amount of information in the PES packets whose transmission starts after transmission of the n packet shall not exceed the reception buffer size 64KB e PES packet transmission shall be complete within Td after PTS time Where Td is a time period between completion of reception and completion of presentation and it shall be 0 5 seconds approximately e For the time interval at which a caption text data group s PES packets are transmitted a time interval between the PTS time of a n PES packet and the PTS time of a n 1 PES packet in order of transmission shall be greater than the Td of n data When the total delay T of video satisfies the following conditions transmission in synchronization with video can be possible on the transmit side T gt Lx8 R Td Where L is a maximum PES packet length and R is an ES bit rate e The receiver s action when the data size exceeds the reception buffer size depends on the implementation of the receiver 7 2 3 PES transmission specification used for superimposed text The asynchronous PES transmission specification shall be applied Table 7 2 shows parameters to be set for PES packets Setting parameters Refer to Table 7 2 Maximum number of ESs to be simultaneously transmitted to the same layer 1 Maximum number of languages per ES 2 PES unit data group Maximum PES size 32KB Minimum time interval of PES packet transmission 100 milliseconds Maximum ES rate 256Kbps Reception buffer 64KB or m
382. the appropriate descriptor field within a table as a general rule Must be inserted to the appropriate descriptor field within a table if this descriptor has been inserted to a broadcast program and the data component needs to be output 1 gt Can be inserted to 1 loop 2 Can be inserted to 2 loop D Can be inserted to both 1 loop and ngad loop Insertion of a partial TS time descriptor to the 1st loop transmission _info_loop is optional A partial TS time descriptor should record the program start time and program duration of an EIT As a general rule insertion of this descriptor to the 2nd loop service_loop of the SIT is mandatory 6 2 4 3 Descriptors that can be inserted to the first loop transmission_info loop of an SIT 1 Partial Transport Stream Descriptor Purpose This descriptor is used to describe the stream information of a partial TS Structure Table 6 17 shows the structure of the Partial Transport Stream Descriptor Table 6 17 Structure of a Partial Transport Stream Descriptor Data structure Bit Identifier partial_transport_stream_descriptor descriptor_tag 8 uimsbf descriptor_length 8 uimsbf reserved future use 2 bslbf peak_rate 22 uimsbf reserved future use 2 bslbf minimum overall smoothing rate 22 uimsbf reserved future use 2 bslbf maxmum_ overall smoothing buffer 14 uimsbf 2 50 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Meaning of each field The meanin
383. the maximum number of general purpose event messages that can be subscribed to at the same time is 8 The same sub table may be sent more than once for a general purpose event message to prevent accidental omission There are no rules or requirements regarding the number of transmissions or the intervals between transmissions To prevent accidental omissions the update interval for DSMCC_ section that transmit general purpose event messages within the same ES should be no less than 100ms This represents the recommended value for the interval between the first DSMCC_ section for any version and the DSMCC section for the next updated version It has no bearing on the transmission interval between DSMCC section for adjacent but different versions at the point of updating When sending an NPT designated general purpose event message the ignition time cannot be prior to the transmission time for the STCmax reference message described below NTP designated general purpose event messages are not sent during the period from transmission of the STCmax reference message through to transmission of the first NPT reference message after STCO circulation 5 3 4 4 Transmission of NPT reference messages The table_id_extension in the DSMCC_ section in an NPT reference message is fixed at OxFFFF event_msg group _id 0xFFF data_event_id 0xF event_msg group id O0xFFF is used only for NPT reference messages The transmission interval for NPT reference message
384. ti levels Logic 1 70410 of the peak level of white Logic 0 10 or 5 of the current black level Clock frequency fsc 8 455 16 fH 447kHz fH meaning the horizontal scan frequency Figure 7 6 shows the transmission signal waveform Errors in the time between the appearance of a reference signal to the subsequent bits should be less than 0 44us a Logic 70 10 of th 3 gi 0 e P Ref biti bit2 bit3 bit20 peak level of white Logic S g OmV 10 5 por ote 5 50ns 300mV 11 2us 0 3us 49 1 us 0 44 u s T 1 f sc 8 2 235 us Figure 7 6 Identification signal waveform for a 480i component transmission 7 2 2 3 480p component analog output CGMS A transmission in 480p component analog signals must follow the specifications for the identification signal waveform that is described in the following document e JEITA EIAJ CPR 1204 1 Video ID signal transmission using VBI 525p system 7 2 2 4 720p component analog output CGMS A transmission in 720p component analog signals must follow the specifications for the identification signal waveform that is described in the following document e JEITA EIAJ CPR 1204 2 Video ID signal transmission using VBI 750p 11251 system 7 2 2 5 1080i component analog output CGMS A transmission in 1080i component analog signals must follow the specifications for the identification signal waveform that is described in the following document e JEITA EIAJ CPR 1204 2 Video ID signal transm
385. ti view TV Multiple videos and audios are transmitted within a single service A broadcasting company specifies the combinations of these videos and audios and a viewer can switch between these combinations CAS An acronym for Conditional Access System This system controls the viewing of a service member channel or an event program This system is vital for TV programs that require fees and free TV programs whose contents need to be protected TEEE1394 The serial bus interface that is defined by IEEE Std 1394 1995 IEEE Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus This interface supports high speed real time data transmission Partial TS Partial transport stream A bit stream that is selected and extracted from MPEG transport stream This stream may be a single transport packet or a collection of multiple packets and is not relevant to the program SIT An acronym for Selection Information Table This table provides stream information of a partial TS and information about the service and event that are transmitted through the partial TS DIT An acronym for Discontinuity Information Table This table is inserted to the change points where the partial TS becomes discontinuous CGMS An acronym for Copy Generation Management System This system protects data from copying by managing information about the generations of the data This generation management uses three types of copy controls Copy is poss
386. tial TS needs to be output 5 Parental Rate Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains information on the age at which parental control is applied for an event Output operation rule e Only when this descriptor is inserted to an event of the broadcasted program the same descriptor information may be inserted to the SIT 6 Audio Component Descriptor Purpose This descriptor contains information on the audio component stream that constitutes an event Output operation rule e Ina broadcasted program one descriptor is output for each audio component within an event If a stream identifier descriptor is inserted to the PMT this component descriptor should be inserted to the SIT as a general rule The component descriptor must provide information about the audio component that is inserted to the SIT and the information must remain the same since the information is first transmitted Other notes e The information that the component descriptor provides during broadcast may be inconsistent with the actual properties of the component because an event mode may be changed during an event It is preferable that the component descriptor be changed at the time of partial TS creation so that the information it provides becomes consistent However it is also acceptable to simply insert the unchanged component descriptor to the SIT In a broadcasted program the component_type of the component descriptor indicates the type of the representativ
387. tibility unguranteed in conventional type BS digital receivers The above content shall be isolated before its presentation within the BML1 0 range such as the menu window and shall be put so that it will not be presented in conventional type receivers In BML3 0 content assuming that checking has been made before use the essential functions in terrestrial digital broadcasting can be used without confirmation of their implementation while optional functions in it can be used based on confirmation of their implementation 3 132 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 10 3 Functions demanded of terrestrial and satellite common use receivers Terrestrial and satellite common use receivers shall be provided at least with the functions described in TR B14 and TR B15 Section 2 with respect to media they can receive 10 3 1 RAM The Gregorian calendar shall be shared by all receivable media The Gregorian value shall be retained during presentation of communication content not supporting the Gregorian calendar too Also it is preferable that the Gregorian value is retained during presentation of other media not supporting the Gregorian calendar If the receiver has to stop retaining the Gregorian value during presentation of other media it shall initialize the Gregorian value the first time it attempts to present media supporting the Gregorian calendar after that presentation 10 3 2 NVRAM The bookmark area registered outgoing call area and ge
388. tifier information that indicates the specific stream attribute PNG Portable Network Graphics graphic file format developed as the successor to GIF also known as PING Enables compression without quality degradation File format consists of an eight byte signature followed by a series of chunks TS Transport Stream as stipulated in the MPEG system specifications ISO IEC 13818 1 In BS digital broadcasting each transponder contains multiple TS that are distinguished by the TMCC signal V 22bis Modulation system for full duplex telephone modems at up to 2 400 bps given in ITU T recommendation Event Program Event as per ARIB STD B10 Common fixed colors Colors defined for common use in logo displays and color palettes in receiver units Broadcaster defined Colors that individual broadcasters are permitted to define in combination with colors CLUT index values Receiver dependent Colors that can be defined for individual receivers in combination with CLUT colors index values Pixel expansion A single pixel is expanded vertically and horizontally to cover four pixels 3 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Level 1 2 3 4 Kanji characters Standard character codes for Japanese Kanji characters as specified in JIS X0208 and elsewhere Data carousel A digital broadcasting download format defined in ISO IEC 13818 6 that delivers data in a repeating pattern Transport Stream Refer to TS Upstream c
389. timer recording the engineering 1 21 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 slot TS is selected and the download content acquisition is performed Once the operation is completed the TS or service_id prior to migration to the engineering slot is restored except in the case of memory initialization or equivalent in the course of a download for the purpose of updating the receiver software 1 22 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Appendix 1 Operational rules for download service The operational rules specify the operation rules when the consigned broadcasting operator The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting hereinafter referred to as Dpa who performs data broadcasting engineering stream broadcasting certified by Article 52 13 paragraph 2 in the broadcasting law performs download service targeting the television receivers that have functions of receiving BS digital broadcasting and broadband CS digital broadcasting 1 Purpose of the download service The purpose is to contribute to the smooth operation of the entire BS digital broadcasting broadband CS digital broadcasting by update on data common to all receivers genre code table program code table keyword table logo data used commonly for all the receivers through function update and addition of receiver software by broadcasting using engineering stream broadcasting 2 Engineering Stream Broadcasting It consists of receiver software download broadcastin
390. ting company can be saved to or loaded from this memory space To implement this function the multimedia data service uses broadcaster_id to identify the broadcasting company The above functions of a multimedia data service must be normally operable when a user replays the data component from a partial TS just as they are operable when the original program was received by a receiver As such the above mentioned IDs should be obtainable from the partial PS The service_id can be obtained from one of the fields of the SIT Therefore all of the above mentioned IDs except for this ID should be included in the Broadcast ID Descriptor 2 60 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 7 Other Notes 7 1 Sample processing for determining whether a partial TS can be recorded to a D VHS If a user wants to record a digital satellite broadcasting program to a D VHS which uses a fixed recording rate the user should be able to know whether the program can be recorded to the desired media a tape The user also should be able to select the recording mode to extend the recording time and know how much is the remaining recordable time There are several ways to determine whether the program can be recorded to a D VHS One widely used technique is to obtain a value from the maximum bit rate maximum bit_rate field in the digital copy control descriptor This subsection introduces an example usage of the maximum bit rate 1 Definition of the maximum bit rate The
391. tio for 128 128 scaling as described above 2 Use the respective n 128 pixel numbers for the respective aspect ratios as the display area for displaying in the video plane In the event of non even pixel numbers in either direction the numbers are rounded off from the largest pixel number lower right for both directions For details on pixel numbers refer to ARIB STD B24 e Scaling ratio constraints Scaling ratios above 128 128 apply only to video data with 352x240 or 176x120 MPEG resolution Example 1 Scaling of HD video data Video data and MPEG resolution Display in video plane for datacasting resolution of 960x540 16 9 scaling ratio 128 128 Display in video plane for datacasting resolution of 960x540 16 9 scaling ratio 64 128 16 9 1920x1080 1440x1080 g 1280x720 1920x1080 1920x1080 Mapped to 1080 in the vertical direction and 1440 gt 1920 in the horizontal direction to maintain 16 9 aspect in the video plane 1920x1080 Mapped to 1920x1080 16 9 plane 1920x1080 3 16 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Example 2 Scaling of SD video data 16 9 Display in video plane for Display in video plane for datacasting resolution of 720x480 datacasting resolution of 16 9 scaling ratio 128 128 720x480 16 9 scaling Video data and MPEG resolution ratio 64 128 Oo Ha ae a a ere 360x240 720x480 720x480 720x480 544x480 Mapped to 480
392. tion specifications 6 2 1 PAT 6 2 1 1 Structure and operation of a PAT Purpose This table contains IDs of TS packets that transmit the PMTs and SITs related to the program contents that are inserted into a partial TS Structure Table 6 6 shows the structure of a PAT Table 6 6 Structure of a PAT Program Association Table Data structure Bit Identifier program_association_section table_id 8 uimsbf section_syntax_indicator 1 bslbf 0 1 bslbf Reserved 2 bslbf section_length 12 uimsbf transport_stream_id 16 uimsbf Reserved 2 bslbf Version number 5 uimsbf urrent_next_indicator 1 bslbf section number 8 uimsbf last_section_number 8 uimsbf 2 38 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 for i 0 i lt N i program_number 16 uimsbf Reserved 3 bslbf if program number 0x0000 network PID 13 uimsbf else Program map PID 13 uimsbf CRC_32 32 rpchof Meaning of each field Meaning of each field is defined by Section 5 2 1 of Part 2 of ARIB STD B10 and Section 2 4 4 of ISO IEC13818 1 Output operation rules e The output interval is defined in Section 6 1 3 of this document e Only one PAT can be output with one partial TS e Anew PAT should be output to the same location where the existing PAT has been inserted replacing the existing PAT Table 6 7 describes the rules for output operation of each field Table 6 7 Output operation rules for a PAT Rules for o
393. tionally equivalent encoding method The assignment of preinstalled sounds shall be as shown in Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Assignment of the receiver s preinstalled sounds 0 News flash chime 1 1 News flash chime 2 2 News flash chime 3 3 News flash chime 4 4 News flash chime 5 5 Button 1 6 Button 2 7 Button 3 8 Button 4 9 Button 5 10 Button 6 11 Button 7 12 Button 8 13 Alert 14 15 Numbers in the above table mean sound_ids when specified by using multimedia encoding and they mean preinstalled sounds when specified by using the extended control code PRA in 8 unit codes The receiver s capacity used for preinstalled sounds shall be 480KB 6 3 6 Sound synthesis on the receiver 6 3 6 1 Mix balance It is preferable that the receiver shall perform mixing on sounds that are distributed through different encoding methods at a 1 1 volume ratio 3 65 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 3 6 2 Encoding methods that make simultaneous playback of sounds possible Simultaneous playback of multiple sounds shall be permitted only for the combinations marked with O in Table 6 10 Text in the brackets shows a sound that should play first if simultaneous playback is not possible The following shows the conditions for preferred playback Note that AIFF C file news flash or News flash subtitling sound in the following refers to preinstalled sound to be played for superimposed text for which auto
394. tions in ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 2 5 3 6 2 3 1 Encoding parameters colortype 3 bitdepth 1 2 4 8 When bitdepth 1 2 or 4 is used colors to be specified for a CLUT shall be limited to color indexes fixed colors 0 1 0 3 or 0 15 respectively Image compression type 0 zlib 6 2 3 2 Chunks to be used for PNG Table 6 5 shows chunks to be used for PNG If a chunk other than those listed in Table 6 5 is used the receiver shall ignore it Table 6 5 Chunks to be used for PNG Chunk name Usage details Color depth 1 2 4 8 Color type 3 specified in the palette only IHDR Compression method 0 deflate inflate 32KB or less only Filtering method 0 only eee ca tceeehedietes UM Interlace method __________0 not interlaced only AIDAT ee Filter method _____________0 not filtered only aad IEND e PLTE shall not be used e To specify a color pallet a CLUT shall be referenced instead of using PLTE in PNG chunks 6 2 3 3 Other limitations The data storage type shall be non interlace type The pattern size to be presented shall be the text diagrams plane s full screen size or smaller 6 2 4 MNG Shall be compliant with the specifications in ARIB STD B24 Section 1 Part 2 5 4 6 2 4 1 Chunks to be used for MNG Table 6 6 shows chunks to be used for MNG If a chunk other than those listed in Table 6 6 is used the receiver shall ignore it 3 62 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 6 Chunks
395. tire display block only in a display block specified in Table 7 16 The function to display an underline over the entire display block even if character spacing or line spacing is changed freely shall be optional If a value of less than 2 dots is specified for line spacing it is not guaranteed that an underline can be drawn correctly Note that the underlining gradation depends on the implementation of the receiver including implementation of one dot thickness underlining for 720x480 The implementation of 4 step underlining gradation into the receiver is not mandatory 7 5 6 Using boundary highlighting To use boundary highlighting a value of 2 dots or more shall be specified for character spacing and line spacing respectively If a value of less than 2 dots is specified for both character and line spacing it is not guaranteed that boundary highlighting can be displayed correctly Note that because no halftone is specified the boundary highlighting gradation depends on the implementation of the receiver The implementation of 4 step boundary highlighting gradation into the receiver is not mandatory 7 5 7 Using scrolling It shall be prohibited to instruct SCR multiple times in the same text For scrolling data shall be transported as a different data unit text where a single line display area is specified by SDF The receiver s action when scrolling is specified is as follows e Scrolling is performed in a rectangle specified by SDF and
396. to ARIB including Data Encoding and Transmission Specifications for Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD B24 and Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System ARIB STD B10 The current document BS Digital Satellite Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Datacasting is designed to complement these standards by providing more detailed operational guidelines The aim of the Operational Guidelines is to provide flexibility in datacast programming by individual commissioning broadcasters as well as expandability to allow for future growth in datacasting services The signal transmission and reception specifications contained in these Operational Guidelines are designed to ensure the integrity of datacasting services via BS digital broadcasting 1 1 BS standard level Basic transmission specifications for datacast programming provided by BS digital commissioning broadcasters shall be as per these Operational Guidelines BS digital broadcast receivers are required to be able to receive signal transmitted in accordance with the Operational Guidelines and to be capable of operating without malfunction in the presence of other forms of signal 1 2 BS Level 2 Due to the advent of combined BS CS receivers the Operational Guidelines now provide BS Level 2 specifications designed to replicate additional CS functionality within BS BS Level 2 is designed to ensure ongoing operational compatibility without requiring any modifications or changes t
397. to each component group defined in the component group descriptor In hierarchical transmission this constraint applies to the components in each layer used at high level and low level 5 1 2 6 Section datacasting rules e Multi section transmission two or more sections per TS packet is not permitted in data carousel and event message transmission e Bit rates for transmission of section data in data carousels and event messages are subject to the following limits No more than five TS packets may be sent in succession in a single PID The components maximum 4 PIDs refer to 5 3 6 3 that are received at the same time as the content have a total bit rate of up to 4Mbps including DII DDB and event messages In addition the maximum bit rate per sub table is 2Mbps 8KB 100 per 32 milliseconds If the transmission exceeds these limits the section reception may become less efficient or may be interrupted altogether depending on the receiver 5 1 2 7 Default maximum bit rate for datacasting programs Refer to Section 7 3 28 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 1 2 8 Audio and video components in datacasting services For the purpose of clarity audio and video streams in a PMT are classified as follows Television audio and video audio and video streams as defined in Section 7 which can be played by EPG or equivalent and switched using the audio video buttons The component_tag values are 0x00 OxOF for video
398. to use version numbers that are applicable only to digital satellite broadcasts 6 3 3 Downloading Dedicated BS digital receivers use BS digital common data version numbers and perform downloads when version updated content is delivered Receivers should be designed to accommodate the potential for codes that are exclusive to terrestrial digital broadcasting to be accidentally used in BS digital satellite SI 7 Operational guidelines for receiver information update services 7 1 Uploading guidelines 7 1 1 Provision of download software Receiver manufacturers requiring download capability must supply download content as DII and DDB messages in section format and SDTT in section format to the download broadcasters 7 1 2 Quality check The download broadcasters submit the supplied download software data to a quality check Uploading guidelines are set out in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 4 Upload format for receiver software Quality assurance for download software is described in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 5 2 6 Quality assurance for download software The procedure for submission of download software is described in ARIB STD B21 Appendix 3 Section 5 2 7 Submission of download software 7 1 3 Data common to all receivers Data common to all receivers is administered by the download broadcaster Similarly logo ID is managed centrally 1 18 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Downloading of data c
399. ton If auto_start_flag is 1 the 3 35 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 datacasting engine is activated immediately without waiting for a button operation The next section explains the procedure through to activation e E Chapter 9 describes receiver operations on receivers compatible with pre stored linked data programs where such programs have been stored 5 1 12 2 Receiver operation at start of datacasting program Data transmission operation prerequisites e data_event_id in the PMT data encoding method descriptor is fixed at OxF and is not used e A component with component_tag 0x40 is an entry component the data carousel sent in an entry component is called an entry carousel e The entry component always exists and PID does not change e There is one entry component per event Basic receiver operations at channel selection Guidelines l Where ECM is specified in the PMT 1 loop the corresponding process is performed The following processing is conducted only when the program can be viewed by confirmation of the contract status Where the PMT 2 loop contains television audio and video television video component_tag 0x00 OxOF television audio component_tag 0x10 0x2F these are replayed The entry component the component with component_tag 0x40 is identified from among the components in the PMT gig loop A data_component_id value of 0x0007 in the data encoding method descriptor for the entry
400. torage function does not need to reference this flag content_id_flag As per the specifications If the descriptor contains content_id and content version the flag value is 1 otherwise it is 0 associated_contents_flag As per the specifications When the receiver displays notification on the EPG or equivalent of datacasting in conjunction with a television program it is performed only for events with data content descriptors with 1 specified for this flag style_for tv_flag As per the specifications When this flag is 0 style is not formatted for television content cannot be laid out on television receiver the basic receiver unit will conclude that it cannot be displayed update flag update _flag is not used Always 0 ISO _ 639 language code As per the specifications content_id As per the specifications content_version content_version is used Note that content_version does not change during an event bml major version bml _ minor _version As per the specifications Where these field are included and bml major _ version 1 the basic receiver unit concludes that it is viewable ondemand retrieval _flag As per the specifications A flag value of 1 indicates that the content sent in the current component can be viewed in real time otherwise the flag value is 0 The flag value is always 1 for the entry component of a data enriched television program I
401. tored data programs and operation restrictions Linked pre stored data programs shall be linked interactively to television programs or data enriched television programs through the EIT s hyperlink descriptors For details on how to use hyperlink descriptors refer to 9 2 8 Linked pre stored data programs hyperlinked to a single television program or data enriched television program may be broadcast multiple times 3 116 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Restrictions on the operation of linked pre stored data programs Table 9 1 shows restrictions on the operation of linked pre stored data programs Table 9 1 Restrictions on the operation of linked pre stored data programs Limitations Description Broadcast time constraints For linked pre stored data broadcasting programs and video programs associated with them via hyperlinks their broadcast times shall not overlap each other Constraints when programs If multiple linked pre stored data programs are sent for the same are broadcast multiple television program or data enriched television program the times content_id of content contained in each event shall be the same across events Constraints on program Linked pre stored data programs shall be composed of data only structure not transmitting video audio streams 9 2 4 Use of the PMT s data encoding method descriptor in linked pre stored data programs Regarding storage linked pre stored data broadcasting
402. uld be applied for the channel scrolling of a program list Note the following points when implementing a program list that displays data broadcasting programs e Manufacturers can freely decide how to implement a program list and may either combine or separate a list of data broadcasting programs and a list of TV programs e Areceiver should indicate that a data attached program has a related data broadcast service on the program list 2 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e A receiver should indicate the existence of data programs and local contents for which CA is applied on the program list 4 4 3 Program search 1 A receiver should be implemented with a program search function that enables a user to search for a program based on the program genre information provided through content_nibble_1 General categories and content_nibble_2 Main categories of content_descriptor This function should be operable even if only general category information is available 4 4 4 Program information display 1 Broadcasting companies determines the layouts of program detail information Guidelines should be provided for receiver manufacturers to adapt to these layouts Program detail information should be displayed in lines and each line should contain 20 full width characters The above number of character consumes space equivalent to 480 dots horizontally a half of the total display width when the character and graphic resolution is
403. ult ES must be placed first arib audioComponentType unsigned integer This property represents the type of the audio component As a general rule a converted form of the component_type value of the Audio Component Descriptor contained in the EIT should be assigned to this property The component_type must be converted to a decimal number If one service_id contains multiple audio ESs multiple instances of this property can be set for the accumulated contents The property instance that corresponds to the default ES must be placed first arib audioComponentType qualityIndicator unsigned integer This property represents the quality mode of the audio component As a general rule a converted form of the quality indicator value of the Audio Component Descriptor contained in the EIT should be assigned to this property The quality indicator must be converted to a decimal number 2 77 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 arib copyControlInfo CSV string This property represents information about recording control and output control of a program As a general rule 5 different sets of information should be combined and assigned to this property The encryption mode of the Content Descriptor the digital recording control data APS control_data of the Digital Copy Control Descriptor the bit that indicates whether output is possible and the bit that indicates whether the c
404. urance of the uniqueness of a broadcasting program and its contents Table 1 1 Degree of priority for functions of a receiver Section titles of function specifications of a receiver Degree of Comments priority 4 Requirements for User Interfaces 4 1 Prerequisite system 4 2 Remote controller 4 3 Time management 4 4 EPG 4 4 1 Common rules 4 4 2 Program list 4 4 3 Program search 4 4 4 Program information display 4 4 5 Reserved program display 4 5 Program selection 4 5 1 Channel selection 4 5 2 Program list 4 6 Video audio and subtitle switching 4 7 Adaptation to various TV broadcasting methods 4 7 1 Reception of signals sent through hierarchical Reception A Automatic modulation switching B Also applicable to manual switching PPS lS lm mm Sl gt e p gt Z J w 4 7 2 Reception of signals sent through Emergency Warning System EWS 4 7 3 Reception of temporary services 4 7 4 Reception of an event relay 4 7 5 Reception of multi view TV broadcasting 4 7 6 Reception of CA switching service wo gt 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 4 8 Reception of data broadcasting services A 4 9 Reception of interactive data broadcasting services A 4 10 Reception of subtitles and captions A High priority is ass
405. use of storage of persistent information the broadcaster common area and broadcaster specific area shown in Table 8 1 shall be provided The details of data stored into the broadcaster shared and broadcaster specific areas shall depend on contents defined across broadcasters or contents individually defined by broadcasters Table 8 1 NVRAM used for the broadcaster shared and broadcaster specific areas Type Meaning NVRAM size Broadcaster Area that can be shared for use by all IKB common area broadcasters 64 byte fixed length block 16 Broadcaster Area occupied by individual e IKB per broadcaster specific area broadcasters 64 byte fixed length block 16 e Number of broadcasters 64 Devices to which writing can be done only a limited number of times are used for NVRAM mounted on the receiver Writing more than the specified number of times to such devices can cause failure and result in the shortening of the receiver s life So it is preferable that enough consideration shall be given to prevention of excessive writing to NVRAM The details about the above shall be described in Appendix 3 If the ID used by the previous broadcaster is assigned to the local broadcaster ID broadcaster_id a new broadcaster should completely erase the relevant part of the broadcaster specific NVRAM area before use For the above refer to Appendix 5 8 2 1 Identifying the broadcaster common area To read write information from to the
406. uses devices which have a limited number of writes If the write limit is exceeded these devices can fail reducing the usable life span of the receiver unit For this reason the system design should avoid excessive writing to NVRAM Appendix 3 gives more information on this issue 4 6 Modem Table 4 10 lists modem requirements Table 4 10 Modem requirements Item Requirements BASIC mode procedure Code Independent Mode V22bis 2400bps 3 23 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 Data Transmission Specification Usage This chapter describes newly defined items updates and operational constraints pertaining primarily to XML based multimedia encoding method transmission systems based on the provisions of the documents listed below Except where otherwise specified datacasting services are defined as multimedia datacasting services encoded via XML based multimedia encoding method Any area not covered in this chapter shall be subject to the provisions of the following documents e ARIB STD B10 Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System e ARIB STD B24 Data Encoding and Transmission Specifications for Digital Broadcasting Chapter 9 of this document describes data programs requiring the storage function which is optional on the basic receiver unit Given that the current chapter describes the basic receiver unit any information concerning storage is denoted by the W symbol 5 1 SI PSI 5 1 1 Types of datacasting s
407. utput operation of each field Table id The value 0x00 should be assigned to this field section syntax indicator The value 1 should be assigned to this field section_length The section length of a PAT should be assigned to this field The maximum length of an entire section is 1024 bytes Therefore the maximum value for this field is 1021 transport_stream_id The transport _stream_id of the original transport stream that has contained the PAT should be assigned to this field This field should contain the transport_stream_id used in the original program that constituted the partial TS version_number This field should be incremented by 1 when the PAT is updated When a partial TS starts to be outputs any value can be assigned to this field current next indicator The value 1 should be assigned to this field section number The value 0x00 should be assigned to this field last_section_number The value 0x00 should be assigned to this field program_loop A loop should be created for the services contained in the relevant TS No maximum loop count is specified program_number The service_id of the relevant service should be assigned to this field One program loop for the condition program number 0x0000 must be created within a PAT The PID of an SIT 0x001F should be assigned to the next PID field network PID The PID of an SIT 0x001F should be assigned to this
408. ve limitations on the receiver can be realized it is possible that the total number of resources within a single data event period be 384 or more Contrary to the above limitations if locking of more resources than the above is instructed by lockModuleOnMemory the receiver may not do so Note that the resources here refer to the following two types Resources directly mapped on modules 3 113 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Resources stored into modules in the format of an HTTP 1 1 entity 8 8 Using BML element extension modules interrupt event e It shall be made possible to enable a maximum of 16 ModuleUpdated interrupt events at the same time e It shall be made possible to enable a maximum of 8 TimerFired interrupt events at the same time Timer shall immediately fire if times specified in TimerFired for Absolute time at playback Time at reception or NPT time are discovered to be ones that already passed at the point of interpreting a BML document 8 9 Using procedural scripting languages Time handled by ECMA Script s Date object shall be JST UTC 9 hours time to which summer time offset time is not added If a local time reflecting summer time offset is needed for display of the present time that local time shall be obtained such that a time offset value is added by using addDate to the time that has been obtained by content with the Date function e To obtain cardID as a receiver specific identifier by using t
409. ver can also display the EPG window over the video of a program by using alpha compositing to implement the same effect If a user displays an EPG during data service window display excluding closed captioning instead of video display racing condition may arise between graphic characters of the data service and the EPG Therefore it is advisable that a portion of the data service be discontinued during EPG window display as long as discontinuation does not pose incongruity 5 The currently selected received channel should be appropriately located within the screen so that the channel attracts most attention when a user displays a channel list or program list that cover multiple broadcasting companies 6 If possible a service logo should be displayed within an EPG window The size of a logo the number of horizontal and vertical dots can be changed on the basis of logo data held but the logo design should be maintained The ratio between the length and width and the colors of a logo should also be maintained Service logos can use invisible colors alpha value 0 and semi invisible colors alpha value 128 that are contained in the common fixed colors If a service logo uses these colors and this logo needs to be displayed on the EPG window the following operation is acceptable e Invisible colors These colors can be processed as non displayable colors That is no colors are drawn for the pixels for which these colors are assigned A us
410. ver must start monitoring the emergency warning descriptor in the descriptor region 1 of the current channel s PMT after the receiver is turned on If the start control bit of TMCC is 1 the receiver must start the reception processing of Emergency Warning System EWS signals e Ifa receiver supports reception of TMCC during power off or standby the receiver must perform the reception processing of Emergency Warning System EWS signals during power off or standby Reception of temporary services See 7 3 Temporary formation in Section 7 of Part 1 of this document 2 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Determination of a temporary service e Areceiver can determine whether the presented service_id is the ID of a temporary service by examining whether service type of the NIT is one of the temporary service types Service format identifier OxAO OxA1 or 0xA2 e A service description table SDT is always transmitted as a temporary service through a maximum of 2 SDTV channels for a single broadcaster A receiver can determine the start of a temporary service by monitoring whether service_id of the temporary service has been registered into the PAT Notification of the start of a service A receiver must notify a user of the start of a temporary service by either in program captions or announcement Switching between temporary channels A user should be able to use either the
411. video button up and down buttons or direct channel selection buttons to switch from one temporary service to another Channels for temporary services need to be skipped if no temporary services are on air When a user uses the up and down buttons to switch from one temporary service channel to another the receiver must follow the channel order described in service_id For example if a user uses the up button to move from the channel 101 102 Temporary 103 Temporary to 201 and then uses the down button to move down from 201 the use will return to 103 Temporary If a user uses one of the one touch buttons to select a channel from another TS the receiver must extract information of the PAT Therefore this operation may take a few seconds during which a user cannot perform any operations Display of an EPG Manufacturers can decide whether to implement an EPG It is recommended that the receiver display an EPG when the EPG information is being transmitted Termination of a temporary service Deletion of service_id of a temporary service from the PAT means the termination of the temporary service A receiver must recover the service_id of a normal service that is associated with the same TS or media type as for the temporary service Both the temporary service and normal service must be contained in the same broadcaster Recording Contents of a temporary service cannot be recorded through reserved recording unless the cont
412. ween remote control keys key codes and access keys Table 8 6 shows a mapping of remote control keys that can be used by MM services and key codes and characters to be set as access keys Table 8 6 List of correspondence between remote control keys key codes and access keys Remote control key Key code Access key character 0 9 10 11 12 OK Back Data Color key blue Color key red Color key green Color key yellow Channel selection related keys belonging to other tuning e When the Data button is pressed only a DataButtonPressed interruption event shall occur a keydown or keyup interruption event shall not occur e Channel selection numeric keys other than 0 to 9 or channel selection related keys shall not be used for purposes other than detection of channel selection operation in content using online network transmission In addition key codes to be assigned to channel selection related keys shall depend on the receiver 8 3 3 Guidelines for content that uses selection by color keys To create content that has only color keys as a selection method some indicator other than color such as a character shall be made available for identification of a color key the viewer should select 8 4 Use of BML versions Versions of BML documentation used in this operation shall be as shown below and they shall be fixed as the default versions Table 8 7 BML docum
413. wer s choice shall be done Note that usage when recording playing shall follow the one for reception 7 9 2 Start and end of superimposed text display Shall be the same as the start and end of subtitling display 7 9 3 Setting items on the receiver e The receiver shall display subtitles and superimposed text of the language last selected For example while viewing some program if subtitling in the second language is selected display in the second language shall be made at the time another program with subtitles starts e The receiver shall display the first language by factory default 3 105 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 e Areceiver to which language code such as Japanese and English can be set shall display subtitles and superimposed text in the language that has been set e If subtitles and superimposed text in the language or language code set to the receiver are not transmitted the receiver shall display subtitles and superimposed text in the first language 3 106 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 8 Operating Multimedia Encoding 8 1 Introduction For the use of multimedia encoding in principle follow ARIB STD B24 Section 2 XML based Multimedia Encoding Method e Appendix 1 Usage Guidelines e Appendix 2 Usage Guidelines for Operation of Basic Services This chapter defines items not defined in the above documentation 8 2 Using NVRAM commonly used for MM services As NVRAM space allocated for the
414. wing in conjunction with the data This feature is optional in the basic receiver unit Other data programs Other data programs envisaged in the future which do not fall into the above categories Associated datacasting A general term for datacasting services in which the data portion of data enriched television programs and linked data programs is designed for viewing in conjunction with the image portion Image portion of data enriched television program The non data portion of a data enriched television program Data portion The data portion of a data enriched television program Video recording Recording of broadcast services onto media such as D VHS or HDD in the form of a transport stream or partial transport stream This feature is optional in the basic receiver unit In the case of analogue recording Analogue Recording must be stipulated Program viewing A reservation for viewing a specific program event based on SI information reservation Program recording A reservation for recording a specific program event based on SI information reservation Store Storing a data file onto RAM NVRAM HDD or equivalent Viewing in real time Viewing content as it is obtained from the data carousel Viewing stored data Viewing content after it has been stored as a data carousel modules Independent viewing Viewing stored content only without specifying video and audio streams ref
415. x480 text diag plane resolution Color composition p cco rm ef OSOS Instruction possible only after initialization of the display screen and before appearance of characters with display action or appearance of control code Any of the common fixed colors across receivers and colors specified by broadcasters index values 0 223 can be specified for the color For raster color control usage refer to 7 5 3 Note that an area on which raster color control is performed shall be a rectangle specified by the CSS style in BML s object properties Action position z coordinate setting System data format SDF display dot pattern x setting Display position setting Raster color control Possible to specify only 16x16 20x20 24x24 30x30 and 36x36 dots Character dot pattern setting Partially line forward Partially line z backward Character spacing setting Line spacing setting Character shaping x ae colored areas shall be full display areas Changeover z control Possible to set only 3 fonts specified in Character font Chapter 4 1 Maru Gothic P1 03 01 2 setting Kaku Gothic P1 03 02 and 3 Futo Maru Gothic P1 03 03 P 3 70 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Use in area Character Control function Prulaniedie code Limitations and supplemental remarks Possible to use only without ornaments and ORN Character with boundry highlighting ornaments setting For boundry highlighting usage ref
416. y 0 1 Always same lockModuleOnMemory or cache component as 1 4 General purpose event message 1 1 1 sub table monitoring simultaneously 5 NPT reference message monitoring 1 1 1 sub table simultaneously Total 4 5 5 4 Datacasting service fee structures 5 4 1 Fee structures e As per Section 5 e Subtitles superimposed text are not charged for independently of the default ES group 5 4 2 Receiver requirements e Station selection component selection and program reservation from multimedia content may involve processes such as contract confirmation service charging and viewing restrictions confirmation These are performed by the receiver rather than the content 5 5 Low layer transmission of datacasting services e Data including subtitles and superimposed text can be transmitted at a low layer That is data can be transmitted only at a higher layer at a lower layer or via a combination of low and high layers e Where low layer data references television audio and or video the data employs a modulation system which is either the same as that of the television audio video or at a lower layer 3 55 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 5 6 Low layer data that references low layer video is treated as datacasting resolution content for low layer video The layer transmission descriptor conforms to television audio layer transmission as described in Section 7 When both high and low layer data components are t
417. y block size Line spacing 2X3 y Line direction display block size Font sizex2 y Line spacing 2 SA A Action Character Font sizeX2 Character position spacing spacing reference point Figure 7 8 Relationships among display block font size double height width character spacing and line spacing in horizontal writing 3 88 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Line direction display Action position block size reference point Character spacing 2 Word direction display block size Font size Character spacing 2 Line spacing 2 Font size Line spacing 2 Figure 7 9 Relationships among display block font size standard character spacing and line spacing in vertical writing reference point Character spacing 4 Word direction display block size Font size 2 Character spacing 4 Line spacing 2 Font size Line spacing 2 Figure 7 10 Relationships among display block font size medium character spacing and line spacing in vertical writing 3 89 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Line direction display Action position block size reference point Character spacing 4 Word direction display block size Font size 2 Character spacing 4 Line spacing 4 Line spacing 4 Font size 2 Figure 7 11 Relationships among display block font size small character spacing and line spacing in vertical writing 3 90 ARIB TR B15 Version
418. y decide whether to implement NVRAM s other than the ones mentioned above 5 6 Character fonts The receiver must be implemented with the following character fonts for data broadcasting services SI and EPG 5 6 1 Data broadcasting services See 4 2 5 Fonts and 7 6 Operation of DRCS in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document Font data are transmitted through 4 gradations format Therefore the receiver must appropriately display these fonts Effects of gradation are dependent on the receiver 5 6 2 EPG Manufacturers can decide which character fonts and sizes should be used for an EPG For information on character sets see 4 1 Character sets in Section 4 of Part 1 of this document 5 7 Receiver internal sound See 6 3 5 Receiver internal sound in Section 3 of Part 1 of this document 5 8 High speed digital interfaces If a receiver needs to be equipped with a high speed digital interface see Chapter 9 Specifications for high speed digital interfaces and Appendix 2 High speed digital interface in ARIB STD B21 5 8 1 Output limit for partial TS e When outputting a digital satellite broadcasting program the receiver should not output a component that cannot be descrambled 5 8 2 Operation specifications for a PSI SI table during output of partial TS Some rules have been established for the specifications of partial TS Partial TS may be transmitted from a cape a bs ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 receiver unit via
419. y position of an MNG cannot be changed The PNG object size in an MNG shall be unchangeable A fully transparent color s position on a CLUT shall be fixed In the basic receiver unit even if there is delay in the updates of PNG files that should be executed simultaneously with execution of other drawing operations PNG images shall not be skipped but displayed in sequence When the top frame specifies framing mode 0 MNG shall be treated as in framing mode 1 which is the default setting regardless of the number of cycles 3 63 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 3 Audio encoding 6 3 1 MPEG 2 AAC Shall be compliant with the specifications in Section 7 4 2 Sound 6 3 1 1 Encoding parameters Table 6 7 MPEG 2 AAC encoding parameters Sampling frequency Bit length 48kHz 32kHz 16 bit 6 3 1 2 Transporting MPEG 2 AAC Sound encoded by using MPEG 2 AAC shall be transported through an audio PES stream format identification OxOF and data carousel stream format identification 0x0D For the file format when sound is transported through a data carousel refer to 6 3 1 4 6 3 1 3 Limitations in data carousel distribution The file size shall be 256KB or less The sampling frequency shall be 48KHz Sound and MPEG 2Video and or MPEG I cannot play simultaneously 6 3 1 4 ACC audio file data format Shall be in MPEG 2 AAC Elementary Stream format As shown in Figure 6 1 an audio frame composed of an ADTS header and audio dat
420. y represents the type of the video component As a general rule a converted form of the component_type value of the Component Descriptor contained in the EIT should be assigned to this property The component type must be converted to a decimal number If one service_id contains multiple video ESs multiple instances of this property can be set for a channel item The property instance that corresponds to the default ES must be placed first arib audioComponentType unsigned integer This property represents the type of the audio component As a general rule a converted form of the component_type value of the Audio Component Descriptor contained in the EIT should be assigned to this property The component_type must be converted to a decimal number If one service_id contains multiple audio ESs multiple instances of this property can be set for a channel item The property instance that corresponds to the default ES must be placed first arib audioComponentType qualityIndicator unsigned integer This property represents the quality mode of the audio component As a general rule a converted form of the quality_indicator value of the Audio Component Descriptor contained in the EIT should be assigned to this property The quality indicator must be converted to a decimal number arib copyControlInfo CSV string This property represents information about recording control and
421. y_counter occurs within a transport packet header of at least one of the packets that constitute a partial TS a DIT must also be inserted to the points where this type of discontinuity occurs Discontinuity of continuity counter means an addition or deletion of an ES This type of discontinuity may occur in a normal broadcast stream due to some problems caused by a broadcaster In such case no DIT needs to be inserted A receiver needs to insert a DIT to a partial TS when there are some discontinuity points in a partial TS due to some programs caused by the receiver The following actions may cause discontinuity which necessitates insertion of a DIT to a partial TS Start or stop of partial TS output Change to a service that constitutes a stream during partial TS output This change involves discontinuity of ES PCR and may be caused by channel change Change to an ES that constitutes a stream during partial TS output This change does not involve any changes to the output service and may be due to any reasons for example addition or deletion of an ES When a program switch from one stream to another only one DIT should be inserted between the old stream and new stream Separate streams should be inserted at the end of the old stream and should not be inserted at the beginning of the new stream If discontinuity of a partial TS has been caused by none of the above actions for example caused by change in SI information no DIT should be in
422. z simultaneous playback is not possible The MPEG 2AAC_LC which is transported through an audio PES shall play first 3 66 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 6 4 Character encoding 6 4 1 8 unit code including EUC JP 6 4 1 1 Constraints on the character code function Table 6 11 shows whether the character code function can be used when codes are used as mono media referenced from multimedia code For whether or not the character code function can be used for subtitles and superimposed text refer to 7 5 Control code used for subtitles and superimposed text 3 67 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 6 E1 Table 6 11 Whether or not the character code function can be used 1 CO control set Co Use in Limitations and BEL Bel x forward x x Record separator data header RS Pee x identification sign Unit separator data unit US pee x identification sign O Usable A Usable with conditions x Not usable 2 C1 control set C1 Use in multimedia Limitations and supplemental Control function ee Saris Black foreground and Specifies 0 to the color map lower color map lower address for the foreground address setting Red foreground and color map lower address setting Le Green foreground and G color map lower address setting Yellow foreground and Specifies 3 to the color map lower Y color map lower address for the foreground address setting E eld Specifies 1 to the color map lower

4.6-E1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents